Table of Contents
- Package Contents
- Chapter 1 About this Guide
- Chapter 2 Introduction
- Chapter 3 Login to the Switch
- Chapter 4 System
- Chapter 5 Switching
- Chapter 6 VLAN
- Chapter 7 Spanning Tree
- Chapter 8 Ethernet OAM
- Chapter 9 Multicast
- Chapter 10 Routing
- Chapter 11 QoS
- Chapter 12 PoE
- Chapter 13 ACL
- Chapter 14 Network Security
- 14.1 IP-MAC Binding
- 14.2 IPv6-MAC Binding
- 14.3 DHCP Snooping
- 14.4 DHCPv6 Snooping
- 14.5 ARP Inspection
- 14.6 ND Detection
- 14.7 IP Source Guard
- 14.8 DoS Defend
- 14.9 802.1X
- 14.10 PPPoE
- 14.11 AAA
- 14.11.1 Global Config
- 14.11.2 Privilege Elevation
- 14.11.3 RADIUS Server Config
- 14.11.4 TACACS+ Server Config
- 14.11.5 Authentication Server Group Config
- 14.11.6 Authentication Method List Config
- 14.11.7 Application Authentication List Config
- 14.11.8 802.1X Authentication Server Config
- 14.11.9 Default Settings
- Chapter 15 SNMP
- Chapter 16 LLDP
- Chapter 17 Maintenance
- Appendix A. Password Recovery
- Appendix B. Specifications
- Appendix C. Glossary
TP-Link T2600G-52TS(TL-SG3452) User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for T2600G-52TS(TL-SG3452) by TP-Link which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.
T2600G-28TS (TL-SG3424)
T2600G-52TS (TL-SG3452)
T2600G-28MPS (TL-SG3424P)
JetStream Gigabit L2 Managed Switch
REV1.1.0
191001
1732
COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS
Specifications are subject to change without notice. is a registered trademark of
TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Other brands and product names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any
derivative such as translation, transformation, or adaptation without permission from TP-LINK
TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright © 2016 TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights
reserved.
http://www.tp-link.com
FCC STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CE Mark Warning
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Продукт сертифіковано згідно с правилами системи УкрСЕПРО на відповідність вимогам
нормативних документів та вимогам, що передбачені чинними законодавчими актами
України.
Industry Canada Statement
CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A)
III
Explanation of the symbols on the product label
Symbol Explanation
AC voltage
RECYCLING
This product bears the selective sorting symbol for Waste electrical and electronic
equipment (WEEE). This means that this product must be handled pursuant to
European directive 2012/19/EU in order to be recycled or dismantled to minimize
its impact on the environment.
User has the choice to give his product to a competent recycling organization or to
the retailer when he buys a new electrical or electronic equipment.
Safety Information
When product has power button, the power button is one of the way to shut off the product;
When there is no power button, the only way to completely shut off power is to disconnect the
product or the power adapter from the power source.
Don’t disassemble the product, or make repairs yourself. You run the risk of electric shock and
voiding the limited warranty. If you need service, please contact us.
Avoid water and wet locations.
安全諮詢及注意事項
●請使用原裝電源供應器或只能按照本產品注明的電源類型使用本產品。
●清潔本產品之前請先拔掉電源線。請勿使用液體、噴霧清潔劑或濕布進行清潔。
●注意防潮，請勿將水或其他液體潑灑到本產品上。
●插槽與開口供通風使用，以確保本產品的操作可靠並防止過熱，請勿堵塞或覆蓋開口。
●請勿將本產品置放於靠近熱源的地方。除非有正常的通風，否則不可放在密閉位置中。
●請不要私自打開機殼，不要嘗試自行維修本產品，請由授權的專業人士進行此項工作。
此為甲類資訊技術設備，于居住環境中使用時，可能會造成射頻擾動，在此種情況下，使用者會被
要求採取某些適當的對策。
IV
CONTENTS
Package Contents ............................................................................................................................ 1
Chapter 1 About this Guide ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Intended Readers ........................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Conventions ................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Overview of This Guide .................................................................................................. 3
Chapter 2 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 8
2.1 Overview of the Switch ................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Appearance Description ................................................................................................. 8
2.2.1 Front Panel .......................................................................................................... 8
2.2.2 Rear Panel ........................................................................................................ 13
Chapter 3 Login to the Switch ...................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Login ............................................................................................................................. 14
3.2 Configuration ................................................................................................................ 15
Chapter 4 System ......................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 System Info .................................................................................................................. 16
4.1.1 System Summary .............................................................................................. 16
4.1.2 Device Description ............................................................................................ 17
4.1.3 System Time ...................................................................................................... 18
4.1.4 Daylight Saving Time ........................................................................................ 19
4.1.5 Serial Port Setting ............................................................................................. 20
4.2 User Management ........................................................................................................ 21
4.2.1 User Table ......................................................................................................... 21
4.2.2 User Config ....................................................................................................... 21
4.3 System Tools ................................................................................................................ 23
4.3.1 Boot Config ........................................................................................................ 23
4.3.2 Config Restore .................................................................................................. 24
4.3.3 Config Backup ................................................................................................... 24
4.3.4 Firmware Upgrade............................................................................................. 25
4.3.5 System Reboot .................................................................................................. 26
4.3.6 Reboot Schedule ............................................................................................... 26
4.3.7 System Reset .................................................................................................... 27
4.4 Access Security ............................................................................................................ 27
4.4.1 Access Control .................................................................................................. 27
4.4.2 HTTP Config ...................................................................................................... 29
4.4.3 HTTPS Config ................................................................................................... 29
4.4.4 SSH Config ........................................................................................................ 32
III
4.4.5 Telnet Config ..................................................................................................... 39
4.5 SDM Template .............................................................................................................. 39
4.5.1 SDM Template Config ....................................................................................... 39
Chapter 5 Switching ..................................................................................................................... 41
5.1 Port ............................................................................................................................... 41
5.1.1 Port Config ........................................................................................................ 41
5.1.2 Port Mirror.......................................................................................................... 42
5.1.3 Port Security ...................................................................................................... 44
5.1.4 Port Isolation ..................................................................................................... 46
5.1.5 Loopback Detection .......................................................................................... 47
5.2 LAG .............................................................................................................................. 49
5.2.1 LAG Table .......................................................................................................... 50
5.2.2 Static LAG.......................................................................................................... 51
5.2.3 LACP Config ...................................................................................................... 52
5.3 Traffic Monitor ............................................................................................................... 54
5.3.1 Traffic Summary ................................................................................................ 54
5.3.2 Traffic Statistics ................................................................................................. 55
5.4 MAC Address ............................................................................................................... 56
5.4.1 Address Table .................................................................................................... 58
5.4.2 Static Address .................................................................................................... 59
5.4.3 Dynamic Address .............................................................................................. 60
5.4.4 Filtering Address ................................................................................................ 62
5.4.5 MAC Notification ................................................................................................ 63
5.4.6 MAC VLAN Security .......................................................................................... 64
5.5 L2PT ............................................................................................................................. 65
5.5.1 L2PT Config....................................................................................................... 66
Chapter 6 VLAN............................................................................................................................ 68
6.1 802.1Q VLAN ............................................................................................................... 69
6.1.1 VLAN Config ...................................................................................................... 70
6.1.2 Port Config ........................................................................................................ 71
6.2 Application Example for 802.1Q VLAN ........................................................................ 73
6.3 MAC VLAN ................................................................................................................... 74
6.3.1 MAC VLAN ........................................................................................................ 75
6.3.2 Port Enable ........................................................................................................ 76
6.4 Application Example for MAC VLAN ............................................................................ 76
6.5 Protocol VLAN .............................................................................................................. 78
6.5.1 Protocol Group Table ......................................................................................... 79
IV
6.5.2 Protocol Group .................................................................................................. 80
6.5.3 Protocol Template .............................................................................................. 80
6.6 Application Example for Protocol VLAN ...................................................................... 82
6.7 VLAN VPN .................................................................................................................... 84
6.7.1 VPN Config ........................................................................................................ 85
6.7.2 Port Enable ........................................................................................................ 86
6.7.3 VLAN Mapping .................................................................................................. 86
6.8 GVRP ........................................................................................................................... 89
6.9 Private VLAN ................................................................................................................ 92
6.9.1 PVLAN Config ................................................................................................... 94
6.9.2 Port Config ........................................................................................................ 95
6.10 Application Example for Private VLAN ........................................................................ 96
Chapter 7 Spanning Tree .............................................................................................................. 99
7.1 STP Config ................................................................................................................. 104
7.1.1 STP Config ...................................................................................................... 104
7.1.2 STP Summary ................................................................................................. 106
7.2 Port Config ................................................................................................................. 107
7.3 MSTP Instance ........................................................................................................... 108
7.3.1 Region Config .................................................................................................. 109
7.3.2 Instance Config ............................................................................................... 109
7.3.3 Instance Port Config ......................................................................................... 110
7.4 STP Security ............................................................................................................... 112
7.4.1 Port Protect ...................................................................................................... 112
7.4.2 TC Protect ........................................................................................................ 115
7.5 Application Example for STP Function ....................................................................... 115
Chapter 8 Ethernet OAM ............................................................................................................ 120
8.1 Basic Config ............................................................................................................... 123
8.1.1 Basic Config .................................................................................................... 124
8.1.2 Discovery Info .................................................................................................. 125
8.2 Link Monitoring ........................................................................................................... 127
8.3 RFI .............................................................................................................................. 128
8.4 Remote Loopback ...................................................................................................... 129
8.5 Statistics ..................................................................................................................... 130
8.5.1 Statistics .......................................................................................................... 130
8.5.2 Event Log ........................................................................................................ 131
8.6 DLDP .......................................................................................................................... 132
8.7 Application Example for DLDP ................................................................................... 136
V
Chapter 9 Multicast ..................................................................................................................... 139
9.1 IGMP Snooping .......................................................................................................... 143
9.1.1 Snooping Config .............................................................................................. 145
9.1.2 Port Config ...................................................................................................... 147
9.1.3 VLAN Config .................................................................................................... 148
9.1.4 Multicast VLAN ................................................................................................ 149
9.1.5 Querier Config ................................................................................................. 153
9.1.6 Profile Config ................................................................................................... 154
9.1.7 Profile Binding ................................................................................................. 156
9.1.8 Packet Statistics .............................................................................................. 157
9.1.9 IGMP Authentication ........................................................................................ 159
9.2 MLD Snooping............................................................................................................ 160
9.2.1 Snooping Config .............................................................................................. 161
9.2.2 Port Config ...................................................................................................... 164
9.2.3 VLAN Config .................................................................................................... 165
9.2.4 Multicast VLAN ................................................................................................ 166
9.2.5 Querier Config ................................................................................................. 168
9.2.6 Profile Config ................................................................................................... 169
9.2.7 Profile Binding ................................................................................................. 171
9.2.8 Packet Statistics .............................................................................................. 172
9.3 Multicast Table ............................................................................................................ 174
9.3.1 IPv4 Multicast Table ........................................................................................ 174
9.3.2 Static IPv4 Multicast Table .............................................................................. 174
9.3.3 IPv6 Multicast Table ........................................................................................ 176
9.3.4 Static IPv6 Multicast Table .............................................................................. 176
Chapter 10 Routing ...................................................................................................................... 179
10.1 Interface ..................................................................................................................... 179
10.2 Routing Table ............................................................................................................. 191
10.2.1 IPv4 Routing Table .......................................................................................... 191
10.2.2 IPv6 Routing Table .......................................................................................... 191
10.3 Static Routing ............................................................................................................. 192
10.3.1 IPv4 Static Routing Config .............................................................................. 192
10.3.2 IPv6 Static Routing Config .............................................................................. 193
10.4 DHCP Server .............................................................................................................. 194
10.4.1 DHCP Server ................................................................................................... 200
10.4.2 Pool Setting ..................................................................................................... 201
10.4.3 Manual Binding ................................................................................................ 202
VI
10.4.4 Binding Tabl e ................................................................................................... 203
10.4.5 Packet Statistics .............................................................................................. 204
10.4.6 Application Example for DHCP Server and Relay .......................................... 205
10.5 DHCP Relay ............................................................................................................... 207
10.5.1 Global Config ................................................................................................... 209
10.5.2 DHCP Server ................................................................................................... 210
10.6 ARP ............................................................................................................................. 211
10.6.1 ARP Table ......................................................................................................... 211
10.6.2 Static ARP......................................................................................................... 211
Chapter 11 QoS ............................................................................................................................ 213
11.1 DiffServ ....................................................................................................................... 216
11.1.1 Port Priority ...................................................................................................... 216
11.1.2 Schedule Mode ............................................................................................... 217
11.1.3 802.1P Priority ................................................................................................. 218
11.1.4 DSCP Priority .................................................................................................. 219
11.2 Bandwidth Control ...................................................................................................... 221
11.2.1 Rate Limit ........................................................................................................ 221
11.2.2 Storm Control .................................................................................................. 222
11.3 Voice VLAN ................................................................................................................ 223
11.3.1 Global Config ................................................................................................... 225
11.3.2 Port Config ...................................................................................................... 226
11.3.3 OUI Config ....................................................................................................... 227
Chapter 12 PoE ............................................................................................................................ 229
12.1 PoE Config ................................................................................................................. 229
12.1.1 PoE Config ...................................................................................................... 230
12.1.2 PoE Profile ...................................................................................................... 231
12.2 Time-Range ................................................................................................................ 232
12.2.1 Time-Range Summary .................................................................................... 233
12.2.2 Time-Range Create ......................................................................................... 233
12.2.3 Holiday Config ................................................................................................. 235
Chapter 13 ACL ............................................................................................................................ 237
13.1 Time-Range ................................................................................................................ 237
13.1.1 Time-Range Summary .................................................................................... 237
13.1.2 Time-Range Create ......................................................................................... 238
13.1.3 Holiday Config ................................................................................................. 239
13.2 ACL Config ................................................................................................................. 239
13.2.1 ACL Summary ................................................................................................. 239
VII
13.2.2 ACL Create ...................................................................................................... 240
13.2.3 MAC ACL ......................................................................................................... 240
13.2.4 Standard-IP ACL .............................................................................................. 242
13.2.5 Extend-IP ACL ................................................................................................. 243
13.2.6 Combined ACL ................................................................................................ 244
13.2.7 IPv6 ACL.......................................................................................................... 245
13.3 Policy Config .............................................................................................................. 247
13.3.1 Policy Summary .............................................................................................. 247
13.3.2 Policy Create ................................................................................................... 248
13.3.3 Action Create ................................................................................................... 248
13.4 ACL Binding................................................................................................................ 249
13.4.1 Binding Table ................................................................................................... 250
13.4.2 Port Binding ..................................................................................................... 251
13.4.3 VLAN Binding .................................................................................................. 252
13.5 Policy Binding ............................................................................................................. 252
13.5.1 Binding Table ................................................................................................... 253
13.5.2 Port Binding ..................................................................................................... 254
13.5.3 VLAN Binding .................................................................................................. 255
13.6 Application Example for ACL ..................................................................................... 255
Chapter 14 Network Security........................................................................................................ 258
14.1 IP-MAC Binding .......................................................................................................... 258
14.1.1 Binding Table ................................................................................................... 258
14.1.2 Manual Binding ................................................................................................ 259
14.1.3 ARP Scanning ................................................................................................. 261
14.2 IPv6-MAC Binding ...................................................................................................... 262
14.2.1 Binding Table ................................................................................................... 263
14.2.2 Manual Binding ................................................................................................ 264
14.2.3 ND Snooping ................................................................................................... 266
14.3 DHCP Snooping ......................................................................................................... 268
14.3.1 Global Config ................................................................................................... 271
14.3.2 Port Config ...................................................................................................... 272
14.3.3 Option 82 Config ............................................................................................. 273
14.4 DHCPv6 Snooping ..................................................................................................... 274
14.5 ARP Inspection ........................................................................................................... 275
14.5.1 ARP Detect ...................................................................................................... 278
14.5.2 ARP Defend..................................................................................................... 279
14.5.3 ARP Statistics .................................................................................................. 280
VIII
14.6 ND Detection .............................................................................................................. 281
14.7 IP Source Guard ......................................................................................................... 283
14.8 DoS Defend ................................................................................................................ 285
14.8.1 DoS Defend ..................................................................................................... 286
14.9 802.1X ........................................................................................................................ 286
14.9.1 Global Config ................................................................................................... 290
14.9.2 Port Config ...................................................................................................... 291
14.10 PPPoE ........................................................................................................................ 293
14.11 AAA ............................................................................................................................ 296
14.11.1 Global Config ........................................................................................... 297
14.11.2 Privilege Elevation ................................................................................... 297
14.11.3 RADIUS Server Config ............................................................................ 297
14.11.4 TACACS+ Server Config ......................................................................... 298
14.11.5 Authentication Server Group Config ........................................................ 299
14.11.6 Authentication Method List Config ........................................................... 301
14.11.7 Application Authentication List Config ..................................................... 302
14.11.8 802.1X Authentication Server Config ....................................................... 303
14.11.9 Default Settings ........................................................................................ 303
Chapter 15 SNMP......................................................................................................................... 305
15.1 SNMP Config .............................................................................................................. 307
15.1.1 Global Config ................................................................................................... 307
15.1.2 SNMP View ..................................................................................................... 308
15.1.3 SNMP Group ................................................................................................... 309
15.1.4 SNMP User ...................................................................................................... 310
15.1.5 SNMP Community ........................................................................................... 312
15.2 Notification .................................................................................................................. 314
15.3 RMON......................................................................................................................... 316
15.3.1 Statistics .......................................................................................................... 317
15.3.2 History ............................................................................................................. 318
15.3.3 Event ............................................................................................................... 319
15.3.4 Alarm Config .................................................................................................... 320
Chapter 16 LLDP .......................................................................................................................... 322
16.1 Basic Config ............................................................................................................... 326
16.1.1 Global Config ................................................................................................... 326
16.1.2 Port Config ...................................................................................................... 327
16.2 Device Info ................................................................................................................. 328
16.2.1 Local Info ......................................................................................................... 328
IX
16.2.2 Neighbor Info ................................................................................................... 329
16.3 Device Statistics ......................................................................................................... 330
16.4 LLDP-MED ................................................................................................................. 331
16.4.1 Global Config ................................................................................................... 332
16.4.2 Port Config ...................................................................................................... 332
16.4.3 Local Info ......................................................................................................... 335
16.4.4 Neighbor Info ................................................................................................... 336
Chapter 17 Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 337
17.1 System Monitor .......................................................................................................... 337
17.1.1 CPU Monitor .................................................................................................... 337
17.1.2 Memory Monitor .............................................................................................. 338
17.2 sFlow .......................................................................................................................... 339
17.2.1 sFlow Collector ................................................................................................ 340
17.2.2 sFlow Sampler ................................................................................................. 341
17.2.3 Default Settings ............................................................................................... 342
17.3 Log .............................................................................................................................. 342
17.3.1 Log Table ......................................................................................................... 342
17.3.2 Local Log ......................................................................................................... 343
17.3.3 Remote Log ..................................................................................................... 344
17.3.4 Backup Log ..................................................................................................... 345
17.4 Device Diagnostics ..................................................................................................... 346
17.4.1 Cable Test ........................................................................................................ 346
17.5 Network Diagnostics .................................................................................................. 347
17.5.1 Ping ................................................................................................................. 347
17.5.2 Tracert ............................................................................................................. 348
Appendix A. Password Recovery ........................................................................................ 349
Appendix B. Specifications .................................................................................................. 350
Appendix C. Glossary .......................................................................................................... 351
X
Package Contents
The following items should be found in your box:
One JetStream Gigabit L2 Managed Switch
One power cord
Two mounting brackets and other fittings
Installation Guide
Resource CD for T2600G-28TS/ T2600G-52TS/ T2600G-28MPS, including:
• This User Guide
• CLI Reference Guide
• SNMP Mibs
• 802.1X Client Software and its User Guide
• USB Console Driver
• Other Helpful Information
Note:
Make sure that the package contains the above items. If any of the listed items are damaged or
missing, please contact your distributor.
1
Chapter 1 About this Guide
This User Guide contains information for setup and management of T2600G-28TS/
T2600G-52TS/ T2600G-28MPS JetStream Gigabit L2 Managed Switch. Please read this guide
carefully before operation.
1.1 Intended Readers
This Guide is intended for network managers familiar with IT concepts and network terminologies.
1.2 Conventions
When using this guide, please notice that features of the switch may vary slightly depending on
the model and software version you have, and on your location, language, and Internet service
provider. All screenshots, images, parameters and descriptions documented in this guide are used
for demonstration only.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made
in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind,
express or implied. Users must take full responsibility for their application of any products.
In this Guide the following conventions are used:
The switch or the device mentioned in this Guide stands for T2600G-28TS/ T2600G-52TS/
T2600G-28MPS JetStream Gigabit L2 Managed Switch without any explanation.
Menu Name→Submenu Name→Tab page indicates the menu structure. System→System
Info→System Summary means the System Summary page under the System Info menu
option that is located under the System menu.
Bold font indicates a button, a toolbar icon, menu or menu item.
Symbols in this Guide：
Symbol Description
Note: Ignoring this type of note might result in a malfunction or damage to the device.
Tips:
This format indicates important information that helps you make better use of
your device.
More Info:
The latest software, management app and utility can be found at Download Center at
http://www.tp-link.com/support.
The Installation Guide (IG) can be found where you find this guide or inside the package of
the switch.
Specifications can be found on the product page at http://www.tp-link.com.
2
A Technical Support Forum is provided for you to discuss our products at http://forum.tp-link.com.
Our Technical Support contact information can be found at the Contact Technical Support
page at http://www.tp-link.com/support.
1.3 Overview of This Guide
Chapter Introduction
Chapter 1 About This Guide Introduces the guide structure and conventions.
Chapter 2 Introduction
Introduces the features, application and appearance of
T2600G-28TS/ T2600G-52TS/ T2600G-28MPS switch.
Chapter 3 Login to the Switch Introduces how to log on to the Web management page.
Chapter 4 System
This module is used to configure system properties of the
switch. Here mainly introduces:
System Info: Configure the description, system time and
network parameters of the switch.
User Management
: Configure the user name and password
for users to log on to the Web management page with a
certain access level.
System Tools: Manage the configuration file of the switch.
Access Security:
Provide different security measures for the
login to enhance the configuration management security.
SDM Template: Manage the hardware TCAM resources.
Chapter 5 Switching
This module is used to configure basic functions of the switch.
Here mainly introduces:
Port: Configure the basic features for the port.
LAG: Configure Link Aggregation Group. LAG is to combine a
number of ports together to make a single high-bandwidth
data path.
Traffic Monitor: Monitor the traffic of each port.
MAC Address: Configure the address table of the switch.
L2PT: Configure the Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling feature.
3
Chapter Introduction
Chapter 6 VLAN This module is used to configure VLANs to control broadcast in
LANs. Here mainly introduces:
802.1Q VLAN: Configure port-based VLAN.
MAC VLAN: Configure MAC-
based VLAN without changing
the 802.1Q VLAN configuration.
Protocol VLAN: Create VLANs in application layer to make
some special data transmitted in the specified VLAN.
VLAN VPN: VLAN VPN allows the packets with VLAN tags of
private networks to be encapsulated with VLAN tags of public
networks at the network access terminal of the Internet
Service Provider.
GVRP: GVRP allows the switch to aut
omatically add or
remove the VLANs via the dynamic VLAN registration
information and propagate the local VLAN registration
information to other switches, without having to individually
configure each VLAN.
Private VLAN: Designed to save VLAN resources of uplink
devices and decrease broadcast. Private VLAN mainly used
in campus or enterprise networks to achieve user layer-2-
separation and to save VLAN resources of uplink devices.
Chapter 7 Spanning Tree This module is us
ed to configure spanning tree function of the
switch. Here mainly introduces:
STP Config: Configure and view the global settings of
spanning tree function.
Port Config: Configure CIST parameters of ports.
MSTP Instance: Configure MSTP instances.
STP Securi
ty: Configure protection function to prevent
devices from any malicious attack against STP features.
Chapter 8 Ethernet OAM This module is used to configure Ethernet OAM function of the
switch. Here mainly introduces:
Basic Config: Enable the Ethernet OAM function, configure its
OAM mode, and check out the connection status.
Link Monitoring: C
onfigure the parameters about OAM link
events and choose whether to notify the link event.
RFI: Choose whether to notify the link faults like dying gasp
and critical event.
Remote Loopback: Start or stop the remote loopback; choose
to ignore or to process the received remote loopback request.
Statistics: View the statistics about the detailed Ethernet OAM
traffic information and event log information.
DLDP:
Configure the DLDP function to allow the switch to
monitor the physical configuration of the cables and detect
whether a unidirectional link exists.
4
Chapter Introduction
Chapter 9 Multicast This module is used to configure multicast function of the switch.
Here mainly introduces:
IGMP Snooping: Configure global parameters of IGMP
Snooping function, port properties, VLAN and multicast
VLAN.
MLD Snooping: Configure global parameters of MLD
Snooping function, port propertie
s, VLAN and multicast
VLAN.
Multicast Table: View the
information of IPv4 and IPv6
multicast groups already on the switch.
Chapter 10 Routing
The module is used to configure several IPv4 unicast routing
protocols. Here mainly introduces:
Interface: Configure and view different types of interfaces:
VLAN, loopback, routed port and port-channel interface.
Routing table: Displays the routing information summary.
Static Routing: Configure and view static routes.
DHCP Server: Configure DHCP server.
DHCP Relay: Configure DHCP relay.
ARP: Displays the ARP information.
Chapter 11 QoS
This module is used to configure QoS function to provide
different quality of service for various network applications and
requirements. Here mainly introduces:
DiffServ: Configure
priorities, port priority, 802.1P priority and
DSCP priority.
Bandwidth Control: Configure rate limit feature to control the
traffic rate on each port; configure storm control feature to
filter broadcast, multicast and UL frame in the network.
Voice VLAN: Configure voice VLAN to transmit voice data
stream within the specified VLAN so as to ensure the
transmission priority of voice data stream and voice quality.
Chapter 12 PoE This module is used to configure the PoE function for the switch
to supply power for PD devices. Here mainly introduces:
PoE Config: Configure PoE function globally.
PoE Time-Range: Configure the effective time for PoE port to
supply power.
Chapter 13 ACL
This module is used to configure match rules and process
policies of packets to filter packets in order to control the access
of the illegal users to the network. Here mainly introduces:
Time-Range: Configure the effective time for ACL rules.
ACL Config: ACL rules.
Policy Config: Configure operation policies.
ACL Binding: Bind the ACL to a port/VLAN to take its effect on
a specific port/VLAN.
Policy Binding: Bind the policy to a port/VLAN to take its
effect on a specific port/VLAN.
5
Chapter Introduction
Chapter 14 Network Security
This module is used to configure the protection measures for the
network security. Here mainly introduces:
IP-
MAC Binding: Bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN
ID and the connected Port number of the Host together.
IPv6-MAC Binding: Bind the IPv6
address, MAC address,
VLAN ID and the connected Port number of the Host
together.
DHCP Snooping:
DHCP Snooping functions to monitor the
process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP
server, and record the
IP address, MAC address, VLAN and
the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding.
DHCPv6 Snooping: DHCPv6
Snooping functions to monitor
the process of the Host obtaining the IPv6
address from
DHCPv6 server, and record the IPv6 address, MAC address,
VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for
automatic binding.
ARP Inspection: Configure ARP inspection feature to prevent
the network from ARP attacks.
ND Detection: Configure ND detection feature to prevent the
network from ND attacks.
IP So
urce Guard: Configure IP source guard feature to filter
IP packets in the LAN.
DoS Defend: Configure DoS defend feature to prevent DoS
attack.
802.1X: Configure common access control mechanism for
LAN ports to solve mainly authentication and security
problems.
PPPoE: Configure the PPPoE ID insertion feature.
AAA: Configure the
authentication, authorization and
accounting features.
Chapter 15 SNMP
This module is used to configure SNMP function to provide a
management frame to moni
tor and maintain the network
devices. Here mainly introduces:
SNMP Config: Configure global settings of SNMP function.
Notification: Configure notification function for the
management station to monitor and process the events.
RMON: Configure RMON function
to monitor network more
efficiently.
Chapter 16 LLDP
This module is used to configure LLDP function to provide
information for SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting.
Here mainly introduces:
Basic Config: Configure the LLDP parameters of the device.
Device Info: View the LLDP information of the local device
and its neighbors.
Device Statistics: View the LLDP statistics of the local device.
LLDP-MED: Configure the LLDP-MED features.
6
Chapter Introduction
Chapter 17 Maintenance This module is used to assemble the commonly used system
tools to manage the switch. Here mainly introduces:
System Monitor: Monitor the memory and CPU of the switch.
Log: View configuration parameters on the switch.
Device Diagnostics: Te s
t the connection status of the cable
connected to the switch, test if the port of the switch and the
connected device are available.
Network Diagnostics
: Test if the destination is reachable and
the account of router hops from the switch to the destination.
Appendix A Password
Recovery
Introduces the procedure to reset passwords on TP-LINK
switches.
Appendix B Specifications Lists the hardware specifications of the switch.
Appendix C Glossary Lists the glossary used in this manual.
Return to CONTENTS
7
Chapter 2 Introduction
Thanks for choosing the T2600G-28TS/ T2600G-52TS/ T2600G-28MPS JetStream Gigabit L2
Managed Switch!
2.1 Overview of the Switch
Designed for workgroups and departments, T2600G-28TS/ T2600G-52TS/ T2600G-28MPS from
TP-LINK provides wire-speed performance and full set of L2 and L2+ management features. It
provides a variety of service features and multiple powerful functions with high security.
The EIA-standardized framework and smart configuration capacity can provide flexible solutions
for a variable scale of networks. Static routing allows devices in different VLANs/subnets to
communicate with each other in an IPv4/IPv6 network. OAM, L2PT and sFlow can meet the
requirement of large ISP customers. ACL, 802.1x and Dynamic ARP Inspection provide robust
security strategies. QoS and IGMP snooping/filtering optimize voice and video application. Link
aggregation (LACP) increases aggregated bandwidth, optimizing the transport of business critical
data. SNMP, RMON, WEB and CLI Log-in bring abundant management policies. TP-LINK
JetStream L2 Managed Switch integrates multiple functions with excellent performance, and is
friendly to manage, which can fully meet the need of the users demanding higher networking
performance.
2.2 Appearance Description
2.2.1 Front Panel
The front panel of T2600G-28TS is shown as Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Front Panel of T2600G-28TS
The following parts are located on the front panel of T2600G-28TS:
LEDs
Name Status Indication
PWR
On The switch is powered on.
Off
The switch is powered off or power supply is abnormal.
Flashing
Power supply is abnormal.
SYS Flashing The switch works properly.
On/Off The switch works improperly.
1000Mbps On
A 1000Mbps device is connected to the corresponding
port but no activity.
Off No device is connected to the corresponding port.
8
Name Status Indication
Link/Act
On
A device is linked to the corresponding port and
running properly.
Flashing Data is being transmitted or received.
Off No device is linked to the corresponding port.
Console (RJ-45) Port
Designed to connect with the serial port of a computer or terminal for monitoring and configuring
the switch.
Console (USB) Port
Designed to connect with the USB port of a computer for monitoring and configuring the switch.
The switch has an RJ-45 console port and a micro-USB console port available. Console input is
active on only one console port at a time. By default, the micro-USB connector takes precedence
over the RJ-45 connector.
10/100/1000Mbps RJ45 Port
Designed to connect to the device with a bandwidth of 10Mbps, 100Mbps or 1000Mbps. Each
10/100/1000Mbps RJ45 port has a corresponding 1000Mbps LED and Link/Act LED.
SFP Port
Designed to install the SFP module. T2600G-28TS features 4 individual SFP ports and supports
1000M SFP module connection only.
The front panel of T2600G-52TS is shown as Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Front Panel of T2600G-52TS
The following parts are located on the front panel of T2600G-52TS:
Console (USB) Port
Designed to connect with the USB port of a computer for monitoring and configuring the switch.
The switch has an RJ-45 console port and a micro-USB console port available. Console input is
active on only one console port at a time. By default, the micro-USB connector takes precedence
over the RJ-45 connector.
Console (RJ-45) Port
Designed to connect with the serial port of a computer or terminal for monitoring and configuring
the switch.
9
LEDs
Name Status Indication
PWR
On The switch is powered on.
Off The switch is powered off or power supply is abnormal.
Flashing
Power supply is abnormal.
SYS Flashing The switch works properly.
On/Off The switch works improperly.
10/100/1000
Mbps (port
1-48)
Green
On
A 1000Mbps device is connected to the corresponding
port but no activity.
Flashing
A 1000Mbps device is connected to the corresponding
port and data is being transmitted or received.
Yellow
On
A 10/100Mbps device is connected to the
corresponding port but no activity.
Flashing
A 10/100Mbps device is connected to the
corresponding port and d
ata is being transmitted or
received.
Off No device is connected to the corresponding port.
Link/Act
(port 49-52)
On
There is a device linked to the corresponding SFP port
but no activity.
Flashing
The corresponding SFP port is transmitting or
receiving data.
Off
There is no device linked to the corresponding SFP
port.
10/100/1000Mbps RJ45 Port
Designed to connect to the device with a bandwidth of 10Mbps, 100Mbps or 1000Mbps. Each
10/100/1000Mbps RJ45 port has a corresponding 1000Mbps LED.
SFP Port
Designed to install the SFP module. T2600G-52TS features 4 individual SFP ports and supports
1000M SFP module connection only.
The front panel of T2600G-28MPS is shown as Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 Front Panel of T2600G-28MPS
T2600G-28MPS has an LED mode switch button which is for switching the LED status indication.
When the Speed LED is on, the port LED is indicating the data transmission rate. When the PoE
LED is on, the port LED is indicating the power supply status. By default the Speed LED is on.
Pressing the mode switch button, the Speed LED will turn off and the PoE LED will light up. Then
the PoE LED will turn off after being on for 60 seconds and the Speed LED will light up again.
When the Speed LED is on, the port LED is indicating the data transmission status.
10
LEDs
Name Status Indication
PWR
On The switch is powered on.
Off The switch is powered off or power supply is abnormal.
Flashing
Power supply is abnormal.
SYS Flashing The switch works properly.
On/Off The switch works improperly.
FAN
Green All the fans work properly.
Yellow Not all the fans work properly.
Off
The switch works improperly.
Speed or
PoE (Port
1-24）
Green
On
A 1000Mbps device is connected to the corresponding
port but no activity.
Flashing
A 1000Mbps device is connected to the corresponding
port and data is being transmitted or received.
Yellow
On
A 10/100Mbps device is connected to the
corresponding port but no activity.
Flashing
A 10/100Mbps device is connected to the
corresponding port and d
ata is being transmitted or
received.
Off No device is connected to the corresponding port.
1000Base-X
(Port 25-28)
On
There is a device linked to the corresponding SFP port
but no activity.
Flashing
The corresponding SFP port is transmitting or
receiving data.
Off
There is no device linked to the corresponding SFP
port.
When the PoE LED is on, the port LED is indicating the power supply status.
LEDs
Name Status Indication
PWR
On
The switch is powered on.
Off
The switch is powered off or power supply is abnormal.
Flashing Power supply is abnormal.
SYS Flashing The switch works properly.
On/Off The switch works improperly.
PoE Max
On
The remaining PoE power
≤
7W.
Flashing
The remaining PoE power keeps
≤
7W after this LED is
on for 2 minutes.
Off The remaining PoE power＞7W.
11
Name Status Indication
FAN
Green All the fans work properly.
Yellow Not all the fans work properly.
Off
The switch works improperly.
Speed or
PoE (Port
1-24）
Green
On The port is supplying power normally.
Flashing The supply power exceeds the correponding port's
maximum power.
Yellow
On Overload or short circuit is detected.
Flashing Power-on self-test has failed.
Off Not providing PoE power on the port.
1000Base-X
(Port 25-28)
On
There is a device linked to the corresponding SFP port
but no activity.
Flashing
The corresponding SFP port is transmitting or
receiving data.
Off
There is no device linked to the corresponding SFP
port.
Console (RJ-45) Port
Designed to connect with the serial port of a computer or terminal for monitoring and configuring
the switch.
Console (USB) Port
Designed to connect with the USB port of a computer for monitoring and configuring the switch.
The switch has an RJ-45 console port and a micro-USB console port available. Console input is
active on only one console port at a time. By default, the micro-USB connector takes precedence
over the RJ-45 connector.
10/100/1000Mbps RJ45 Port
Designed to connect to the device with a bandwidth of 10Mbps, 100Mbps or 1000Mbps. Each
10/100/1000Mbps RJ45 port has a corresponding 1000Mbps LED.
SFP Port
Designed to install the SFP module. T2600G-28MPS features 4 individual SFP ports and supports
1000M SFP module connection only.
Port Feature
Model 10/100/1000Mbps RJ45 Port SFP Port Console Port
T2600G-28TS 24 4 2
T2600G-52TS 48 4 2
T2600G-28MPS
24 4 2
12
2.2.2 Rear Panel
The rear panel of T2600G-28TS/ T2600G-52TS/ T2600G-28MPS features a Kensington security
slot, a Grounding Terminal (marked with ) and a power socket.
Figure 2-4 Rear Panel
Kensington Security Slot: Secure the lock (not provided) into the security slot to prevent the
device from being stolen.
Grounding Terminal: The switch already comes with lightning protection mechanism. You can
also ground the switch through the PE (Protecting Earth) cable of AC cord or with Ground
Cable.
AC Power Socket: Connect the female connector of the power cord here, and the male
connector to the AC power outlet.
Return to CONTENTS
13
Chapter 3 Login to the Switch
3.1 Login
1) To access the configuration utility, open a web-browser and type in the default address
http://192.168.0.1 in the address field of the browser, then press the Enter key.
Figure 3-1 Web-browser
Tips:
To log in to the switch, the IP address of your PC should be set in the same subnet addresses of
the switch. The IP address is 192.168.0.x ("x" is any number from 2 to 254), Subnet Mask is
255.255.255.0.
2) After a moment, a login window will appear, as shown in Figure 3-2. Enter admin for the User
Name and Password, both in lower case letters. Then click the Login button or press the Enter
key.
Figure 3-2 Login
14
3.2 Configuration
After a successful login, the main page will appear as Figure 3-3, and you can configure the
function by clicking the setup menu on the left side of the screen.
Figure 3-3 Main Setup-Menu
Note:
Clicking Apply can only make the new configurations effective before the switch is rebooted. If
you want to keep the configurations effective even the switch is rebooted, please click Save
Config. You are suggested to click Save Config before cutting off the power or rebooting the
switch to avoid losing the new configurations.
Return to CONTENTS
15
Chapter 4 System
The System module is mainly for system configuration of the switch, including four submenus:
System Info, User Management, System Tools, Access Security and SDM Template.
4.1 System Info
The System Info, mainly for basic properties configuration, can be implemented on System
Summary, Device Description, System Time, Daylight Saving Time and Serial Port Setting
pages.
4.1.1 System Summary
On this page you can view the port connection status and the system information.
The port status diagram shows the working status of 48 10/100/1000Mbps RJ45 ports and 4 SFP
ports of the switch.
Choose the menu System→System Info→System Summary to load the following page.
Figure 4-1 System Summary
Port Status
Indicates the 1000Mbps port is not connected to a device.
Indicates the 1000Mbps port is at the speed of 1000Mbps.
Indicates the 1000Mbps port is at the speed of 10Mbps or 100Mbps.
Indicates the SFP port is not connected to a device.
Indicates the SFP port is at the speed of 1000Mbps.
16
When the cursor moves on the port, the detailed information of the port will be displayed.
Figure 4-2 Port Information
Port Info
Port:
Displays the port number of the switch.
Type:
Displays the type of the port.
Rate:
Displays the maximum transmission rate of the port.
Status:
Displays the connection status of the port.
Click a port to display the bandwidth utilization on this port. The actual rate divided by theoretical
maximum rate is the bandwidth utilization. The following figure displays the bandwidth utilization
monitored every four seconds. Monitoring the bandwidth utilization on each port facilitates you to
monitor the network traffic and analyze the network abnormities.
Figure 4-3 Bandwidth Utilization
Bandwidth Utilization
Rx:
Select Rx to display the bandwidth utilization of receiving packets
on this port.
Tx:
Select Tx to display the bandwidth utilization of sending packets
on this port.
4.1.2 Device Description
On this page you can configure the description of the switch, including device name, device location
and system contact.
17
Choose the menu System→System Info→Device Description to load the following page.
Figure 4-4 Device Description
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Device Description
Device Name: Enter the name of the switch.
Device Location: Enter the location of the switch.
System Contact: Enter your contact information.
4.1.3 System Time
System Time is the time displayed while the switch is running. On this page you can configure the
system time and the settings here will be used for other time-based functions.
You can manually set the system time, get time from an NTP server or synchronize with PC’s clock
as the system time.
Choose the menu System→System Info→System Time to load the following page.
Figure 4-5 System Time
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Time Info
Current System Time: Displays the current date and time of the switch.
Current Time Source: Displays the current time source of the switch.
18
Time Config
Manual:
When this option is selected, you can set the date and time
manually.
Get
Time from NTP
Server:
When this o
ption is selected, you can configure the time zone
and the IP Address for the NTP Server. The switch will get UTC
automatically if it has connected to an NTP Server.
Time Zone: Select your local time.
Primary/Secondary Server:
Enter the IP Address for the
NTP Server.
Update Rate: Specify the rate fetching time from NTP server.
Synchronize with
PC’S Clock:
When this option is selected, the administrator PC’s
clock is
utilized.
Note:
1. The system time will be restored to the default when the switch is restarted and you need to
reconfigure the system time of the switch.
2. When Get Time from NTP Server is selected and no time server is configured, the switch will
get time from the time server of the Internet if it has connected to the Internet.
4.1.4 Daylight Saving Time
Here you can configure the Daylight Saving Time of the switch.
Choose the menu System→System Info→Daylight Saving Time to load the following page.
Figure 4-6 Daylight Saving Time
19
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
DST Config
DST Status: Enable or disable the DST.
Predefined Mode: Select a predefined DST configuration.
USA: Second Sunday in March, 02:00 ~ First
Sunday in
November, 02:00.
Australia: First Sunday in October, 02:00 ~ First Sunday
in
April, 03:00.
Europe
: Last Sunday in March, 01:00 ~ Last Sunday in
October, 01:00.
New Zealand: Last Sunday in September, 02:00 ~ Fir
st
Sunday in April, 03:00.
Recurring Mode:
Specify the DST configuration in recurring mode. This
configuration is recurring in use.
Offset: Specify the time adding in minutes when Daylight
Saving Time comes.
Start/End Time: Select starting time and ending time of
Daylight Saving Time.
Date Mode: Specify the DST configuration in Da
te mode. This configuration is
recurring in use.
Offset: Specify the time adding in minutes when Daylight
Saving Time comes.
Start/End Time: Select starting time and ending time of
Daylight Saving Time.
Note:
1. When the DST is disabled, the predefined mode, recurring mode and date mode cannot be
configured.
2. When the DST is enabled, the default daylight saving time is of European in predefined mode.
4.1.5 Serial Port Setting
On this page you can configure the Baud Rate of the console connection.
Choose the menu System→System Info→Serial Port Setting to load the following page.
Figure 4-7 User Table
20
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Serial Port Settings
Baud Rate: Configure the baud rate of the console connection
. It is 38400 bps
by default.
Data Bits: Displays the default data bits.
Parity Bits: Displays the parity bits.
Stop Bits: Displays the stop bits.
4.2 User Management
User Management functions to configure the user name and password for users to log on to the
Web management page with a certain access level so as to protect the settings of the switch from
being randomly changed.
The User Management function can be implemented on User Table and User Config pages.
4.2.1 User Table
On this page you can view the information about the current users of the switch.
Choose the menu System→User Management→User Table to load the following page.
Figure 4-8 User Table
4.2.2 User Config
On this page you can configure the access level of the user to log on to the Web management
page. The switch provides four access levels: Admin, Operator, Power User and User. “Admin”
means that you can edit, modify and view all the settings of different functions. “Operator” means
that you can edit, modify and view most of the settings of different functions. “Power User” means
that you can edit, modify and view some of the settings of different functions. “User” means that
you can only view some of the settings of different functions without the right to edit or modify. The
Web management pages contained in this guide are subject to the admin’s login without any
explanation.
21
Choose the menu System→User Management→User Config to load the following page.
Figure 4-9 User Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
User Info
User Name: Create a name for users’ login.
Access Level: Select the access level to login.
Admin: Admin can edit, modify and view all the settings of
different functions.
Operator: Operator can edit, modify and view most of
the
settings in different functions.
Power User: Power User can edit, modify and view some of
the
settings in different functions.
User: User only can view the settings without the right to edit
and modify.
Password: Type a password for users’ login.
Confirm Password: Retype the password.
User Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding user
information. It is multi-optional. The current user information can’
t
be deleted.
User ID, User Name,
Access Level:
Displays the current user ID, user name, and access level.
Operation: Click the Edit
button of the desired entry, and you can edit the
corresponding user information. After modifying the settings,
please click the Apply
button to make the modification effective.
Access level of the current user information cannot be modified.
22
4.3 System Tools
The System Tools function, allowing you to manage the configuration file of the switch, can be
implemented on Boot Config, Config Restore, Config Backup, Firmware Upgrade, System
Reboot, Reboot Schedule and System Reset pages.
4.3.1 Boot Config
On this page you can configure the boot file of the switch. When the switch is powered on, it will
start up with the startup image. If it fails, it will try to start up with the backup image. If this fails too,
you will enter into the bootutil menu of the switch.
Choose the menu System → System Tools → Boot Config to load the following page.
Figure 4-10 Boot Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Boot Table
Select: Select the unit(s).
Unit: Displays the unit ID.
23
Current Startup
Image:
Displays the current startup image.
Next Startup Image: Select the next startup image.
Backup Image: Select the backup boot image.
4.3.2 Config Restore
On this page you can upload a backup configuration file to restore your switch to this previous
configuration.
Choose the menu System→System Tools→Config Restore to load the following page.
Figure 4-11 Config Restore
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Config Restore
Target Unit:
Config File:
Select a member switch to import the configuration file.
Click the Browse button to
select a backup file and click the
Import button to restore the startup configuration file.
Note:
1. It will take a few minutes to restore the configuration. Please wait without any operation.
2. After the configuration file is restored successfully, the device will reboot to make the
configuration change effective.
3. Wrong uploaded configuration file may cause the switch unmanaged.
4.3.3 Config Backup
On this page you can download the current configuration and save it as a file to your computer for
your future configuration restore.
24
Choose the menu System→System Tools→Config Backup to load the following page.
Figure 4-12 Config Backup
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Config Backup
Target Unit: Select a member switch to export the configuration file.
Click the Export button to save the current startup configuration file to your computer. You are
suggested to take this measure before upgrading.
Note:
It will take a few minutes to backup the configuration. Please wait without any operation.
4.3.4 Firmware Upgrade
The switch system can be upgraded via the Web management page. To upgrade the system is to
get more functions and better performance. Go to http://www.tp-link.com to download the updated
firmware.
Choose the menu System→System Tools→Firmware Upgrade to load the following page.
Figure 4-13 Firmware Upgrade
Please pay attention to the checkbox “After upgrading, the device will reboot automatically
with the backup image”. If the checkbox is checked, the switch will reboot with the uploaded
firmware file, and the current Next Startup Image will switch to the Backup Image. If the checkbox
25
is not checked, the uploaded firmware file will take place of the Backup Image. To start with the
uploaded firmware, you should exchange the Next Startup Image and Backup Image in Boot
Config and reboot the switch.
Note:
1. Upgrading the firmware will only upgrade the backup image.
2. You are suggested to backup the configuration before upgrading.
3. Please select the proper software version matching with your hardware to upgrade.
4. To avoid damage, please don't turn off the device while upgrading.
4.3.5 System Reboot
On this page you can reboot the switch and return to the login page. Please save the current
configuration before rebooting to avoid losing the configuration unsaved.
Choose the menu System→System Tools→System Reboot to load the following page.
Figure 4-14 System Reboot
Note:
To avoid damage, please don't turn off the device while rebooting.
4.3.6 Reboot Schedule
On this page you can schedule a reboot plan for the switch. Users can configure the reboot
schedule in two modes. The first one is to reboot the switch in a specific time interval. The second
one is to reboot the switch at a specific time and date.
Users can choose whether to save the configurations before the reboot. If Save Before Reboot is
not checked, the reboot schedule will be deleted after the next reboot.
Choose the menu System→System Tools→Reboot Schedule to load the following page.
Figure 4-15 Reboot Schedule Setting
26
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Reboot Schedule Setting
Time Interval: Specify a period of time. The switch will reboot after this period.
It ranges from 1 to 43200 minutes.
This reboot schedule recurs if
users check the Save Before Reboot.
Time: Specify the time for the switch to reboot, in the format of HH:MM.
Date: Specify the date for the switc
h to reboot, in the format of
DD/MM/YYYY. The date should be within 30 days. I
f no date is
specified and the time you set here is later than the time that this
above Time is set
, the switch will reboot later that day; otherwise
the switch will reboot at the time point the next day.
Save Before
Reboot:
Select to save the switch’s configurations before it reboots.
Note:
To avoid damage, please don't turn off the device while rebooting.
4.3.7 System Reset
On this page you can reset the switch to the default. All the settings will be cleared after the switch
is reset.
Choose the menu System→System Tools→System Reset to load the following page.
Figure 4-16 System Reset
Note:
After the system is reset, the switch will be reset to the default and all the settings will be cleared.
4.4 Access Security
Access Security provides different security measures for the remote login so as to enhance the
configuration management security. It can be implemented on Access Control, HTTP Config,
HTTPS Config, SSH Config and Telnet Config pages.
4.4.1 Access Control
On this page you can control the users logging on to the Web management page to enhance the
configuration management security.
27
Choose the menu System→Access Security→Access Control to load the following page.
Figure 4-17 Access Control
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Access Control Config
Control Mode: Select the control mode for users to
log on to the Web
management page.
Disable: Select to disable Access Control function.
IP-based: Select this option to limit the IP-
range of the users for
login.
MAC-
based: Select this option to limit the MAC Address of the
users for login.
Port-based: Select this option to limit the ports for login.
Access Interface: Select the interface for access control to apply.
IP Address & Mask These fields is available to configure only when IP-
based mode is
selected. Only the users within the IP-range you set he
re are
allowed for login.
MAC Address: The field is available to configure only when MAC-
based mode is
selected. Only the user with this MAC Address you set here are
allowed for login.
Port: The field is available to configure only when Port-based mode
is
selected. Only the users connecting to the ports selected are
allowed to manage the switch.
28
4.4.2 HTTP Config
With the help of HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol), you can manage the switch through a
standard browser. The standards development of HTTP was coordinated by the Internet
Engineering Task Force and the World Wide Web Consortium.
On this page you can configure the HTTP function.
Choose the menu System→Access Security→HTTP Config to load the following page.
Figure 4-18 HTTP Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
HTTP: Select Enable/Disable the HTTP function on the switch.
Session Config
Session Timeout:
If you do nothing with the Web management page within the
timeout ti
me, the system will log out automatically. If you want to
reconfigure, please login again.
Access User Number
Number Control: Select Enable/Disable the Number Control function.
Admin Number:
Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the Web
management page as Admin.
Guest Number:
Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the Web
management page as Guest.
4.4.3 HTTPS Config
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), a security protocol, is to provide a secure connection for the
application layer protocol (e.g. HTTP) communication based on TCP. SSL is widely used to secure
the data transmission between the Web browser and servers. It is mainly applied through
ecommerce and online banking.
29
SSL mainly provides the following services:
1. Authenticate the users and the servers based on the certificates to ensure the data are
transmitted to the correct users and servers;
2. Encrypt the data transmission to prevent the data being intercepted;
3. Maintain the integrality of the data to prevent the data being altered in the transmission.
Adopting asymmetrical encryption technology, SSL uses key pair to encrypt/decrypt information. A
key pair refers to a public key (contained in the certificate) and its corresponding private key. By
default the switch has a certificate (self-signed certificate) and a corresponding private key. The
Certificate/Key Download function enables the user to replace the default key pair.
After SSL is effective, you can log on to the Web management page via https://192.168.0.1. For
the first time you use HTTPS connection to log into the switch with the default certificate, you will
be prompted that “The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted
certificate authority” or “Certificate Errors”. Please add this certificate to trusted certificates or
continue to this website.
The switch also supports HTTPS connection for IPv6. After configuring an IPv6 address (for
example, 3001::1) for the switch, you can log on to the switch’s Web management page via
https://[3001::1].
On this page you can configure the HTTPS function.
30
Choose the menu System→Access Security→HTTPS Config to load the following page.
Figure 4-19 HTTPS Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
HTTPS: Select Enable/Disable the HTTPS function on the switch.
SSL Version 3:
Enable or Disable Secure Sockets Layer Version 3.0. By default,
it’s enabled.
TLS Version 1:
Enable or Disable Transport Layer Security Version 1.0. By
default, it’s enabled.
31
CipherSuite Config
RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5: Key exchange with RC4 128-
bit encryption and
MD5 for message digest. By default, it’s enabled.
RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA: Key exchange with RC4 128-
bit encryption and
SHA for message digest. By default, it’s enabled.
RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA: Key exchange with DES-
CBC for message
e
ncryption and SHA for message digest. By
default, it’s enabled.
RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA:
Key exchange with 3DES and DES-EDE3-
CBC
for message encryption and SHA for message
digest. By default, it’s enabled.
Session Config
Session Timeout: If you do not
hing with the Web management page within the
timeout time, the system will log out automatically. If you want to
reconfigure, please login again.
Access User Number
Number Control: Select Enable/Disable the Number Control function.
Admin Number: Enter th
e maximum number of the users logging on to the Web
management page as Admin.
Guest Number:
Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the Web
management page as Guest.
Certificate Download
Certificate File: Select the desired certificate to do
wnload to the switch. The
certificate must be BASE64 encoded.
Key Download
Key File:
Select the desired key to download to the switch. The key must be
BASE64 encoded.
Note:
1. The SSL certificate and key downloaded must match each other; otherwise the HTTPS
connection will not work.
2. To establish a secured connection using https, please enter https:// into the URL field of the
browser.
3. It may take more time for https connection than that for http connection, because https
connection involves authentication, encryption and decryption etc.
4.4.4 SSH Config
As stipulated by IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force), SSH (Secure Shell) is a security protocol
established on application and transport layers. SSH-encrypted-connection is similar to a telnet
connection, but essentially the old telnet remote management method is not safe, because the
password and data transmitted with plain-text can be easily intercepted. SSH can provide
32
information security and powerful authentication when you log on to the switch remotely through
an insecure network environment. It can encrypt all the transmission data and prevent the
information in a remote management being leaked.
Comprising server and client, SSH has two versions, V1 and V2 which are not compatible with
each other. In the communication, SSH server and client can auto-negotiate the SSH version and
the encryption algorithm. After getting a successful negotiation, the client sends authentication
request to the server for login, and then the two can communicate with each other after successful
authentication. This switch supports SSH server and you can log on to the switch via SSH
connection using SSH client software.
SSH key can be downloaded into the switch. If the key is successfully downloaded, the certificate
authentication will be preferred for SSH access to the switch.
Choose the menu System→Access Security→SSH Config to load the following page.
Figure 4-20 SSH Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
SSH: Select Enable/Disable SSH function.
Protocol V1: Select Enable/Disable SSH V1 to be the supported protocol.
Protocol V2: Select Enable/Disable SSH V2 to be the supported protocol.
33
Idle Timeout: Specify the idle timeout time. The system will aut
omatically
release the connection when the time is up. The default time is
120 seconds.
Max Connect:
Specify the maximum number of the connections to the SSH
server. No new connection will be established when the number of
the connections reaches the maxi
mum number you set. The
default value is 5.
Encryption Algorithm
Configure SSH encryption algorithms.
AES128-CBC: Select the checkbox to enable the AES128-
CBC algorithm of
SSH.
AES128-CBC: Select the checkbox to enable the AES128-
CBC algorithm of
SSH.
AES192-CBC: Select the checkbox to enable the AES192-
CBC algorithm of
SSH.
AES256-CBC: Select the checkbox to enable the AES256-
CBC algorithm of
SSH.
Blowfish-CBC: Select the checkbox to enable the Blowfish-
CBC algorithm of
SSH.
Cast128-CBC: Select the checkbox to enable the Cast128-
CBC algorithm of
SSH.
3DES-CBC: Select the checkbox to enable the 3DES-CBC algorithm of SSH.
Data Integrity Algorithm
Configure SSH data integrity algorithms.
HMAC-SHA1: Select the checkbox to enable the HMAC-SHA1 algorithm of SSH.
HMAC-MD5: Select the checkbox to enable the HMAC-MD5 algorithm of SSH.
Key Download
Key Type: Select the type of SSH Key to download. The switch s
upports two
types: SSH-2 RSA/DSA and SSH-1 RSA.
Key File: Please ensure the key length of the downloaded file is i
n the range
of 512 to 3072 bits.
Download: Click the Download button to download
the desired key file to the
switch.
Note:
1. It will take a long time to download the key file. Please wait without any operation.
2. After the Key File is downloaded, the user's original key of the same type will be replaced. The
wrong downloaded file will result in the SSH access to the switch via Password
authentication.
34
Application Example 1 for SSH:
Network Requirements
1. Log on to the switch via password authentication using SSH and the SSH function is enabled
on the switch.
2. PuTTY client software is recommended.
Configuration Procedure
1. Open the software to log on to the interface of PuTTY. Enter the IP address of the switch into
Host Name field; keep the default value 22 in the Port field; select SSH as the Connection
type.
2. Click the Open button in the above figure to log on to the switch. Enter the login user name and
password, and then you can continue to configure the switch.
35
Application Example 2 for SSH:
Network Requirements
1. Log on to the switch via key authentication using SSH and the SSH function is enabled on the
switch.
2. PuTTY client software is recommended.
Configuration Procedure
1. Select the key type and key length, and generate SSH key.
Note:
1. The key length is in the range of 512 to 3072 bits.
2. During the key generation, randomly moving the mouse quickly can accelerate the key
generation.
36
2. After the key is successfully generated, please save the public key and private key to the
computer.
3. On the Web management page of the switch, download the public key file saved in the
computer to the switch.
Note:
1. The key type should accord with the type of the key file.
2. The SSH key downloading cannot be interrupted.
37
4. After the public key and private key are downloaded, please log on to the interface of PuTTY
and enter the IP address for login.
5. Click Browse to download the private key file to SSH client software and click Open.
38
After successful authentication, please enter the login user name. If you log on to the switch
without entering password, it indicates that the key has been successfully downloaded.
4.4.5 Telnet Config
On this page you can Enable/Disable Telnet function globally on the switch.
Choose the menu System→Access Security→Telnet Config to load the following page.
Figure 4-21 Access Control
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
Telnet: Select Enable/Disable Telnet function globally on the switch.
4.5 SDM Template
SDM (Switch Database Management) provides different templates for users to efficiently manage
the hardware TCAM resources. Users can select the appropriate template according to the
application environment.
4.5.1 SDM Template Config
On this page you can configure and view the SDM templates on the switch.
39
Choose the menu System→SDM Template→SDM Template Config to load the following page.
Figure 4-22 SDM Template Config
Select Options
Current Template
ID:
Displays the SDM template currently in use.
Next Template ID: Displays the SDM template that will become active after a reboot.
Select Next
Template:
C
onfigure the SDM template that will become active after the next
reboot.
Template Table
SDM Template: Displays the template name.
IP ACL Rules: Displays the number of TCAM entries fo
r IP ACL Rules, which
include Lay3 ACL Rules and Lay4 ACL Rules.
MAC ACL Rules: Displays the number of TCAM entries for Lay2 ACL Rules.
Combined ACL
Rules:
Displays the number of combined ACL rules.
IPv6 ACL Rules: Displays the number of IPv6 ACL rules.
ARP Detection
Entries:
Displays the number of TCAM entries for ARP defend.
IPv6 Source Guard
Entries:
Displays the number of IPv6 source guard entries.
Return to CONTENTS
40
Chapter 5 Switching
Switching module is used to configure the basic functions of the switch, including four submenus:
Port, LAG, Traffic Monitor, MAC Address and L2PT.
5.1 Port
The Port function, allowing you to configure the basic features for the port, is implemented on the
Port Config, Port Mirror, Port Security, Port Isolation and Loopback Detection pages.
5.1.1 Port Config
On this page, you can configure the basic parameters for the ports. When the port is disabled, the
packets on the port will be discarded. Disabling the port which is vacant for a long time can reduce
the power consumption effectively. And you can enable the port when it is in need.
The parameters will affect the working mode of the port, please set the parameters appropriate to
your needs.
Choose the menu Switching→Port→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 5-1 Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen：
Port Config
UN I T:
1/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure
the link aggregation groups.
Select
: Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port
: Displays the port number.
Ty
pe: Displays the medium type of the port.
41
Description
: Give a description to the port for identification.
Status
: A
llows you to Enable/Disable the port. When Enable is selected,
the port/LAG can forward the packets normally.
Speed
:
Select the Speed mode for the port. The device connected to the
switch should be in the same Speed and Duplex mode with the
switch. When
'Auto' is selected, the Speed mode will be
determined by auto negotiation.
Duplex:
Select the Duplex mode for the port. When ‘Auto’
is selected,
the Duplex mode will be determined by auto negotiation.
Flow Control
: Allows you to Enable/Disable the Flow
Control feature. When
Flow Control is enabled, the switch can synchronize the speed
with its peer to avoid the packet loss caused by congestion.
Jumbo:
Allows you to Enable/Disable the Jumbo feature. The default
maximum transmission unit (MTU) size is 151
8 bytes. When
Jumbo is enabled, the MTU size is 9216 bytes.
LAG
: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Note:
1. The switch cannot be managed through the disabled port. Please enable the port which is
used to manage the switch.
2. The SFP ports support 1000M SFP module connection only.
5.1.2 Port Mirror
Port Mirror, the packets obtaining technology, functions to forward copies of packets from
one/multiple ports (mirrored port) to a specific port (mirroring port). Usually, the mirroring port is
connected to a data diagnose device, which is used to analyze the mirrored packets for monitoring
and troubleshooting the network.
Choose the menu Switching→Port→Port Mirror to load the following page.
Figure 5-2 Mirror Group List
The following entries are displayed on this screen.
Mirror Session List
Session: Displays the mirror session number.
Destination: Displays the mirroring port.
42
Mode: Displays the mirror mode. The value will be "Ingress Only"
,
"Egress Only" or “Both”.
Source: Displays the mirrored ports.
Operation: You can configure the mirror session by clicking Edit
, or clear the
mirror session configuration by clicking the Clear.
Click Edit to display the following figure.
Figure 5-3 Port Mirror Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Destination Port
Destination Port:
Input or select a physical port from the port panel as the mirroring
port.
Source Port
Select: Select the desired port as a mirrored port. It is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number.
Ingress:
Select Enable/Disable the Ingress feature. When the Ingress is
43
enabled, the incoming packets received by the mirrored port will be
copied to the mirroring port.
Egress: Select
Enable/Disable the Egress feature. When the Egress is
enabled, the outgoing packets sent by the mirrored port will be
copied to the mirroring port.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port
belongs to. The LAG
member cannot be selected as the mirrored port or mirroring port.
Note:
1. The LAG member cannot be selected as the mirrored port or mirroring port.
2. A port cannot be set as the mirrored port and the mirroring port simultaneously.
3. The Port Mirror function can span the multiple VLANs.
5.1.3 Port Security
MAC Address Table maintains the mapping relationship between the port and the MAC address of
the connected device, which is the base of the packet forwarding. The capacity of MAC Address
Table is fixed. MAC Address Attack is the attack method that the attacker takes to obtain the
network information illegally. The attacker uses tools to generate the cheating MAC address and
quickly occupy the MAC Address Table. When the MAC Address Table is full, the switch will
broadcast the packets to all the ports. At this moment, the attacker can obtain the network
information via various sniffers and attacks. When the MAC Address Table is full, the packets
traffic will flood to all the ports, which results in overload, lower speed, packets drop and even
breakdown of the system.
Port Security is to protect the switch from the malicious MAC Address Attack by limiting the
maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. The port with Port Security
feature enabled will learn the MAC address dynamically. When the learned MAC address number
reaches the maximum, the port will stop learning. Thereafter, the other devices with the MAC
address unlearned cannot access to the network via this port.
44
Choose the menu Switching→Port→Port Security to load the following page.
Figure 5-4 Port Security
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Security
Select
: Select the desired port for Port Security configuration. It is
multi-optional.
Port
: Displays the port number.
Max Learned MAC
: Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
learned on the port.
Learned Num
: Displays the number of MAC addresses that have been learned
on the port.
Learn Mode
: Select the Learn Mode for the port.
• Dynamic: When Dynamic mode is selected, the learned
MAC address will be deleted automatically after the aging
time.
• Static: When Static mode is selected, the learned MAC
address will be out of the influence of the aging time and
can only be deleted manually. The learned entries will be
cleared after the switch is rebooted.
• Permanent:
When Permanent mode is selected, the
learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the
aging time and can only be deleted manually. The learned
entries will be saved even the switch is rebooted.
45
Status
: Select Enable/Disable the Port Security feature for the port.
Note:
The Port Security function is disabled for the LAG port member. Only the port is removed from the
LAG, will the Port Security function be available for the port.
5.1.4 Port Isolation
Port Isolation provides a method of restricting traffic flow to improve the network security by
forbidding the port to forward packets to the ports that are not on its forward portlist.
Choose the menu Switching→Port→Port Isolation to load the following page.
Figure 5-5 Port Isolation
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Isolation List
UNIT :1/LAGS :
Click 1 to show the information of the physical ports. Click LAGS
to show the information of the link aggregation groups.
Port: Displays the port number.
LAG : Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Forward Portlist: Displays the forward portlist.
46
Click Edit to display the following figure.
Figure 5-6 Port Isolation Config
5.1.5 Loopback Detection
With loopback detection feature enabled, the switch can detect loops using loopback detection
packets. When a loop is detected, the switch will display an alert or further block the corresponding
port according to the port configuration.
47
Choose the menu Switching→Port→Loopback Detection to load the following page.
Figure 5-7 Loopback Detection Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
LoopbackDetection
Status:
Here you can enable or disable Loopback Detection function
globally.
Detection Interval: Set a loopback detection interval between 1 and 1000 seconds.
By default, it’s 30 seconds.
Automatic
Recovery Time:
Time after which the blocked port would automatically recover
to
normal status. It can be set as integral times of detection interval.
Web Refresh Status: Here you can enable or disable web automatic refresh.
Web Refresh Interval: Set a web refresh interval between 3 and 100 seconds. By
default, it’s 6 seconds.
Port Config
Select: Select the desired port for Loopback
Detection configuration. It is
multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number.
48
Status: Enable or disable Loopback Detection function for the port.
Operation Mode: Select the mode how the switch processes the detected loops.
• Alert: When a loop is detected, display an alert.
• Port based: When a loop is detected, display an alert and
block the port.
Recovery Mode: Select the mode how the blocked port recovers to normal status.
• Auto: Block status can be automatically removed after
recovery time.
• Manual: Block status only can be removed manually.
Loop Status: Displays the port status whether a loopback is detected.
Block Status: Displays the port status about block or unblock.
LAG: Displays the LAG number the port belongs to.
Recover: Click the Recover button to manually remove the loop or
block
status of selected ports.
Note:
Loopback Detection must coordinate with storm control.
5.2 LAG
LAG (Link Aggregation Group) is to combine a number of ports together to make a single
high-bandwidth data path, so as to implement the traffic load sharing among the member ports in
the group and to enhance the connection reliability.
For the member ports in an aggregation group, their basic configuration must be the same. The
basic configuration includes STP, QoS, VLAN, port attributes, MAC Address Learning mode
and other associated settings. More details are explained below:
If the ports, which are enabled for the 802.1Q VLAN, STP, QoS and Port Configuration
(Speed and Flow Control), are in a LAG, their configurations would be the same as the
LAG’s.
The ports, which are enabled for the half-duplex, Port Security, Port Mirror and MAC
Address Filtering, cannot be added to the LAG.
If the LAG is needed, you are suggested to configure the LAG function here before configuring the
other functions for the member ports.
Tips:
1. Calculate the bandwidth for a LAG: If a LAG consists of the four ports in the speed of
1000Mbps Full Duplex, the whole bandwidth of the LAG is up to 8000Mbps (2000Mbps * 4)
because the bandwidth of each member port is 2000Mbps counting the up-linked speed of
1000Mbps and the down-linked speed of 1000Mbps.
2. The traffic load of the LAG will be balanced among the ports according to the Aggregate
Arithmetic. If the connections of one or several ports are broken, the traffic of these ports will
be transmitted on the normal ports, so as to guarantee the connection reliability.
49
The LAG function is implemented on the LAG Table, Static LAG and LACP Config configuration
pages.
5.2.1 LAG Table
On this page, you can view the information of the current LAG of the switch.
Choose the menu Switching→LAG→LAG Table to load the following page.
Figure 5-8 LAG Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
Hash Algorithm
: Select the applied scope of Aggregate Arithmetic, which
results in choosing a port to transfer the packets.
• SRC MAC: When this op
tion is selected, the Aggregate
Arithmetic will apply to the source MAC addresses of the
packets.
• DST MAC:
When this option is selected, the Aggregate
Arithmetic will apply to the destination MAC addresses of
the packets.
• SRC MAC + DST MAC: When this optio
n is selected, the
Aggregate Arithmetic will apply to the source and
destination MAC addresses of the packets.
• SRC IP:
When this option is selected, the Aggregate
Arithmetic will apply to the source IP addresses of the
packets.
• DST IP: When this option is
selected, the Aggregate
Arithmetic will apply to the destination IP addresses of
the packets.
• SRC IP + DST IP:
When this option is selected, the
Aggregate Arithmetic will apply to the source and
destination IP addresses of the packets.
LAG Table
Select
: Select the desired LAG. It is multi-optional.
Group Number
: Displays the LAG number here.
Description
: Displays the description of LAG.
Member
: Displays the LAG member.
50
Operation
: Allows you to view or modify the information for each LAG.
• Edit: Click to modify the settings of the LAG.
• Detail: Click to get the information of the LAG.
Click the Detail button for the detailed information of your selected LAG.
Figure 5-9 Detailed Information
5.2.2 Static LAG
On this page, you can manually configure the LAG.
Choose the menu Switching→LAG→Static LAG to load the following page.
Figure 5-10 Manually Config
51
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
LAG Config
Group N
umber: Select a Group Number for the LAG.
Description
: Displays the description of the LAG.
Member Port
Member Port
:
Select the port as the LAG member. Clearing all the ports of
the LAG will delete this LAG.
Tips:
1. The LAG can be deleted by clearing its all member ports.
2. A port can only be added to a LAG. If a port is the member of a LAG, the port number will be
displayed in gray and cannot be selected.
5.2.3 LACP Config
LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) is defined in IEEE802.3ad and enables the dynamic link
aggregation and disaggregation by exchanging LACP packets with its partner. The switch can
dynamically group similarly configured ports into a single logical link, which will highly extend the
bandwidth and flexibly balance the load.
With the LACP feature enabled, the port will notify its partner of the system priority, system MAC,
port priority, port number and operation key (operation key is determined by the physical
properties of the port, upper layer protocol and admin key). The device with higher priority will lead
the aggregation and disaggregation. System priority and system MAC decide the priority of the
device. The smaller the system priority, the higher the priority of the device is. With the same
system priority, the device owning the smaller system MAC has the higher priority. The device with
the higher priority will choose the ports to be aggregated based on the port priority, port number
and operation key. Only the ports with the same operation key can be selected into the same
aggregation group. In an aggregation group, the port with smaller port priority will be considered
as the preferred one. If the two port priorities are equal, the port with smaller port number is
preferred. After an aggregation group is established, the selected ports can be aggregated
together as one port to transmit packets.
52
On this page, you can configure the LACP feature of the switch.
Choose the menu Switching→LAG→LACP Config to load the following page.
Figure 5-11 LACP Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
System Priority:
Specify the system priority for the switch. The system prio
rity and
MAC address constitute the system identification (ID). A lower system
priority value indicates a higher system priority. When exchanging
information between systems, the system with higher priority
determines which link aggregation a link belongs
to, and the system
with lower priority adds the proper links to the link aggregation
according to the selection of its partner.
LACP Config
Select:
Select the desired port for LACP configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port:
Displays the port number.
Ad
min Key: Specify an Admin Key for the port. The member ports in a dynamic
aggregation group must have the same Admin Key.
53
Port Priority:
Specify a Port Priority for the port. This value determines the priority
of the port to be selected as the dynamic agg
regation group
member. The port with smaller Port Priority will be considered as the
preferred one. If the two port priorities are equal; the port with
smaller port number is preferred.
Mode:
Specify LACP mode for your selected port.
Status:
Enable/Disable the LACP feature for your selected port.
LAG:
Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
5.3 Traffic Monitor
The Traffic Monitor function, monitoring the traffic of each port, is implemented on the Traffic
Summary and Traffic Statistics pages.
5.3.1 Traffic Summary
Traffic Summary screen displays the traffic information of each port, which facilitates you to
monitor the traffic and analyze the network abnormity.
Choose the menu Switching→Traffic Monitor→Traffic Summary to load the following page.
Figure 5-12 Traffic Summary
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh
: Allows you to Enable/Disable refreshing the
Traffic Summary
automatically.
Refresh Rate
: Enter a value in seconds to specify the refresh interval.
54
Traffic Summary
UN I T:
1/LAGS: Click 1 to show the information of the physical ports. Click LAGS
to
show the information of the link aggregation groups
Select
: Select the desired port for clearing. It is multi-optional.
Port
: Displays the port number.
Packets Rx
:
Displays the number of packets received on the port. The error
packets are not counted in.
Packets Tx
: Displays the number of packets transmitted on the port.
Octets Rx
:
Displays the number of octets received on the port. The error octets
are counted in.
Octets Tx
: Displays the number of octets transmitted on the port.
Statistics
: Click the Statistics button to view the detailed traffi
c statistics of the
port.
5.3.2 Traffic Statistics
Traffic Statistics screen displays the detailed traffic information of each port, which facilitates you to
monitor the traffic and locate faults promptly.
Choose the menu Switching→Traffic Monitor→Traffic Statistics to load the following page.
Figure 5-13 Traffic Statistics
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh
: Allows you to Enable/Disable refreshi
ng the Traffic Summary
55
automatically.
Refresh Rate
: Enter a value in seconds to specify the refresh interval.
Port Select
UN I T:
1/LAGS: Click 1 to show the information of the physical ports. Click LAGS
to show the information of the link aggregation groups.
Port:
Enter a port number and click the Select button or select
the port
to view the traffic statistics of the corresponding port.
Statistics
Received
: Displays the details of the packets received on the port.
Sent
: Displays the details of the packets transmitted on the port.
Broadcast
:
Displays the number of good broadcast packets received or
transmitted on the port. The error frames are not counted in.
Multicast
:
Displays the number of good multicast packets received or
transmitted on the port. The error frames are not counted in.
Unicast
:
Displays the number of good unicast packets received or
transmitted on the port. The error frames are not counted in.
Jumbo:
Displays the number of good jumbo packets received or
transmitted on the port. The error frames are not counted in.
Alignment Errors
:
Displays the number of the received packets that have a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with a non-
integral octet
(Alignment Error). The length of the packet is between 64 bytes
and 1518 bytes.
UndersizePkt
s:
Displays the number of the received packets (excluding error
packets) that are less than 64 bytes long.
Pkts64Octets
:
Displays the number of the received packets (including error
packets) that are 64 bytes long.
Pkts65to127Octets
: Displays the number
of the received packets (including error
packets) that are between 65 and 127 bytes long.
Pkts128to255Octets
:
Displays the number of the received packets (including error
packets) that are between 128 and 255 bytes long.
Pkts256to511Octets
: Displays the
number of the received packets (including error
packets) that are between 256 and 511 bytes long.
Pkts512to1023Octets
:
Displays the number of the received packets (including error
packets) that are between 512 and 1023 bytes long.
Pkts
Over1023Octets: Dis
plays the number of the received packets (including error
packets) that are over 1023 bytes.
Collisions
:
Displays the number of collisions experienced by a port during
packet transmissions.
5.4 MAC Address
The main function of the switch is forwarding the packets to the correct ports based on the
destination MAC address of the packets. Address Table contains the port-based MAC address
56
information, which is the base for the switch to forward packets quickly. The entries in the Address
Table can be updated by auto-learning or configured manually. Most entries are generated and
updated by auto-learning. In the stable networks, the static MAC address entries can facilitate the
switch to reduce broadcast packets and enhance the efficiency of packets forwarding remarkably.
The address filtering feature allows the switch to filter the undesired packets and forbid its
forwarding so as to improve the network security.
The types and the features of the MAC Address Table are listed as the following:
Type Configuration
Way Aging out
Being kept after
reboot
(if the configuration
is saved)
Relationship between the
bound MAC address and
the port
Static
Address Table
Manually
configuring
No Yes
The bound MAC address
cannot
be learned by the
other ports in the same
VLAN.
Dynamic
Address Table
Automatically
learning
Yes No
The bound MAC address
can be learned by the other
ports in the same VLAN.
Filtering
Address Table
Manually
configuring
No Yes -
Table 5-1 Types and features of Address Table
This function includes four submenus: Address Table, Static Address, Dynamic Address and
Filtering Address.
57
5.4.1 Address Table
On this page, you can view all the information of the Address Table.
Choose the menu Switching→MAC Address→Address Table to load the following page.
Figure 5-14 Address Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
MAC Address
: Enter the MAC address of your desired entry.
VLAN ID
: Enter the VLAN ID of your desired entry.
Type
: Select the type of your desired entry.
All:
This option allows the address table to display all the address
entries.
Static: This option allows the address table to display the stati
c
address entries only.
Dynamic:
This option allows the address table to display the
dynamic address entries only.
Filter:
This option allows the address table to display the filtering
address entries only.
Port:
Select the corresponding port number or LAG of your desired entry.
Address Table
MAC Address
: Displays the MAC address learned by the switch.
VLAN ID
: Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.
58
Port
: Displays the corresponding Port number of the MAC address.
Type
: Displays the type of the MAC address.
Aging Status
: Displays the aging status of the MAC address.
5.4.2 Static Address
The static address table maintains the static address entries which can be added or removed
manually, independent of the aging time. In the stable networks, the static MAC address entries
can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets and remarkably enhance the efficiency of
packets forwarding without learning the address. The static MAC address learned by the port with
Port Security enabled in the static learning mode will be displayed in the Static Address Table.
Choose the menu Switching→MAC Address→Static Address to load the following page.
Figure 5-15 Static Address
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Static Address
MAC Address
: Enter the static MAC Address to be bound.
VLAN ID
: Enter the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.
Port
: Select the corresponding port of your desired entry.
Search Option
Search Option
: Select a Search Option from the pull-down list and click the
Search
button to find your desired entry in the Static Address Table.
MAC: Enter the MAC address of your desired entry.
59
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry.
Port: Enter the Port number of your desired entry.
Static Address Table
Select
: Select the entry to delete or modify t
he corresponding port number. It
is multi-optional.
MAC Address
: Displays the static MAC Address.
VLAN ID
: Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.
Port
: Displays the corresponding p
ort number of the MAC address. Here
you can modify the po
rt number to which the MAC address is bound.
The new port should be in the same VLAN.
Type
: Displays the type of the MAC address.
Aging Status
: Displays the aging status of the MAC address.
Note:
1. If the corresponding port number of the MAC address is not correct, or the connected port (or
the device) has been changed, the switch cannot forward the packets correctly. Please reset
the static address entry appropriately.
2. If the MAC address of a device has been added to the Static Address Table, connecting the
device to another port will cause its address not to be recognized dynamically by the switch.
Therefore, please ensure the entries in the Static Address Table are correct and valid.
3. The MAC address in the Static Address Table cannot be added to the Filtering Address Table
or bound to a port dynamically.
5.4.3 Dynamic Address
The dynamic address can be generated by the auto-learning mechanism of the switch. The
Dynamic Address Table can update automatically by auto-learning or the MAC address aging out
mechanism.
To fully utilize the MAC address table, which has a limited capacity, the switch adopts an aging
mechanism for updating the table. That is, the switch removes the MAC address entries related to
a network device if no packet is received from the device within the aging time.
On this page, you can configure the dynamic MAC address entry.
60
Choose the menu Switching→MAC Address→Dynamic Address to load the following page.
Figure 5-16 Dynamic Address
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Aging Config
Auto Aging
: Allows you to Enable/Disable the Auto Aging feature.
Aging Time
: Enter the Aging Time for the dynamic address.
Search Option
Search Option
: Select a Search Option from the pull-down list and click the
Search
button to find your desired entry in the Dynamic Address Table.
• MAC: Enter the MAC address of your desired entry.
• VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry.
• Port: Enter the Port number of your desired entry.
Dynamic Address Table
Select
:
Select the entry to delete the dynamic address or to bind the MAC
address to the corresponding port statically. It is multi-optional.
MAC Address
: Displays the dynamic MAC Address.
VLAN ID
: Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.
Port
: Displays the corresponding port number of the MAC address.
Type
: Displays the type of the MAC address.
Aging Status
: Displays the aging status of the MAC address.
Bind
: Click the Bind
button to bind the MAC address of your selected entry
to the corresponding port statically.
61
Tips:
Setting aging time properly helps implement effective MAC address aging. The aging time that is
too long or too short results in a decrease of the switch performance. If the aging time is too long,
excessive invalid MAC address entries maintained by the switch may fill up the MAC address table.
This prevents the MAC address table from updating with network changes in time. If the aging time
is too short, the switch may remove valid MAC address entries. This decreases the forwarding
performance of the switch. It is recommended to keep the default value.
5.4.4 Filtering Address
The filtering address is to forbid the undesired packets to be forwarded. The filtering address can
be added or removed manually, independent of the aging time. The filtering MAC address allows
the switch to filter the packets which includes this MAC address as the source address or
destination address, so as to guarantee the network security. The filtering MAC address entries
act on all the ports in the corresponding VLAN.
Choose the menu Switching→MAC Address→Filtering Address to load the following page.
Figure 5-17 Filtering Address
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Filtering Address
MAC Address
: Enter the MAC Address to be filtered.
VLAN ID
: Enter the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.
Search Option
Search Option
: Select a Search Option from the pull-down list and click the Search
button to find your desired entry in the Filtering Address Table.
• MAC Address: Enter the MAC address of your desired entry.
• VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry.
Filtering Address Table
Select
:
Select the entry to delete the corresponding filtering address. It is
multi-optional.
MAC Address
: Displays the filtering MAC Address.
62
VLAN ID
: Displays the corresponding VLAN ID.
Port
: Here the symbol “--” indicates no specified port.
Type
: Displays the type of the MAC address.
Aging Status
: Displays the aging status of the MAC address.
Note:
The MAC address in the Filtering Address Table cannot be added to the Static Address Table or
bound to a port dynamically.
5.4.5 MAC Notification
The MAC notification function is used to monitor the status of the MAC address table, and the
MAC address learned on each port.
Choose the menu Switching→MAC Address→MAC Notification to load the following page.
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
MAC Notification Global Config
Global Status
: Enable/Disable the MAC notification globally.
Table Full
Notification
:
Enable/Disable the sending of a MAC Full Notification when the M
AC
address table is full.
Notification
Interval:
S
pecify the interval time between notifications. It ranges from 1 to
1000 seconds and the default interval is 1 second.
63
MAC Notification Port Config
Select:
Select the specified port(s) for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port:
Displays the port number.
Learned Mode
Change:
Enable/Disable
the Learned Mode Change notification on the port.
The port’s learned mode includes: Dynamic, Static and Permanent.
Exceed Max
Learned:
Enable/Disable the Exceed Max Learned notification on the port.
The
number of the max learned MAC addresses on each port is 64 by
default.
New
MAC
Learned:
Enable/Disable the New MAC Learned notification on the port.
5.4.6 MAC VLAN Security
The MAC VLAN Security function is used to configure the MAC address security in the specified
VLAN.
Choose the menu Switching→MAC Address→MAC VLAN Security to load the following page.
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
MAC Notification Global Config
VLAN ID
: Enter the VLAN ID to configure its MAC address security.
Max Learned
MAC:
Specify the max MAC addresses that can be learned in this VLAN.
Mode:
Choose the mode to process the new arrival packets
(whose source
MAC address is not in the current VLAN’s address table)
when
learned MAC number exceeds the max learned MAC
number of
VLAN security entry.
• Drop: The packets will be dropped
when learned mac number
exceeds the max learned number of VLAN security entry.
•
Forward: The packets will be forward but not be learned when
learned mac number exceeds the max learned number of
VLAN
security entry.
• Disable: The vlan security entry exists, but is not valid.
64
VLAN Security Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN
security
entry. It's multi-optional.
VLAN ID
: Displays the VLAN ID of the VLAN security entry.
Max Learned
MAC:
Displays the max learned MAC number of VLAN security entry.
Learned Number:
Displays the learned MAC number of VLAN security entry.
Mode:
Displays the mode of the vlan security entry.
Operation:
Click to edit the max learned MAC and the mode.
5.5 L2PT
L2PT (Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling) is a feature for service providers to transmit packets from
different customers across their ISP networks and maintain Layer 2 protocol configurations of
each customer. The supported Layer 2 protocols are STP (Spanning Tree Protocol), GVRP (GARP
VLAN Registration Protocol), CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol), VTP (VLAN Trunking Protocol),
PAgP (Port Aggregation Protocol), UDLD (UniDirectional Link Detection) and PVST+(Per VLAN
Spanning Tree Plus).
When L2PT is enabled and the switch receives the specified Layer 2 protocol packets from the
UNI port, the switch encapsulates these packets with a special MAC address and sends them
across the service-provider network through the NNI port. The devices in the ISP network do not
process these packets but forward them as normal packets. The switch on the outbound side of
the ISP network receives these packets on its NNI port and restore their MAC address to their
original Layer 2 protocol destination MAC address.
The L2PT protocol is usually used with VLAN VPN feature. Thus the NNI ports that connecting to
the ISP network are configured as VPN Up-link ports.
Figure 5-1 A Typical L2PT Topology
65
5.5.1 L2PT Config
Choose the menu Switching→L2PT→L2PT Config to load the following page.
Figure 5-2 L2PT Config
Configuration Procedure:
1) Enable the Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling globally under Global Config.
2) Configure the tunneling and protocol type on the speicified port under Port Config.
3) Click Apply to save your configurations.
Entry Explannation:
UN I T: 1
/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure the
link aggregation groups.
Select
: Specify the port(s) to configure its L2PT feature. It is multi-optional.
Type
: Choose the
port type according to its connecting device in the
network.
• None: Disable the L2PT on this port.
• UNI: Specify
the port’s type as UNI if it is connecting to the user’s
local network.
• NNI: Specify the port’s type as NNI if it i
s connecting to the ISP
network.
Protocol
: Select the supported Layer 2 protocol type.
Packets of the specified
protocol will be encapsulated with their destination MAC
address
before they are sent to the ISP network. Packets will
be
decapsulated to resto
re their Layer 2 protocol and MAC address
information before they are sent to the customer network.
• STP: Enable protocol tunneling for the STP packets.
• GVRP: Enable protocol tunneling for the GVRP packets.
• 01000CCCCCCC: Enable protocol tunneling for the packets
with
66
their destination MAC address as 01000CCCCCCC, which
includes CDP, VTP, PAgP and UDLD.
• 01000CCCCCCD:
Enable protocol tunneling for the PVST+
packets.
• ALL: All the above Layer 2 protocols are supported for tunneling.
Threshold
Configure the threshold for packets-per-
second accepted for
encapsulation. Packets beyond the threshold will be dropped. If no
protocol is specified,
the threshold applies to each Layer 2 protocol
types.
LAG:
Displays the port‘s aggregation group.
Return to CONTENTS
67
Chapter 6 VLAN
The traditional Ethernet is a data network communication technology based on CSMA/CD (Carrier
Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect) via shared communication medium. Through the
traditional Ethernet, the overfull hosts in LAN will result in serious collision, flooding broadcasts,
poor performance or even breakdown of the Internet. Though connecting the LANs through
switches can avoid the serious collision, the flooding broadcasts cannot be prevented, which will
occupy plenty of bandwidth resources, causing potential serious security problems.
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network topology configured according to a logical
scheme rather than the physical layout. The VLAN technology is developed for switches to control
broadcast in LANs. By creating VLANs in a physical LAN, you can divide the LAN into multiple
logical LANs, each of which has a broadcast domain of its own. Hosts in the same VLAN
communicate with one another as if they are in a LAN. However, hosts in different VLANs cannot
communicate with one another directly. Therefore, broadcast packets are limited in a VLAN. Hosts
in the same VLAN communicate with one another via Ethernet whereas hosts in different VLANs
communicate with one another through the Internet devices such as router, the Layer 3 switch, etc.
The following figure illustrates a VLAN implementation.
Figure 6-1 VLAN implementation
Compared with the traditional Ethernet, VLAN enjoys the following advantages.
(1) Broadcasts are confined to VLANs. This decreases bandwidth utilization and improves
network performance.
(2) Network security is improved. VLANs cannot communicate with one another directly. That
is, a host in a VLAN cannot access resources in another VLAN directly, unless routers or
Layer 3 switches are used.
(3) Network configuration workload for the host is reduced. VLAN can be used to group
specific hosts. When the physical position of a host changes within the range of the VLAN,
you do not need to change its network configuration.
A VLAN can span across multiple switches, or even routers. This enables hosts in a VLAN to be
dispersed in a looser way. That is, hosts in a VLAN can belong to different physical network
segments. This switch supports 802.1Q VLAN to classify VLANs. VLAN tags in the packets are
necessary for the switch to identify packets of different VLANs.
68
6.1 802.1Q VLAN
VLAN tags in the packets are necessary for the switch to identify packets of different VLANs. The
switch works at the data link layer in OSI model and it can identify the data link layer encapsulation
of the packet only, so you can add the VLAN tag field into the data link layer encapsulation for
identification.
In 1999, IEEE issues the IEEE 802.1Q protocol to standardize VLAN implementation, defining the
structure of VLAN-tagged packets. IEEE 802.1Q protocol defines that a 4-byte VLAN tag is
encapsulated after the destination MAC address and source MAC address to show the information
about VLAN.
As shown in the following figure, a VLAN tag contains four fields, including TPID (Tag Protocol
Identifier), Priority, CFI (Canonical Format Indicator), and VLAN ID.
Figure 6-2 Format of VLAN Tag
(1) TPID: TPID is a 16-bit field, indicating that this data frame is VLAN-tagged. By default, it is
0x8100 in this switch.
(2) Priority: Priority is a 3-bit field, referring to 802.1p priority. Refer to section “QoS & QoS
profile” for details.
(3) CFI: CFI is a 1-bit field, indicating whether the MAC address is encapsulated in the standard
format in different transmission media. This field is not described in detail in this chapter.
(4) VLAN ID: VLAN ID is a 12-bit field, indicating the ID of the VLAN to which this packet
belongs. It is in the range of 0 to 4,095. Generally, 0 and 4,095 is not used, so the field is in
the range of 1 to 4,094.
VLAN ID identifies the VLAN to which a packet belongs. When the switch receives a
un-VLAN-tagged packet, it will encapsulate a VLAN tag with the default VLAN ID of the inbound
port for the packet, and the packet will be assigned to the default VLAN of the inbound port for
transmission.
In this User Guide, the tagged packet refers to the packet with VLAN tag whereas the untagged
packet refers to the packet without VLAN tag, and the priority-tagged packet refers to the packet
with VLAN tag whose VLAN ID is 0.
Link Types of ports
When creating the 802.1Q VLAN, you should set the link type for the port according to its
connected device. The link types of port including the following two types: Untagged and Tagged.
(1) Untagged: The untagged port can be added in multiple VLANs. If a VLAN-tagged packet
arrives at a port and the VLAN ID in its VLAN tag does not match any of the VLAN the
ingress port belongs to, this packet will be dropped. The packets forwarded by the
untagged port are untagged.
(2) Tagged: The tagged port can be added in multiple VLANs. If a VLAN-tagged packet
arrives at a port and the VLAN ID in its VLAN tag does not match any of the VLAN the
ingress port belongs to, this packet will be dropped. When the VLAN-tagged packets are
forwarded by the Tagged port, its VLAN tag will not be changed.
69
PVID
PVID (Port VLAN ID) is the default VID of the port. When the switch receives an un-VLAN-tagged
packet, it will add a VLAN tag to the packet according to the PVID of its received port and forward
the packets.
When creating VLANs, the PVID of each port, indicating the default VLAN to which the port
belongs, is an important parameter with the following two purposes:
(1) When the switch receives an un-VLAN-tagged packet, it will add a VLAN tag to the packet
according to the PVID of its received port
(2) PVID determines the default broadcast domain of the port, i.e. when the port receives UL
packets or broadcast packets, the port will broadcast the packets in its default VLAN.
Different packets, tagged or untagged, will be processed in different ways, after being received by
ports of different link types, which is illustrated in the following table.
Port Type
Receiving Packets Forwarding Packets
Untagged
Packets
Tagged Packets Untagged Packets Tagged
Packets
Untagged
When untagged
packets are
received, the
port will add the
default VLAN
tag, i.e. the PVID
of the ingress
port, to the
packets.
If the VID of packet
is allowed
by the
port, the packet will
be received.
If the VID of packet
is forbidden by the
port, the packet will
be dropped.
The packet will be
forwarded
unchanged.
The packet will
be forwarded
after removing
its VLAN tag
Tagged
T
he packet will be
forwarded with the
PVID of egress port
as its VLAN tag.
The packet will
be forwarded
with its current
VLAN tag.
Table 6-1 Relationship between Port Types and VLAN Packets Processing
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN function is implemented on the VLAN Config and Port Config pages.
6.1.1 VLAN Config
On this page, you can configure the 802.1Q VLAN and its ports.
Choose the menu VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config to load the following page.
Figure 6-3 VLAN Table
To ensure the normal communication of the factory switch, the default VLAN of all ports is set to
VLAN1.
70
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN. It is
multi-optional.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID.
Name: Displays the name of the specific VLAN.
Members: Displays the port members in the VLAN.
Operation: Allows you to view or modify the information for each entry.
• Edit: Click to modify the settings of VLAN.
• Detail: Click to get the information of VLAN.
Click Edit and the following content will be shown.
Figure 6-4 VLAN Info
VLAN Info
VLAN ID: Displays the ID number of VLAN.
Name: Displays the name of the specific VLAN.
Untagged Port: Displays the untagged ports of the specific VLAN.
Tagged Port: Displays the tagged ports of the specific VLAN.
6.1.2 Port Config
Before creating the 802.1Q VLAN, please acquaint yourself with all the devices connected to the
switch in order to configure the ports properly.
71
Choose the menu VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 6-5 Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN Port Config
UNIT:1/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure the
link aggregation groups.
Select: Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number.
Link Type: Select the Link Type from the pull-down list for the port.
• ACCESS: The ACCESS port can be
added in a single VLAN,
and the egress rule of the port is UNTAG. The PVID is same as
the current VLAN ID. If the current VLAN is deleted, the PVID
will be set to 1 by default.
• TRUNK:
The TRUNK port can be added in multiple VLANs.
The egress rule of the po
rt is UNTAG if the arriving packet’s
VLAN tag is the same as the port’s PVID, otherwise the egress
rule is TAG. The PVID can be set as the VID number of any
valid VLAN.
• GENERAL:
The GENERAL port can be added in multiple
VLANs and set various egress rules a
ccording to the different
VLANs. The default egress rule is UNTAG. The PVID can be
set as the VID number of any valid VLAN.
PVID: Enter the PVID number of the port.
LAG: Displays the LAG to which the port belongs.
72
VLAN: Click the Detail button to view t
he information of the VLAN to
which the port belongs.
Click the Detail button to view the information of the corresponding VLAN.
Figure 6-6 View the Current VLAN of Port
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN of Port
VLAN ID
：
Displays the ID number of VLAN.
Name: Displays the user-defined description of VLAN.
Operation: Allows you to remove the port from the current VLAN.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Set the link type for
port.
Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page, set
the link type for the port basing on its connected device.
2
Create VLAN. Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,
click the Create button to create a VLAN. Enter the VLAN ID and
the description for the
VLAN. Meanwhile, specify its member
ports.
3
Modify/View VLAN. Optional. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,
click the Edit/Detail
button to modify/view the information of the
corresponding VLAN.
4
Delete VLAN Optional. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,
select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN by
clicking the Delete button.
6.2 Application Example for 802.1Q VLAN
Network Requirements
Switch A is connecting to PC A and Server B;
Switch B is connecting to PC B and Server A;
PC A and Server A is in the same VLAN;
PC B and Server B is in the same VLAN;
PCs in the two VLANs cannot communicate with each other.
73
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Configure switch A
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config
page, configure
the link type of Port 2, Port 3 and Port 4 as ACCESS, TRUNK and
ACCESS respectively
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 2 and Port 3.
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 3 and Port 4.
Configure switch B
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config
page, configure
the link type of Port 7, Port 6 and Port 8 as ACCESS, TRUNK and
ACCESS respectively.
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 6 and Port 8.
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 6 and Port 7.
6.3 MAC VLAN
MAC VLAN technology is the way to classify VLANs according to the MAC addresses of Hosts. A
MAC address corresponds to a single VLAN ID. For the device in a MAC VLAN, if its MAC address
is bound to VLAN, the device can be connected to another member port in this VLAN and still
takes its member role effect without changing the configuration of VLAN members.
The packet in MAC VLAN is processed in the following way:
74
• When receiving an untagged packet, the switch matches the packet with the current MAC
VLAN. If the packet is matched, the switch will add a corresponding MAC VLAN tag to it. If
no MAC VLAN is matched, the switch will add a tag to the packet according to the PVID of
the received port. Thus, the packet is assigned automatically to the corresponding VLAN for
transmission.
• When receiving tagged packet, the switch will process it basing on the 802.1Q VLAN. If the
received port is the member of the VLAN to which the tagged packet belongs, the packet
will be forwarded normally. Otherwise, the packet will be discarded.
• If the MAC address of a Host is classified into 802.1Q VLAN, please set its connected port
of switch to be a member of this 802.1Q VLAN so as to ensure the packets forwarded
normally.
6.3.1 MAC VLAN
On this page, you can create MAC VLAN and view the current MAC VLANs in the table.
Choose the menu VLAN→MAC VLAN to load the following page.
Figure 6-7 Create and View MAC VLAN
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create MAC VLAN
MAC Address: Enter the MAC address.
Description: Give a description to the MAC address for identification.
VLAN ID: Enter the ID number of the MAC VLAN. This VLAN should be one of
the 802.1Q VLANs the ingress port belongs to.
MAC VLAN Table
Select:
Select the desired entry. It is multi-optional.
MAC Address:
Displays the MAC address.
Description:
Displays the user-defined description of the MAC address.
VLAN ID:
Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.
75
Operation:
Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the entry. And click the
Modify button to apply your settings.
6.3.2 Port Enable
On this page, you can enable the port for the MAC VLAN feature. Only the port is enabled, can the
configured MAC VLAN take effect.
Choose the menu VLAN→MAC VLAN→Port Enable to load the following page.
Figure 6-8 Enable Port for MAC VLAN
UN I T: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure the
link aggregation groups.
Select your desired port for MAC VLAN function. All the ports are disabled for MAC VLAN function
by default.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Set the link type for
port.
Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config
page, set
the link type for the port basing on its connected device.
2
Create VLAN. Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,
click the Create
button to create a VLAN. Enter the VLAN ID and
the description for the VLAN. Meanwhile, specify its member ports.
3
Create MAC VLAN. Required. On the VLAN→MAC VLAN page, create the MAC VLAN.
For the device in a MAC VLAN, it’s required to set its connected port
of switch to be a member of this VLAN so as to ensure the normal
communication.
4
Select your desired
ports for MAC VLAN
feature.
Required. On the VLAN→MAC VLAN→Port Enable page, select
and enable the desired ports for MAC VLAN feature.
6.4 Application Example for MAC VLAN
Network Requirements
Switch A and switch B are connected to meeting room A and meeting room B respectively,
and the two rooms are for all departments;
Notebook A and Notebook B, special for meeting room, are of two different departments;
76
The two departments are in VLAN10 and VLAN20 respectively. The two notebooks can just
access the server of their own departments, that is, Server A and Server B, in the two meeting
rooms;
The MAC address of Notebook A is 00-19-56-8A-4C-71, Notebook B’s MAC address is
00-19-56-82-3B-70.
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Configure switch A
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page, configure the
link type of Port 11 and Port 12 as GENERAL and TRUNK respectively.
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10,
owning Port 11 and Port 12, and
configure the egress rule of Port 11 as Untag.
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 11 and Port 12, and
configure the egress rule of Port 11 as Untag.
4
Configure MAC
VLAN 10
On VLAN→MAC VLAN→MAC VLAN page, create MAC VLAN10 with
the MAC address as 00-19-56-8A-4C-71.
5
Configure MAC
VLAN 20
On VLAN→MAC VLAN→MAC VLAN page, create MAC VLAN20 with
the MAC address as 00-19-56-82-3B-70.
6
Port Enable Required. On the VLAN→MAC VLAN→Port Enable page, select and
enable Port 11 and Port 12 for MAC VLAN feature.
77
Configure switch B
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page, configure the
link type of Port 21 and Port 22 as GENERAL and TRUNK respectively.
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 21 and Port 22, and
configure the egress rule of Port 21 as Untag.
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 21 and Port 22, and
configure the egress rule of Port 21 as Untag.
4
Configure MAC
VLAN 10
On VLAN→MAC VLAN→MAC VLAN page, create MAC VLAN10 with
the MAC address as 00-19-56-8A-4C-71.
5
Configure MAC
VLAN 20
On VLAN→MAC VLAN→MAC VLAN page, create MAC VLAN20 with
the MAC address as 00-19-56-82-3B-70.
6
Port Enable Required. On the VLAN→MAC VLAN→Port Enable page, select and
enable Port 21 and Port 22 for MAC VLAN feature.
Configure switch C
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page, configure the
link type of Port 2 and Port 3 as GENERAL, and configure the link type
of Port 4 and Port 5 as ACCESS.
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 2, Port 3 and Port 5,
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 2, Port 3 and Port 4,
6.5 Protocol VLAN
Protocol VLAN is another way to classify VLANs basing on network protocol. Protocol VLANs can
be sorted by IP, IPX, DECnet, AppleTalk, Banyan and so on. Through the Protocol VLANs, the
broadcast domain can span over multiple switches and the Host can change its physical position
in the network with its VLAN member role always effective. By creating Protocol VLANs, the
network administrator can manage the network clients basing on their actual applications and
services effectively.
This switch can classify VLANs basing on the common protocol types listed in the following table.
Please create the Protocol VLAN to your actual need.
Protocol Type
Type value
ARP
0x0806
IP
0x0800
MPLS
0x8847/0x8848
78
Protocol Type
Type value
IPX
0x8137
IS-IS
0x8000
LACP
0x8809
802.1X
0x888E
Table 6-1 Protocol types in common use
The packet in Protocol VLAN is processed in the following way:
1. When receiving an untagged packet, the switch matches the packet with the current Protocol
VLAN. If the packet is matched, the switch will add a corresponding Protocol VLAN tag to it. If
no Protocol VLAN is matched, the switch will add a tag to the packet according to the PVID of
the received port. Thus, the packet is assigned automatically to the corresponding VLAN for
transmission.
2. When receiving tagged packet, the switch will process it basing on the 802.1Q VLAN. If the
received port is the member of the VLAN to which the tagged packet belongs, the packet will
be forwarded normally. Otherwise, the packet will be discarded.
3. If the Protocol VLAN is created, please set its enabled port to be the member of
corresponding 802.1Q VLAN so as to ensure the packets forwarded normally.
6.5.1 Protocol Group Table
On this page, you can create Protocol VLAN and view the information of the current defined
Protocol VLANs.
Choose the menu VLAN→Protocol VLAN→Protocol Group Table to load the following page.
Figure 6-9 Create Protocol VLAN
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Protocol Group Table
Select:
Select the desired entry. It is multi-optional.
Protocol Name:
Displays the protocol of the protocol group.
VLAN ID:
Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the protocol.
Member:
Displays the member of the protocol group.
Operate:
Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the
entry. And click the
Apply button to apply your settings.
79
6.5.2 Protocol Group
On this page, you can configure the Protocol Group.
Choose the menu VLAN→Protocol VLAN→Protocol Group to load the following page.
Figure 6-10 Enable Protocol VLAN for Port
Protocol Group Config
Protocol Name:
Select the defined protocol template.
VLAN ID:
Enter the ID number o
f the Protocol VLAN. This VLAN should be one
of the 802.1Q VLANs the ingress port belongs to.
Protocol Group Member
UN I T:
Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure the
link aggregation groups.
6.5.3 Protocol Template
The Protocol Template should be created before configuring the Protocol VLAN. By default, the
switch has defined the IP Template, ARP Template, RARP Template, etc. You can add more
Protocol Template on this page.
80
Choose the menu VLAN→Protocol VLAN→Protocol Template to load the following page.
Figure 6-11 Create and View Protocol Template
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Protocol Template
Protocol Name:
Give a name for the Protocol Template.
Frame Type:
Select a Frame Type for the Protocol Template.
Ether Type:
Enter the Ethernet protocol type field in the protocol template.
DSAP:
Enter the DSAP field when selected LLC.
SSAP:
Enter the SSAP field when selected LLC.
Protocol Template Table
Select:
Select the desired entry. It is multi-optional.
ID
Displays the Protocol Template ID.
Protocol Name:
Displays the Protocol Name.
Protocol Type:
Displays the Protocol type.
Note:
The Protocol Template bound to VLAN cannot be deleted.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Set the link type for port. Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page,
set the link type for the port basing on its connected device.
81
Step Operation Description
2
Create VLAN. Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config
page, click the Create
button to create a VLAN. Enter the
VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN. Meanwhile,
specify its member ports.
3
Create Protocol Template. Required. On the VLAN→Protocol VLAN→Protocol
Template page, cr
eate the Protocol Template before
configuring Protocol VLAN.
4
Create Protocol VLAN. Required. On the VLAN→Protocol VLAN→Protocol
Group
page, select the protocol name and enter the VLAN
ID to create a Protocol VLAN. Meanwhile, enable protocol
VLAN for ports.
5
Modify/View VLAN. Optional. On the VLAN→Protocol VLAN→Protocol
Group Table page, click the Edit button to modify/view the
information of the corresponding VLAN.
6
Delete VLAN. Optional. On the VLAN→Protocol VLAN→Protocol
Group Table page, select the d
esired entry to delete the
corresponding VLAN by clicking the Delete button.
6.6 Application Example for Protocol VLAN
Network Requirements
Department A is connected to the company LAN via Port12 of switch A;
Department A has IP host and AppleTalk host;
IP host, in VLAN10, is served by IP server while AppleTalk host is served by AppleTalk server;
Switch B is connected to IP server and AppleTalk server.
82
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Configure switch A
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page, configure the
link type of Port 11 and Port 13 as ACCESS, and configure the link type
of Port 12 as GENERAL.
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN wit
h its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 12 and Port 13, and
configure the egress rule of Port 12 as Untag.
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 11 and Port 12, and
configure the egress rule of Port 12 as Untag.
Configure switch B
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page, configure the
link type of Port 4 and Port 5 as ACCESS, and configure the link type of
Port 3 as GENERAL.
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 3 and Port 4, and configure
the egress rule of Port 3 as Untag.
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, c
reate a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 3 and Port 5, and configure
the egress rule of Port 3 as Untag.
83
Step Operation Description
4
Create Protocol
Template
Required. On VLAN→Protocol VLAN→Protocol Template page,
configure the protocol template practically. E.g. the Ether
Type of IP
network packets is 0800 and that of AppleTalk network packets is 809B.
5
Create Protocol
VLAN 10
On VLAN→Protocol VLAN→Protocol Group
page, create protocol
VLAN 10 with Protocol as IP. Select and enable Port 3, Port 4 and Port
5 for Protocol VLAN feature.
6
Create Protocol
VLAN 20
On VLAN→Protocol VLAN→Protocol Group
page, create protocol
VLAN 20 with Protocol as AppleTalk. Select and enable Port 3, Port 4
and Port 5 for Protocol VLAN feature.
6.7 VLAN VPN
With the increasing application of the Internet, the VPN (Virtual Private Network) technology is
developed and used to establish the private network through the operators’ backbone networks.
VLAN-VPN (Virtual Private Network) function, the implement of a simple and flexible Layer 2 VPN
technology, allows the packets with VLAN tags of private networks to be encapsulated with VLAN
tags of public networks at the network access terminal of the Internet Service Provider. And these
packets will be transmitted with double-tag across the public networks.
The VLAN-VPN function provides you with the following benefits:
(1) Provides simple Layer 2 VPN solutions for small-sized LANs or intranets.
(2) Saves public network VLAN ID resource.
(3) You can have VLAN IDs of your own, which is independent of public network VLAN IDs.
(4) When the network of the Internet Service Provider is upgraded, the user’s network with a
relative independence can still work normally without changing the current
configurations.
In addition, the switch supports the feature to adjust the TPID Values of VLAN VPN Packets. TPID
(Tag Protocol Identifier) is a field of the VLAN tag. IEEE 802.1Q specifies the value of TPID to be
0x8100. This switch adopts the default value of TPID (0x8100) defined by the protocol. Other
manufacturers use other TPID values (such as 0x9100 or 0x9200) in the outer tags of VLAN-VPN
packets. To be compatible with devices coming from other manufacturers, this switch can adjust
the TPID values of VLAN-VPN packets globally. You can configure TPID values by yourself. When
a port receives a packet, this port will replace the TPID value in the outer VLAN tag of this packet
with the user-defined value and then send the packet again. Thus, the VLAN-VPN packets sent to
the public network can be recognized by devices of other manufacturers.
The position of the TPID field in an Ethernet packet is the same as the position of the protocol type
field in the packet without VLAN Tag. Thus, to avoid confusion happening when the switch
forwards or receives a packet, you must not configure the following protocol type values listed in
the following table as the TPID value.
Protocol type Value
ARP 0x0806
IP 0x0800
MPLS 0x8847/0x8848
IPX 0x8137
IS-IS 0x8000
84
Protocol type Value
LACP 0x8809
802.1X 0x888E
Table 6-2 Values of Ethernet frame protocol type in common use
This VLAN VPN function is implemented on the VPN Config, VLAN Mapping and Port Enable
pages.
6.7.1 VPN Config
This page allows you to enable the VPN function, adjust the global TPID for VLAN-VPN packets
and enable the VPN up-link port. When VPN mode is enabled, the switch will add a tag to the
received tagged packet basing on the VLAN mapping entries.
Choose the menu VLAN→VLAN VPN→VPN Config to load the following page.
Figure 6-12 VPN Global Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
VPN Mode: Allows you to Enable/Disable the VLAN-VPN function.
Global TPID: Enter the global TPID (Tag protocol identifier).
VPN Up-link Ports
Unit: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to
configure the link aggregation groups.
VPN Up-link ports: Select the desired port as the VPN Up-link port.
Note:
If VPN mode is enabled, please create VLAN Mapping entries on the VLAN Mapping function
page.
85
6.7.2 Port Enable
On this page, you can enable the port for the VLAN Mapping function. Only the port is enabled,
can the configured VLAN Mapping function take effect.
Figure 6-13 Enable Port for VLAN Mapping
VPN Port Enable
UN I T:
Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure the
link aggregation groups.
Select your desired port for VLAN Mapping function. All the ports are disabled for VLAN Mapping
function by default.
6.7.3 VLAN Mapping
VLAN Mapping function defines a new VLAN TAG to be inserted before the VLAN TAG of the
packets according to the VLAN Mapping entries. And these packets can be forwarded in the new
VLAN. If VLAN VPN function is enabled, a received packet already carrying a VLAN tag will be
tagged basing on the VLAN Mapping entries and becomes a double-tagged packet to be
forwarded in the new VLAN.
86
Choose the menu VLAN→VLAN VPN→VLAN Mapping to load the following page.
Figure 6-14 Create VLAN Mapping Entry
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
VLAN Mapping:
Enable/Disable the VLAN mapping function. Enable/Disable the
VLAN mapping function. If VLAN mapping is disabled and VLAN
VPN is enabled, the packet will be
encapsulated with an outer tag
according to the PVID of its arriving port.
VLAN Mapping Config
Port: Select/Input the port number.
C VLAN:
Enter the ID number of the Customer VLAN. C VLAN refers to the
VLAN to which the packet received by switch belongs.
SP VLAN: Enter the ID number of the Service Provider VLAN.
Name: Give a name to the VLAN Mapping entry or leave it blank.
VLAN Mapping List
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN
Mapping entry. It is multi-optional.
Operation: Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the entry.
Click Edit to display the following figure:
87
Figure 6-15 VLAN Mapping Entry Config
Modify the SP VLAN and name of the selected entry and click Edit to apply.
Note:
When VPN mode is globally enabled, VPN function takes effect on all ports. If VPN mode is
disabled, VLAN Mapping function can be enabled by selecting your desired port on this Port
Enable page.
Configuration Procedure of VLAN VPN Function:
Step Operation Description
1
Enable VPN mode. Required. On the VLAN→VLAN VPN→VPN Config page,
enable the VPN mode.
2
Configure the global TPID. Optional. On the VLAN→VLAN VPN→VPN Config page,
configure the global TPID basing on the devices connected
to the up-link port.
3
Set the VPN up-link port. Required. On the VLAN→VLAN VPN→VPN Config page,
specify the desired port to be the VPN up-
link port. It’s
required to set the port connected to the backbone
networks to be up-link port.
4
Create VLAN Mapping
entries.
Required. On the VLAN→VLAN VPN→
VLAN Mapping
page, configure t
he VLAN Mapping entries basing on the
actual application.
5
Create SP (Service
Provider) VLAN.
Optional. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN
page, create the
SP VLAN. For the steps of creating VLAN, please refer to
802.1Q VLAN.
Configuration Procedure of VLAN Mapping Function:
Step Operation Description
88
Step Operation Description
1
Create VLAN Mapping
entries.
Required. On the VLAN→VLAN VPN→
VLAN Mapping
page, configure the VLAN Mapping entries basing on the
actual application.
2
Enable VLAN Mapping
function for port.
Required. On the VLAN→VLAN VPN→Port Enable page,
enable VLAN Mapping function for the ports.
3
Create SP (Service
Provider) VLAN
Optional. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN
page, create the
SP VLAN. For the steps of creating VLAN, please refer to
802.1Q VLAN.
6.8 GVRP
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is an implementation of GARP (generic attribute
registration protocol). GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via the
dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration information to
other switches, without having to individually configure each VLAN.
GARP
GARP provides the mechanism to assist the switch members in LAN to deliver, propagate and
register the information among the members. GARP itself does not work as the entity among the
devices. The application complied with GARP is called GARP implementation, and GVRP is the
implementation of GARP. When GARP is implemented on a port of device, the port is called
GARP entity.
The information exchange between GARP entities is completed by messages. GARP defines the
messages into three types: Join, Leave and LeaveAll.
• Join Message: When a GARP entity expects other switches to register certain attribute
information of its own, it sends out a Join message. And when receiving the Join message
from the other entity or configuring some attributes statically, the device also sends out a Join
message in order to be registered by the other GARP entities.
• Leave Message: When a GARP entity expects other switches to deregister certain attribute
information of its own, it sends out a Leave message. And when receiving the Leave
message from the other entity or deregistering some attributes statically, the device also
sends out a Leave message.
• LeaveAll Message: Once a GARP entity starts up, it starts the LeaveAll timer. After the timer
times out, the GARP entity sends out a LeaveAll message. LeaveAll message is to deregister
all the attribute information so as to enable the other GARP entities to re-register attribute
information of their own.
Through message exchange, all the attribute information to be registered can be propagated to all
the switches in the same switched network.
The interval of GARP messages is controlled by timers. GARP defines the following timers:
• Hold Timer: When a GARP entity receives a piece of registration information, it does not
send out a Join message immediately. Instead, to save the bandwidth resources, it starts the
Hold timer, puts all registration information it receives before the timer times out into one Join
message and sends out the message after the timer times out.
89
• Join Timer: To transmit the Join messages reliably to other entities, a GARP entity sends
each Join message two times. The Join timer is used to define the interval between the two
sending operations of each Join message.
• Leave Timer: When a GARP entity expects to deregister a piece of attribute information, it
sends out a Leave message. Any GARP entity receiving this message starts its Leave timer,
and deregisters the attribute information if it does not receives a Join message again before
the timer times out.
• LeaveAll Timer: Once a GARP entity starts up, it starts the LeaveAll timer, and sends out a
LeaveAll message after the timer times out, so that other GARP entities can re-register all the
attribute information on this entity. After that, the entity restarts the LeaveAll timer to begin a
new cycle.
GVRP
GVRP, as an implementation of GARP, maintains dynamic VLAN registration information and
propagates the information to other switches by adopting the same mechanism of GARP.
After the GVRP feature is enabled on a switch, the switch receives the VLAN registration
information from other switches to dynamically update the local VLAN registration information,
including VLAN members, ports through which the VLAN members can be reached, and so on.
The switch also propagates the local VLAN registration information to other switches so that all the
switching devices in the same switched network can have the same VLAN information. The VLAN
registration information includes not only the static registration information configured locally, but
also the dynamic registration information, which is received from other switches.
In this switch, only the port with TRUNK link type can be set as the GVRP application entity to
maintain the VLAN registration information. GVRP has the following three port registration modes:
Normal, Fixed, and Forbidden.
• Normal: In this mode, a port can dynamically register/deregister a VLAN and propagate the
dynamic/static VLAN information.
• Fixed: In this mode, a port cannot register/deregister a VLAN dynamically. It only propagates
static VLAN information. That is, the port in Fixed mode only permits the packets of its static
VLAN to pass.
• Forbidden: In this mode, a port cannot register/deregister VLANs. It only propagates VLAN 1
information. That is, the port in Forbidden mode only permits the packets of the default VLAN
(namely VLAN 1) to pass.
Choose the menu VLAN→GVRP→GVRP Config to load the following page.
90
Figure 6-16 GVRP Config
Note:
If the GVRP feature is enabled for a member port of LAG, please ensure all the member ports of
this LAG are set to be in the same status and registration mode.
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
GVRP:
Allows you to Enable/Disable the GVRP function.
Port Config
Unit:
Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure the
link aggregation groups.
Select
: Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port:
Displays the port number.
Status:
Enable/Disable the GVRP feature for the port. The port type should
be set to TRUNK before enabling the GVRP feature.
Registration
Mode:
Select the Registration Mode for the port.
• Normal:
In this mode, a port can dynamically register/deregister
a VLAN and propagate the dynamic/static VLAN information.
91
• Fixed: In this mode, a port cannot register/deregister a VLAN
dynamically. It only propagates static VLAN information.
• Forbidden:
In this mode, a port cannot register/deregister
VLANs. It only propagates VLAN 1 information.
LeaveAll Timer:
Once the LeaveAll Timer is set, the port with GVRP enabled can send
a LeaveAll message after the timer times out,
so that other GARP
ports can re-
register all the attribute information. After that, the
LeaveAll timer will start to begin a new cycle. The LeaveAll Timer
ranges from 1000 to 30000 centiseconds.
Join Timer:
To guarantee the transmission of the Join messag
es, a GARP port
sends each Join message two times. The Join Timer is used to define
the interval between the two sending operations of each Join
message. The Join Timer ranges from 20 to 1000 centiseconds.
Leave Timer:
Once the Leave Timer is set, the GARP port receiving a Leave
message will start its Leave timer, and deregister the attribute
information if it does not receive a Join message again before the
timer times out. The Leave Timer ranges from 60 to 3000
centiseconds.
LAG:
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs.
Note:
LeaveAll Timer >= 10* Leave Timer, Leave Timer >= 2*Join Timer.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Set the link type for port. Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config
page, set the link type of the port to be TRUNK.
2
Enable GVRP function. Required. On the VLAN→GVRP page, enable GVRP
function.
3
Configure the registration
mode and the timers for the
port.
Required. On the VLAN→GVRP
page, configure the
parameters of ports basing on actual applications.
6.9 Private VLAN
Private VLANs, designed to save VLAN resources of uplink devices and decrease broadcast, are
sets of VLAN pairs that share a common primary identifier. To guarantee user information security,
the ease with which to manage and account traffic for service providers, in campus network,
service providers usually require that each individual user is Layer-2 separated. VLAN feature can
solve this problem. However, as stipulated by IEEE 802.1Q protocol, a device can only support up
to 4094 VLANs. If a service provider assigns one VLAN per user, the VLANs will be far from
enough; as a result, the number of users this service provider can support is limited.
Private VLAN adopts Layer 2 VLAN structure. A Private VLAN consists of a Primary VLAN and a
Secondary VLAN, providing a mechanism for achieving layer-2-separation between ports. For
uplink devices, all the packets received from the downstream are without VLAN tags. Uplink
92
devices need to identify Primary VLANs but not Secondary VLANs. Therefore, they can save
VLAN resources without considering the VLAN configuration in the lower layer. Meanwhile, the
service provider can assign each user an individual Secondary VLAN, so that users are separated
at the Layer 2 level.
Private VLAN technology is mainly used in campus or enterprise networks to achieve user
Layer-2-separation and to save VLAN resources of uplink devices.
The Elements of a Private VLAN
Promiscuous port: A promiscuous port connects to and communicates with the uplink device.
The PVID of the promiscuous port is the same with the Primary VLAN ID. One promiscuous port
can only join to one Primary VLAN.
Host port: A host port connects to and communicates with terminal device. The PVID of the host
port is the same as the Secondary VLAN ID. One host port can only belong to one Private VLAN.
Primary VLAN: A Private VLAN has one Primary VLAN and one Secondary VLAN. Primary VLAN
is the user VLAN uplink device can identify but it is not the actual VLAN the end user is in. Every
port in a private VLAN is a member of the primary VLAN. The primary VLAN carries unidirectional
traffic downstream from the promiscuous ports to the host ports and to other promiscuous ports.
Secondary VLAN: .Secondary VLAN is the actual VLAN the end user is in. Secondary VLANs are
associated with a primary VLAN, and are used to carry traffic from hosts to uplink devices. There
are two types of secondary VLANS:
Isolated VLAN－The VLAN that an isolated port is associated with is called isolated VLAN.
Each isolated VLAN must bind to a primary VLAN.
Community VLAN－The VLAN that a community port is associated with is called community
VLAN. Each community VLAN must bind to a primary VLAN.
Features of Private VLAN
1. A Private VLAN contains one Primary VLAN and one Secondary VLAN.
2. A VLAN cannot be set as the Primary VLAN and Secondary VLAN simultaneously.
3. A Secondary VLAN can only join one private VLAN.
4. A Primary VLAN can be associated with multi-Secondary VLANs to create multi-Private
VLANs.
Private VLAN Implementation
To hide Secondary VLANs from uplink devices and save VLAN resources, Private VLAN
containing one Primary VLAN and one Secondary VLAN requires the following characteristics:
Packets from different Secondary VLANs can be forwarded to the uplink device via
promiscuous port and carry no corresponding Secondary VLAN information.
Packets from Primary VLANs can be sent to end users via host port and carry no Primary
VLAN information.
93
Private VLAN functions are implemented on the PVLAN Config and Port Config pages.
6.9.1 PVLAN Config
On this page, you can create Private VLAN and view the information of the current defined Private
VLANs.
Choose the menu VLAN→Private VLAN→PVLAN Config to load the following page.
Figure 6-17 Create Private VLAN
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Private VLAN
Primary VLAN:
Enter the ID number of the Primary VLAN.
Secondary VLAN:
Enter the ID number of the Secondary VLAN.
Search Option
Search Option:
Select a Search Option from the pull-down list and click the Search
button to find your desired entry in Private VLAN.
All: Enter either the Primary VLAN ID or Secondary VLAN ID of
the desired Private VLAN.
Primary VLAN ID:
Enter the Primary VLAN ID number of the
desired Private VLAN.
Secondary VLAN ID:
Enter the Secondary VLAN ID number of
the desired Private VLAN.
Private VLAN Table
Select:
Select the entry to delete. It is multi-optional.
94
Primary VLAN:
Displays the Primary VLAN ID number of the Private VLAN.
Secondary VLAN:
Displays the Secondary VLAN ID number of the Private VLAN.
Port:
Displays the port list of the Private VLAN.
6.9.2 Port Config
The Private VLAN provides two Port Types for the ports, Promiscuous and Host. Usually, the
Promiscuous port is used to connect to uplink devices while the Host port is used to connect to the
he terminal hosts, such as PC and Server.
Choose the menu VLAN→Private VLAN→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 6-18 Create and View Protocol Template
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Config
Port selected:
Select the desired port for
configuration. You can input one or select
from the port table down the blank.
Port Type:
Select the Port Type from the pull-down list for the port.
Primary VLAN:
Specify the Primary VLAN the port belongs to.
Secondary VLAN:
Specify the Secondary VLAN the port belongs to.
95
UN I T:
Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure the
link aggregation groups.
Private VLAN Port Table
Port ID:
Displays the port number.
Port Type:
Displays the corresponding Port Type.
Note:
1. A Host Port can only join to one Private VLAN.
2. A Promiscuous Port can only join to one Primary VLAN.
3. If you want to add a Promiscuous port to different Private VLANs with the same Primary VLAN,
you need to add the Promiscuous port to any one of these Private VLANs.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Create Private VLAN. Required. On the VLAN→Private VLAN→PVLAN Config
page, Enter the Primary VLAN and Secondary VLAN, select
one type of secondary VLAN and then click the Create
button.
2
Add ports to Private VLAN Required. On the VLAN→Private VLAN→Port Config
page, select the desired ports and configure the port types
and click the Apply button.
3
Delete VLAN. Optional. On the VLAN→Private VLAN→PVLAN Config
page, select the desired entry to delete the corresponding
VLAN by clicking the Delete button.
6.10 Application Example for Private VLAN
Network Requirements
Switch C is connecting to switch A, switch A is connecting to switch B;
Switch A is connecting to VLAN4 and VLAN5;
Switch B is connecting to VLAN5 and VLAN8;
For switch C, packets from switch A and switch B have no VLAN tags. Switch C needs not to
consider the VLANs of switch A and switch B;
96
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Configure Switch C
Step Operation Description
1
Create VLAN6 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 6, owning Port 1/0/1.
Configure switch A
Step Operation Description
1
Create Private
VLANs.
Required. On the VLAN→Private VLAN→PVLAN Config page,
Enter the Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 4-5, select one type
of secondary VLAN and then click the Create button.
2
Add
Promiscuous
port to Private
VLANs
Required. On the VLAN→Private VLAN→Port Config page,
configure the port type of Port 1/0/2 and Port 1/0/4 as Promiscuous,
enter Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 4, and click the Apply
button.
3
Add Host port to
Private VLANs
Required. On the VLAN→Private VLAN→Port Config page,
configure the port type of Port 1/0/10 as Host, enter Primary VLAN 6
and Secondary VLAN 4, and click the Apply button.
Configure the
port type of Port 1/0/11 as Host
, enter Primary VLAN 6 and
Secondary VLAN 5, and click the Apply button
Configure switch B
Step Operation Description
1
Create Private
VLANs.
Required. On the VLAN→Private VLAN→PVLAN Config page,
enter the Pr
imary VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 5 and 8, select one
type of secondary VLAN and then click the Create button.
97
2
Add
Promiscuous
port to Private
VLANs
Required. On the VLAN→Private VLAN→Port Config page,
configure the port type of Port 1/0/3 as Promiscuous, enter Primary
VLAN 6 and Secondary VLAN 5, and click the Apply button.
3
Add Host port to
Private VLANs
Required. On the VLAN→Private VLAN→Port Config page,
configure the port type of 1/0/12 as Host, enter Primary VLAN 6 and
Secondary VLAN 5, and click the Apply button.
Configure the port
type of Port 1/0/13 as Host
, enter Primary VLAN 6 and Secondary
VLAN 8, and click the Apply button
Return to CONTENTS
98
Chapter 7 Spanning Tree
STP (Spanning Tree Protocol), subject to IEEE 802.1D standard, is to disbranch a ring network in
the Data Link layer in a local network. Devices running STP discover loops in the network and block
ports by exchanging information, in that way, a ring network can be disbranched to form a
tree-topological ring-free network to prevent packets from being duplicated and forwarded endlessly
in the network.
BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) is the protocol data that STP and RSTP use. Enough
information is carried in BPDU to ensure the spanning tree generation. STP is to determine the
topology of the network via transferring BPDUs between devices.
To implement spanning tree function, the switches in the network transfer BPDUs between each
other to exchange information and all the switches supporting STP receive and process the
received BPDUs. BPDUs carry the information that is needed for switches to figure out the
spanning tree.
STP Elements
Bridge ID (Bridge Identifier): Indicates the value of the priority and MAC address of the bridge.
Bridge ID can be configured and the switch with the lower bridge ID has the higher priority.
Root Bridge: Indicates the switch has the lowest bridge ID. Configure the best PC in the ring
network as the root bridge to ensure best network performance and reliability.
Designated Bridge: Indicates the switch has the lowest path cost from the switch to the root
bridge in each network segment. BPDUs are forwarded to the network segment through the
designated bridge. The switch with the lowest bridge ID will be chosen as the designated bridge.
Root Path Cost: Indicates the sum of the path cost of the root port and the path cost of all the
switches that packets pass through. The root path cost of the root bridge is 0.
Bridge Priority: The bridge priority can be set to a value in the range of 0~32768. The lower value
priority has the higher priority. The switch with the higher priority has more chance to be chosen as
the root bridge.
Root Port: Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge and
forwards packets to the root.
Designated Port: Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment or
switch.
Port Priority: The port priority can be set to a value in the range of 0~255. The lower value priority
has the higher priority. The port with the higher priority has more chance to be chosen as the root
port.
Path Cost: Indicates the parameter for choosing the link path by STP. By calculating the path cost,
STP chooses the better links and blocks the redundant links so as to disbranch the ring-network to
form a tree-topological ring-free network.
The following network diagram shows the sketch map of spanning tree. Switch A, B and C are
connected together in order. After STP generation, switch A is chosen as root bridge, the path from
port 2 to port 6 is blocked.
Bridge: Switch A is the root bridge in the whole network; switch B is the designated bridge of
switch C.
Port: Port 3 is the root port of switch B and port 5 is the root port of switch C; port 1 is the
designated port of switch A and port 4 is the designated port of switch B; port 6 is the blocked
port of switch C.
99
Figure 7-1 Basic STP diagram
STP Timers
Hello Time:
Hello Time ranges from 1 to 10 seconds. It specifies the interval to send BPDU packets. It is used
to test the links.
Max. Age:
Max. Age ranges from 6 to 40 seconds. It specifies the maximum time the switch can wait without
receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure.
Forward Delay:
Forward Delay ranges from 4 to 30 seconds. It specifies the time for the port to transit its state
after the network topology is changed.
When the STP regeneration caused by network malfunction occurs, the STP structure will get
some corresponding change. However, as the new configuration BPDUs cannot be spread in the
whole network at once, the temporal loop will occur if the port transits its state immediately.
Therefore, STP adopts a state transit mechanism, that is, the new root port and the designated
port begins to forward data after twice forward delay, which ensures the new configuration BPDUs
are spread in the whole network.
BPDU Comparing Principle in STP mode
Assuming two BPDUs: BPDU X and BPDU Y
If the root bridge ID of X is smaller than that of Y, X is superior to Y.
If the root bridge ID of X equals that of Y, but the root path cost of X is smaller than that of Y, X is
superior to Y.
If the root bridge ID and the root path cost of X equal those of Y, but the bridge ID of X is smaller
than that of Y, X is superior to Y.
If the root bridge ID, the root path cost and bridge ID of X equal those of Y, but the port ID of X is
smaller than that of Y, X is superior to Y.
STP Generation
In the beginning
In the beginning, each switch regards itself as the root, and generates a configuration BPDU for
each port on it as a root, with the root path cost being 0, the ID of the designated bridge being that
of the switch, and the designated port being itself.
100
Comparing BPDUs
Each switch sends out configuration BPDUs and receives a configuration BPDU on one of its ports
from another switch. The following table shows the comparing operations.
Step Operation
1 I
f the priority of the BPDU received on the port is lower than that of the BPDU if of
the port itself, the switch discards the BPDU and does not change the BPDU of
the port.
2 If the priority of the BPDU is higher than that of the BPDU of the port itself,
the
switch replaces the BPDU of the port with the received one and compares it with
those of other ports on the switch to obtain the one with the highest priority.
Table 7-1 Comparing BPDUs
Selecting the root bridge
The root bridge is selected by BPDU comparing. The switch with the smallest root ID is chosen as
the root bridge.
Selecting the root port and designate port
The operation is taken in the following way:
Step Operation
1 For each switch (except the
one chosen as the root bridge) in a network, the port
that receives the BPDU with the highest priority is chosen as the root port of the
switch.
2
Using the root port BPDU and the root path cost, the switch generates a
designated port BPDU for each of its ports.
Root ID is replaced with that of the root port;
Root path is replaced with the sum of the root path cost of the root port and
the path cost between this port and the root port;
The ID of the designated bridge is replaced with that of the switch;
The ID of the designated port is replaced with that of the port.
3
The switch compares the resulting BPDU with the BPDU of the desired port
whose role you want to determine.
If the resulting BPDU takes the precedence over the BPDU of the port, the
port i
s chosen as the designated port and the BPDU of this port is replaced
with the resulting BPDU. The port regularly sends out the resulting BPDU;
If the BPDU of this port takes the precedence over the resulting BPDU, the
BPDU of this port is not replaced and
the port is blocked. The port only can
receive BPDUs.
Table 7-2 Selecting root port and designated port
Tips
：
In a STP with stable topology, only the root port and designated port can forward data, and the
other ports are blocked. The blocked ports only can receive BPDUs.
RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol), evolved from the 802.1D STP standard, enable Ethernet
ports to transit their states rapidly. The premises for the port in the RSTP to transit its state rapidly
are as follows.
101
The condition for the root port to transit its port state rapidly: The old root port of the switch
stops forwarding data and the designated port of the upstream switch begins to forward
data.
The condition for the designated port to transit its port state rapidly: The designated port is
an edge port or connecting to a point-to-point link. If the designated port is an edge port, it
can directly transit to forwarding state; if the designated port is connecting to a
point-to-point link, it can transit to forwarding state after getting response from the
downstream switch through handshake.
RSTP Elements
Edge Port: Indicates the port connected directly to terminals.
P2P Link: Indicates the link between two switches directly connected.
MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol), compatible with both STP and RSTP and subject to IEEE
802.1s standard, not only enables spanning trees to converge rapidly, but also enables packets of
different VLANs to be forwarded along their respective paths so as to provide redundant links
with a better load-balancing mechanism.
Features of MSTP:
MSTP combines VLANs and spanning tree together via VLAN-to-instance mapping table. It
binds several VLANs to an instance to save communication cost and network resources.
MSTP divides a spanning tree network into several regions. Each region has several
internal spanning trees, which are independent of each other.
MSTP provides a load-balancing mechanism for the packets transmission in the VLAN.
MSTP is compatible with both STP and RSTP.
MSTP Elements
MST Region (Multiple Spanning Tree Region): An MST Region comprises switches with the same
region configuration and VLAN-to-Instances mapping relationship.
IST (Internal Spanning Tree): An IST is a spanning tree in an MST.
CST (Common Spanning Tree): A CST is the spanning tree in a switched network that connects all
MST regions in the network.
CIST (Common and Internal Spanning Tree): A CIST, comprising IST and CST, is the spanning
tree in a switched network that connects all switches in the network.
102
The following figure shows the network diagram in MSTP.
Figure 7-2 Basic MSTP diagram
MSTP
MSTP divides a network into several MST regions. The CST is generated between these MST
regions, and multiple spanning trees can be generated in each MST region. Each spanning tree is
called an instance. As well as STP, MSTP uses BPDUs to generate spanning tree. The only
difference is that the BPDU for MSTP carries the MSTP configuration information on the switches.
Port States
In an MSTP, ports can be in the following four states:
Forwarding: In this status the port can receive/forward data, receive/send BPDU packets as
well as learn MAC address.
Learning: In this status the port can receive/send BPDU packets and learn MAC address.
Blocking: In this status the port can only receive BPDU packets.
Disconnected: In this status the port is not participating in the STP.
Port Roles
In an MSTP, the following roles exist:
Root Port: Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge
and forwards packets to the root.
Designated Port: Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment
or switch.
Master Port: Indicates the port that connects a MST region to the common root. The path
from the master port to the common root is the shortest path between this MST region and
the common root.
Alternate Port: Indicates the port that can be a backup port of a root or master port.
Backup Port: Indicates the port that is the backup port of a designated port.
Disabled: Indicates the port that is not participating in the S T P.
103
The following diagram shows the different port roles.
Figure 7-3 Port roles
The Spanning Tree module is mainly for spanning tree configuration of the switch, including four
submenus: STP Config, Port Config, MSTP Instance and STP Security.
7.1 STP Config
The STP Config function, for global configuration of spanning trees on the switch, can be
implemented on STP Config and STP Summary pages.
7.1.1 STP Config
Before configuring spanning trees, you should make clear the roles each switch plays in each
spanning tree instance. Only one switch can be the root bridge in each spanning tree instance. On
this page you can globally configure the spanning tree function and related parameters.
Choose the menu Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config to load the following page.
Figure 7-4 STP Config
104
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
Spanning-Tree: Select Enable/Disable STP function globally on the switch.
Mode: Select the desired STP mode on the switch.
• STP: Spanning Tree Protocol.
• RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
• MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
Parameters Config
CIST Priority: Enter a value from 0 to 61440 to specify the priority of the switch
for comparison in the CIST. CIST priority is an important criterion
on determining the root bridge. In the same condition, the switch
with the highest priority will be chosen as the root bridge. The
lower value has the higher priority. The default value is 32768 and
should be exact divisor of 4096.
Hello Time
Enter a value from 1 to 10 in seconds to specify the interval to
send BPDU packets. It is used to test the links. 2*(Hello Time + 1)
≤ Max Age. The default value is 2 seconds.
Max Age: Enter a val
ue from 6 to 40 in seconds to specify the maximum
time the switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before
attempting to reconfigure. The default value is 20 seconds.
Forward Delay:
Enter a value from 4 to 30 in seconds to specify the time for the
port to
transit its state after the network topology is changed.
2*(Forward Delay-1) ≥ Max Age. The default value is 15 seconds.
TxHold Count:
Enter a value from 1 to 20 to set the maximum number of BPDU
packets transmitted per Hello Time interval. The default value is
5pps.
Max Hops: Enter a value from 1 to 40 to set the maximum number of hops
that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded. The
default value is 20 hops.
Note:
1. The forward delay parameter and the network diameter are correlated. A too small forward
delay parameter may result in temporary loops. A too large forward delay may cause a
network unable to resume the normal state in time. The default value is recommended.
2. An adequate hello time parameter can enable the switch to discover the link failures occurred
in the network without occupying too much network resources. A too large hello time
parameter may result in normal links being regarded as invalid when packets drop occurred in
the links, which in turn result in spanning tree being regenerated. A too small hello time
parameter may result in duplicated configuration being sent frequently, which increases the
network load of the switches and wastes network resources. The default value is
recommended.
3. A too small max age parameter may result in the switches regenerating spanning trees
frequently and cause network congestions to be falsely regarded as link problems. A too large
max age parameter result in the switches unable to find the link problems in time, which in
turn handicaps spanning trees being regenerated in time and makes the network less
adaptive. The default value is recommended.
4. If the TxHold Count parameter is too large, the number of MSTP packets being sent in each
hello time may be increased with occupying too much network resources. The default value is
recommended.
105
7.1.2 STP Summary
On this page you can view the related parameters for Spanning Tree function.
Choose the menu Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Summary to load the following page.
Figure 7-5 STP Summary
106
7.2 Port Config
On this page you can configure the parameters of the ports for CIST.
Choose the menu Spanning Tree→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 7-6 Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Config
UNIT:1/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS to configure the
link aggregation groups.
Select: Select the desired port for STP configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Status: Select Enable /Disable STP function for the desired port.
Priority:
Enter a value from 0 to 240 divisible by 16. Port priority is an
important criterion on determining if the port connected to this port
will be chosen as the root port. The lower value has the higher
priority.
ExtPath Cost:
ExtPath Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs
of ports in different MST regions. It is an important criterion on
determining the root port. The lower value has the higher priority.
IntPath Cost: IntPath Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs
of ports in an MST region. It is an important criterion on determining
the root port. The lower value has the higher priority.
Edge Port:
Select Enable/Disable Edge Port. The edge port can transit its state
from blocking to forwarding rapidly without waiting for forward delay.
P2P Link:
Select the P2P link status. If the two ports in the P2P link are root port
or designated port, they can transit their states to forwarding rapidly
to reduce the unnecessary forward delay.
MCheck:
Select Enable to perform MCheck operation on the port. Unchange
means no MCheck operation.
107
Port Mode: Display the spanning tree mode of the port.
Port Role: Displays the role of the port played in the STP Instance.
Root Port: Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from
this bridge to the Root Bridge and forwards packets to the root.
Designated Port
: Indicates the port that forwards packets to a
downstream network segment or switch.
Master Port: Indicates the port that connects a MST region to
the common root. The path from the master port to the common
root is the shortest path between this MST region and the
common root.
Alternate Port: Indicates the port that can be a backup port of a
root or master port.
Backup Port: Indicates the
port that is the backup port of a
designated port.
Disabled: Indicates the port that is not participating in the STP.
Port Status: Displays the working status of the port.
Forwarding
: In this status the port can receive/forward data,
receive/send BPDU packets as well as learn MAC address.
Learning: In this status the port can receive/send BPDU packets
and learn MAC address.
Blocking: In this status the port can only receive BPDU packets.
Disconnected
: In this status the port is not participating in the
S T P.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Note:
1. Configure the ports connected directly to terminals as edge ports and enable the BPDU
protection function as well. This not only enables these ports to transit to forwarding state
rapidly but also secures your network.
2. All the links of ports in a LAG can be configured as point-to-point links.
3. When the link of a port is configured as a point-to-point link, the spanning tree instances
owning this port are configured as point-to-point links. If the physical link of a port is not a
point-to-point link and you forcibly configure the link as a point-to-point link, temporary loops
may be incurred.
7.3 MSTP Instance
MSTP combines VLANs and spanning tree together via VLAN-to-instance mapping table
(VLAN-to-spanning-tree mapping). By adding MSTP instances, it binds several VLANs to an
instance to realize the load balance based on instances.
Only when the switches have the same MST region name, MST region revision and
VLAN-to-Instance mapping table, the switches can be regarded as in the same MST region.
The MSTP Instance function can be implemented on Region Config, Instance Config and
Instance Port Config pages.
108
7.3.1 Region Config
On this page you can configure the name and revision of the MST region.
Choose the menu Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region Config to load the following page.
Figure 7-7 Region Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Region Config
Region Name: Create a name for MST region identification using up to 32 characters.
Revision: Enter the revision from 0 to 65535 for MST region identification.
7.3.2 Instance Config
Instance Configuration, a property of MST region, is used to describe the VLAN to Instance
mapping configuration. You can assign VLAN to different instances appropriate to your needs.
Every instance is a VLAN group independent of other instances and CIST.
Choose the menu Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance Config to load the following page.
Figure 7-8 Instance Config
109
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN-Instance Mapping
Instance ID: Enter the corresponding instance ID.
VLAN ID:
Enter the desired VLAN ID. After modification here, the new VLAN ID
will be added to the corresponding instance ID and the previous
VLAN ID won’t be replaced.
Instance Table
Select: Select the desired Instance ID for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Instance ID: Displays Instance ID of the switch.
Status: Displays status of the instance.
Priority:
Enter the priority of the switch in the instance. It is an important
criterion on determining if the switch will be chosen as the root bridge
in the specific instance.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID which belongs to the corresponding instance ID.
After modification here, the previous VLAN ID will be cleared and
mapped to the CIST.
Clear All: Click Clear All to clear up all VLAN IDs from the instance ID. The
cleared VLAN ID will be automatically mapped to the CIST.
7.3.3 Instance Port Config
A port can play different roles in different spanning tree instance. On this page you can configure
the parameters of the ports in different instance IDs as well as view status of the ports in the
specified instance.
110
Choose the menu Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance Port Config to load the following
page.
Figure 7-9 Instance Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Instance ID Select
Instance ID: Select the desired instance ID for its port configuration.
Instance Port Config
UNIT:1/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS to configure the
link aggregation groups.
Select: Select the
desired port to specify its priority and path cost. It is
multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Priority: Enter the priority of the port in the instance. It is an important criterion
on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the
root port.
Path Cost:
Path Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of
ports in an MST region. It is an important criterion on determining the
root port. The lower value has the higher priority.
111
Port Role: Displays the role of the port played in the MSTP Instance.
Port Status: Displays the working status of the port.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Note:
The port status of one port in different spanning tree instances can be different.
Global configuration Procedure for Spanning Tree function:
Step Operation Description
1
Make clear roles the switches
play in spanning tree
instances: root bridge or
designated bridge
Preparation.
2
Globally configure MSTP
parameters
Required. Enable
Spanning Tree function on the switch
and configure MSTP parameters on Spanning
Tree→STP Config→STP Config page.
3
Configure MSTP parameters
for ports
Required.
Configure MSTP parameters for ports on
Spanning Tree→Port Config→Port Config page.
4 Configure the MST region
Required. Create MST region and configure the role the
switch plays in the MST region on Spanning
Tree→MSTP Instance→Region Config and Instance
Config page.
5
Configure MSTP parameters
for instance ports
Optional. Configure different instances in the MST region
and configure MSTP parameters for instance ports on
Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance Port
Config page.
7.4 STP Security
Configuring protection function for devices can prevent devices from any malicious attack against
STP features. The STP Security function can be implemented on Port Protect and TC Protect
pages.
Port Protect function is to prevent the devices from any malicious attack against STP features.
7.4.1 Port Protect
On this page you can configure loop protect feature, root protect feature, TC protect feature,
BPDU protect feature and BPDU filter feature for ports. You are suggested to enable
corresponding protection feature for the qualified ports.
Loop Protect
In a stable network, a switch maintains the states of ports by receiving and processing BPDU
packets from the upstream switch. However, when link congestions or link failures occurred to the
network, a down stream switch does not receive BPDU packets for certain period, which results in
spanning trees being regenerated and roles of ports being reselected, and causes the blocked
ports to transit to forwarding state. Therefore, loops may be incurred in the network.
The loop protect function can suppresses loops. With this function enabled, a port, regardless of
the role it plays in instances, is always set to blocking state, when the port does not receive BPDU
112
packets from the upstream switch and spanning trees are regenerated, and thereby loops can be
prevented.
Root Protect
A CIST and its secondary root bridges are usually located in the high-bandwidth core region.
Wrong configuration or malicious attacks may result in configuration BPDU packets with higher
priorities being received by the legal root bridge, which causes the current legal root bridge to lose
its position and network topology jitter to occur. In this case, flows that should travel along
high-speed links may lead to low-speed links, and network congestion may occur.
To avoid this, MSTP provides root protect function. Ports with this function enabled can only be set
as designated ports in all spanning tree instances. When a port of this type receives BDPU
packets with higher priority, it transits its state to blocking state and stops forwarding packets (as if
it is disconnected from the link). The port resumes the normal state if it does not receive any
configuration BPDU packets with higher priorities for a period of two times of forward delay.
TC Protect
A switch removes MAC address entries upon receiving TC-BPDU packets. If a user maliciously
sends a large amount of TC-BPDU packets to a switch in a short period, the switch will be busy
with removing MAC address entries, which may decrease the performance and stability of the
network.
To prevent the switch from frequently removing MAC address entries, you can enable the TC
protect function on the switch. With TC protect function enabled, if the account number of the
received TC-BPDUs exceeds the maximum number you set in the TC threshold field, the switch
will not performs the removing operation in the TC protect cycle. Such a mechanism prevents the
switch from frequently removing MAC address entries.
BPDU Protect
Ports of the switch directly connected to PCs or servers are configured as edge ports to rapidly
transit their states. When these ports receive BPDUs, the system automatically configures these
ports as non-edge ports and regenerates spanning trees, which may cause network topology jitter.
Normally these ports do not receive BPDUs, but if a user maliciously attacks the switch by sending
BPDUs, network topology jitter occurs.
To prevent this attack, MSTP provides BPDU protect function. With this function enabled on the
switch, the switch shuts down the edge ports that receive BPDUs and reports these cases to the
administrator. If a port is shut down, only the administrator can restore it.
BPDU Filter
BPDU filter function is to prevent BPDUs flood in the STP network. If a switch receives malicious
BPDUs, it forwards these BPDUs to the other switched in the network, which may result in
spanning trees being continuously regenerated. In this case, the switch occupying too much CPU
or the protocol status of BPDUs is wrong.
With BPDU filter function enabled, a port does not receive or forward BPDUs, but it sends out its
own BPDUs. Such a mechanism prevents the switch from being attacked by BPDUs so as to
guarantee generation the spanning trees correct.
113
Choose the menu Spanning Tree→STP Security→Port Protect to load the following page.
Figure 7-10 Port Protect
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Protect
UNIT:1/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS to configure the
link aggregation groups.
Select:
Select the desired port for port protect configuration. It is
multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Loop Protect: Loop Protect is to prevent the loop
s in the network brought by
recalculating STP because of link failures and network congestions.
Root Protect: Root Protect is to prevent wrong network topology change caused by
the role change of the current legal root bridge.
TC Protect: TC Protect is t
o prevent the decrease of the performance and
stability of the switch brought by continuously removing MAC
address entries upon receiving TC-BPDUs in the STP network.
BPDU Protect:
BPDU Protect is to prevent the edge port from being attacked by
maliciously created BPDUs
BPDU Filter: BPDU Filter is to prevent BPDUs flood in the STP network.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
114
7.4.2 TC Protect
When TC Protect is enabled for the port on Port Protect page, the TC threshold and TC protect
cycle need to be configured on this page.
Choose the menu Spanning Tree→STP Security→TC Protect to load the following page.
Figure 7-11 TC Protect
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
TC Protect
TC Threshold:
Enter a number from 1 to 100. It is the maximum number of the
TC-
BPDUs received by the switch in a TC Protect Cycle. The
default value is 20.
TC Protect Cycle:
Enter a value from 1 to 10 to specify the TC Protect Cycle. The
default value is 5.
7.5 Application Example for STP Function
Network Requirements
Switch A, B, C, D and E all support MSTP function.
A is the central switch.
B and C are switches in the convergence layer. D, E and F are switches in the access layer.
There are 6 VLANs labeled as VLAN101-VLAN106 in the network.
All switches run MSTP and belong to the same MST region.
The data in VLAN101, 103 and 105 are transmitted in the STP with B as the root bridge. The
data in VLAN102, 104 and 106 are transmitted in the STP with C as the root bridge.
115
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Configure Switch A:
Step Operation Description
1 Configure ports On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,
configure the link type of the related ports as Tagged,
and add the ports to VLAN101-VLAN106. The detailed
instructions can be found in the section 802.1Q VLAN.
2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config page,
enable STP function and select MSTP version.
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→Port Config page,
enable MSTP function for the port.
3 Configure the region name and
the revision of MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region
Config page, configure the region as TP-
LINK and
keep the default revision setting.
4 Configure VLAN-to-Instance
mapping table of the MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure VLAN-to-
Instance mapping
table. Map VLAN 101, 103 and 105 to Instance 1; map
VLAN 102, 104 and 106 to Instance 2.
Configure Switch B:
Step Operation Description
1 Configure ports On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,
configure the link type of the related ports as Tagged,
and add the ports to VLAN101-VLAN106. The detailed
instructions can be found in the section 802.1Q VLAN.
2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config page,
enable STP function and select MSTP version.
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→Port Config page,
enable MSTP function for the port.
116
Step Operation Description
3 Configure the region name and
the revision of MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region
Config page, configure the region as TP-
LINK and
keep the default revision setting.
4 Configure VLAN-to-Instance
mapping table of the MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure VLAN-to-
Instance mapping
table. Map VLAN 101, 103 and 105 to Instance 1; map
VLAN 102, 104 and 106 to Instance 2.
5
Configure switch B as the root
bridge of Instance 1
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure the priority of Instance 1 to be
0.
6
Configure switch B as the
designated bridge of Instance 2
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure the priority of Instance 2 to be
4096.
Configure Switch C:
Step Operation Description
1 Configure ports On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,
configure the link type of the related ports as Tagged,
and add the ports to VLAN101-VLAN
106. The
detailed instructions can b
e found in the section
802.1Q VLAN.
2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config
page, enable STP function and select MSTP version.
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→Port Config
page, enable MSTP function for the port.
3 Configure the region name and
the revision of MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region
Config page, configure the region as TP-LINK and
keep the default revision setting.
4 Configure VLAN-to-Instance
mapping table of the MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure VLAN-to-I
nstance mapping
table. Map VLAN101, 103 and 105 to Instance 1; map
VLAN102, 104 and 106 to Instance 2.
5
Configure switch C as the root
bridge of Instance 1
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config
page, configure the priority of Instance 1 to be
4096.
6
Configure switch C as the root
bridge of Instance 2
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config
page, configure the priority of Instance 2 to be
0.
117
Configure Switch D:
Step Operation Description
1 Configure ports On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,
configure the link type of the related ports as Tagged,
and add the ports to VLAN101-VLAN
106. The
detailed instructions can be found in the section
802.1Q VLAN.
2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config
page, enable STP function and select MSTP version.
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→Port Config
page, enable MSTP function for the port.
3 Configure the region name and
the revision of MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region
Config page, configure the region as TP-LINK and
keep the default revision setting.
4 Configure VLAN-to-Instance
mapping table of the MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure VLAN-to-Instance mapping
table. Map VLAN101, 103 and 105 to Instance 1; map
VLAN102, 104 and 106 to Instance 2.
The configuration procedure for switch E and F is the same with that for switch D.
The topology diagram of the two instances after the topology is stable
For Instance 1 (VLAN101, 103 and 105), the red paths in the following figure are connected
links; the gray paths are the blocked links.
For Instance 2 (VLAN102, 104 and 106), the blue paths in the following figure are connected
links; the gray paths are the blocked links.
118
Suggestion for Configuration
Enable TC Protect function for all the ports of switches.
Enable Root Protect function for all the ports of root bridges.
Enable Loop Protect function for the non-edge ports.
Enable BPDU Protect function or BPDU Filter function for the edge ports which are connected to
the PC and server.
Return to CONTENTS
119
Chapter 8 Ethernet OAM
OAM Overview
Ethernet OAM (Operation, Administration, and Maintenance) is a Layer 2 protocol for monitoring
and troubleshooting Ethernet networks. It can report the network status to network administrators
through the OAMPDUs exchanged between two OAM entities, facilitating network management.
Ethernet OAM is a slow protocol with very limited bandwidth requirement. The frame transmission
rate is limited to a maximum of 10 frames per second; therefore, the impact of OAM on data traffic
is negligible.
On a point-to-point link between two OAM-enabled devices, OAM helps to monitor the link status
from the following three points.
1. Link performance monitoring, for detecting link errors.
2. Fault detection and alarm, for reporting link errors to the administrators.
3. Loopback testing, for detecting link errors through non-OAMPDUs.
Currently, Ethernet OAM is mainly used to monitor the data link in the “last mile”.
OAMPDUs
There are six types of OAMPDUs. The following figure shows the details of the most commonly
used OAMPDUs, namely, Information OAMPDU, Event Notification OAMPDU and Loopback
Control OAMPDU.
Figure 8-1 OAMPDUs
As Figure 8-1 shows, OAMPDUs are standard length Ethernet frames. They must be untagged
and range from 64 to 1518 bytes.
(1) Dest addr: The Dest addr (Destination MAC address) of an OAMPDU is the
Slow_Protocols_Multicast address (01:80:c2:00:00:02).
(2) Source addr: The Source addr is the MAC address associated with the port through which
the OAMPDU is transmitted.
(3) Type: The type field is fixed to 0x8809.
(4) Sub-type: The Sub-type field is fixed to 0x03.
(5) Flags: The flags field contains status bits of an OAM entity.
(6) Code: The code field identifies the specific type of OAMPDU. As mentioned above,
Information OAMPDU, Event Notification OAMPDU and Loopback control OAMPDU are
commonly used, and their codes are 0x00, 0x01, and 0x04. The three OAMPDUs are
described as follows.
120
Information OAMPDU: Information OAMPDU is used for discovery. It transmits the state
information of an OAM entity (including local, remote, and organization-specific information)
to another OAM entity, and maintains OAM connection.
Event Notification OAMPDU: Event Notification OAMPDU is used for link monitoring. It is sent
as an alarm when a failure occurs to the link connecting the local OAM entity and a remote
OAM entity.
Loopback Control OAMPDU: Loopback Control OAMPDU is used to control the remote client’s
OAM remote loopback state. Its Data field consists of a remote loopback command to enable
or disable the OAM remote loopback, so that the local client can enable/disable loopback on
the remote OAM entity.
OAM Functions
As defined by IEEE 802.3 Clause 57, Ethernet in the First Mile., OAM functions include Discovery,
Link Monitoring, Remote Failure Indication, and Remote Loopback.
Discovery
Discovery is the first phase of Ethernet OAM. During this phase, an OAM entity discovers other
OAM entities and establishes connections using Information OAMPDUs.
As for OAM connection, an OAM entity can operate in two modes: active and passive. Only the
active OAM entity can initiate an OAM connection process. The passive OAM entity waits and
responds to OAM connection establishment requests. Interconnected OAM entities notify the peer
of their OAM configuration information and the OAM capabilities of the local nodes to support
OAM by exchanging Information OAMPDUs, and then determine if OAM connections can be
established. Only when the settings concerning Loopback, link detecting, and link event of the
both side match can an OAM connection be established.
Figure 8-2 OAM Discovery
The difference between active OAM mode and passive OAM mode is shown as follows.
Item Active OAM mode Passive OAM mode
Initiating OAM Discovery Available Unavailable
Responding to OAM Discovery Available Available
Transmitting Information OAMPDUs Available Available
Transmitting Event Notification
OAMPDUs Available Available
Transmitting Information OAMPDUs
with the Data/Pad field being empty Available Available
121
Item Active OAM mode Passive OAM mode
Transmitting Loo
pback Control
OAMPDUs Available Unavailable
Responding to Loopback Control
OAMPDUs
Available
(if both sides operate
in active OAM mode)
Available
Transmitting organization-specific
OAMPDUs Available Available
Table 8-1 Differences between active OAM mode and passive OAM mode
After an OAM connection is established, the OAM entities on both sides exchange Information
OAMPDUs periodically to keep the OAM connection valid. The OAM entity considers the OAM
connection invalid if it does not receive the Information OAMPDU from the peer entity for 5
seconds.
Link Monitoring
Link Monitoring is for detecting and locating link faults under a variety of circumstances. When
there are problems detected on the link, the device will send its remote peer the Event Notification
OAMPDUs to report link events. The link events are described as follows:
OAM Link Events Description
Symbol Period Error A Symbol Period Error event occurs if the number of
symbol errors exceeds the
threshold during a
specific period of time.
Frame Error
A Frame Error event occurs if the number of frame
errors exceeds the threshold during a specific period
of time.
Frame Period Error A Frame Period Error event occurs if the number of
frame errors in specific number of received frames
exceeds the threshold.
Frame Seconds Error A Frame Seconds Error event occurs if the number
of error frame seconds exceeds the threshold during
a specific period of time. A second is called an error
frame second if error frames occur in the second.
Table 8-2 OAM Link Events
Remote Failure Indication
Faults in Ethernet are difficult to detect, especially when the physical connection in the network is
not interrupted but network performance degrades gradually. A flag in the OAMPDU allows an
OAM entity to convey failure conditions to its peer. The failure conditions are as follows:
Link Fault: Peer link signal is lost. This is sent once per second in the Information OAMPDU.
Dying Gasp: An unrecoverable fault, such as power failure, occurs. This is sent immediately and
continuously.
Critical Event: Unspecified critical event occurs. This is sent immediately and continuously.
122
As Information OAMPDUs are sent between the OAM entities periodically, an OAM entity can
inform one of its OAM peers of link faults through Information OAMPDUs. So the network
administrator can get informed of the link faults and take action in time.
Remote Loopback
Remote loopback helps to ensure the quality of links during installation or when troubleshooting.
After the OAM connection is established, the active OAM entity can put its OAM peer into
loopback mode using a loopback control OAMPDU.
With remote loopback enabled, the active OAM entity sends remote loopback requests and the
peer responds. If the peer is in the loopback mode, it returns all frames except OAMPDUs and
pause frames to the senders along the original paths. Through these return frames, administrators
can test the link performance like delay, jitter, and frame loss rate.
The following figure shows how remote loopback testing works.
Figure 8-3 Remote Loopback
8.1 Basic Config
On the Basic Config page, you can enable the Ethernet OAM function on a specified port, and
configure its OAM mode as active or passive. Also, you can check out the connection status on the
Discovery Info page.
123
8.1.1 Basic Config
Choose the menu Ethernet OAM→ Basic Config→ Basic Config to load the following page.
Figure 8-4 Basic Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Basic Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-select the cor
responding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Mode: Select the OAM mode for the desired port.
State:
Select Enable/Disable the Ethernet OAM function for the desired
port.
Note:
You cannot establish an OAM connection between two OAM entities that work in the passive
mode.
124
8.1.2 Discovery Info
Choose the menu Ethernet OAM→ Basic Config→ Discovery Info to load the following page.
Figure 8-5 Discovery Info
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Local Client
The local client part shows the information of the local OAM entity.
OAM: Displays whether the OAM function is enabled or disabled on the
selected port.
Mode: Displays the OAM mode of the selected port.
Max OAMPDU: Displays the maximum size of the OAMPDU.
Remote Loopback: Displays whether the local client s
upports remote loopback
function.
Unidirection: Displays whether the local client supports unidirectional OAM
operation.
Some devices support unidirectional OAM operation. These
devices provide an OAMPDU-based mechanism to notify the
remote OAM entity wh
en one direction of a link is
non-operational and therefore data transmission is disabled.
125
Link Monitoring: Displays whether the local client supports link monitoring function.
Variable Request: Displays whether the local client supports variable request
. If
supports, the local client can send some variable requests to the
remote client to learn about the link status from the response of
the remote client.
PDU Revision: Displays the Information TLV revision of Information OAMPDU.
Operation Status: Displays the operating status of the OAM connection.
Disable: OAM is disabled on this port.
LinkFault: The link has detected a fault and is transmitting
OAMPDUs with a link fault indication.
PassiveWait: The port is in passive mode and is waiting to
see if the peer device is OAM capable.
ActiveSendLocal: The port is in active mode and is sending
local information.
SendLocalAndRemote: The local port has discovered the
peer but has not yet accepted or rejected the configuration of
the peer.
SendLocalAndRemoteOK: T
he local device agrees the OAM
peer entity.
PeeringLocallyRejected: The local OAM entity rejects the
remote peer OAM entity.
PeeringRemotelyRejected: The remote OAM entity rejects the
local device.
NonOperHalfDuplex: Since Ethernet OAM functions are not
designed to work completely over half-
duplex ports. This
value indicates Ethernet OAM is enabled but the port is in
half-duplex operation.
Loopback Status: Displays the loopback status.
No Loopback: Neither the local client nor the remote client is
in the loopback mode.
Local Loopback: The local client is in the loopback mode.
Remote Loopback: The remote client is in the loopback mode.
Remote Client
The local client part shows the information of the remote OAM entity.
Mode: Displays the OAM mode of the remote client.
Mac Address: Displays the MAC address of the remote client.
Vendor(OUI): Displays the vender’s OUI of the remote client.
An OUI address is a unique identifier assigned by IEEE to a
device vendor.
Max OAMPDU: Displays the maximum size of the OAMPDU.
Remote Loopback:
Displays whether the remote client supports remote loopback
function.
Unidirection: Displays whether the remote client supports unidirectional OAM
operation.
Link Monitoring: Displays whether the remote client supports link mon
itoring
function.
126
Variable Request: Displays whether the remote client supports variable request.
PDU Revision: Displays the TLV revision of the OAMPDU.
Vendor Information: Displays the vender information of the remote client.
8.2 Link Monitoring
On this page, you can configure the parameters about OAM link events, including the threshold
and the detection period. Also, you can choose whether to notify the link event.
Choose the menu Ethernet OAM→Link Monitoring→Link Monitoring to load the following
page.
Figure 8-6 Link Monitoring
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Link Monitoring Config
Link Event: Select one type of the link events to configure. Link events
include Symbol Period Error, Frame Error, Frame Period Error,
and Frame Seconds Error. For more details about link events,
please refer to OAM Link Events.
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
127
Threshold: Specify the threshold for the selected link event.
For Symbol Period Error, it is the number of error symbols in
the period that is required to be exceeded.
For Frame Error, it is the number of error frames in the period
(measured by 100ms) that is required to be exceeded.
For Frame Period Error, it is the number of error frames in the
period (measured by frames) that is required to be exceeded.
For
Frame Seconds Error, it is the number of error frame
seconds in the period that is required to be exceeded.
Window: Specify the detection period.
For Frame Period Error, the period is specified by a number of
received frames.
For other link events, the period is specified by a time interval.
Notify: Choose whether to notify the selected link event or not.
8.3 RFI
On this page, you can choose whether to notify the link faults like dying gasp and critical event.
Choose the menu Ethernet OAM→RFI→Remote Failure Indication to load the following page.
Figure 8-7 Remote Failure Indication
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Remote Failure Indication Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
128
Select: Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Dying Gasp Notify: Choose whether to notify the dying gasp or not.
Critical Event
Notify:
Choose whether to notify the critical event or not.
8.4 Remote Loopback
On this page, you can initiate remote loopback if the OAM connection is established and the local
client works in active mode. You can also choose to ignore or to process the received remote
loopback request.
Choose the menu Ethernet OAM→Remote Loopback→Remote Loopback to load the following
page.
Figure 8-8 Remote Loopback
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Remote Loopback Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Received Remote
Loopback:
Choose to ignore or to process the received remote loopback
request.
129
Remote Loopback: To start or stop the remote loopback.
8.5 Statistics
You can view the statistics about the detailed Ethernet OAM traffic information and event log
information of a specific port here.
8.5.1 Statistics
On this page, you can view the detailed Ethernet OAM traffic information of a specific port. The
device will recount the numbers every time you click the clear button or the device is rebooted.
Choose the menu Ethernet OAM→Statistics→Statistics to load the following page.
Figure 8-9 Statistics
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Statistics
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Tx: Displays the number of OAMPDUs that have been transmitted
on the port.
Rx: Displays the number of OAMPDUs that have been received on
the port.
Information
OAMPDUs:
Displays the number of information OAMPDUs that have been
transmitted or received on the port.
130
Unique Event
Notification
OAMPDUs:
Displays the number of unique event notification OAMPDUs that
have been transmitted or received on the port.
Duplicate Event
Notification
OAMPDUs:
Displays the number of duplicate event notification OAMPDUs
that have been transmitted or received on the port.
Variable Request
OAMPDUs:
Displays the number of variable request OAMPDUs that have
been transmitted or received on the port.
Variable Response
OAMPDUs:
Displays the number of variable response OAMPDUs that have
been transmitted or received on the port.
Loopback Control
OAMPDUs:
Displays the number of loopback control OAMPDUs that have
been transmitted or received on the port.
Organization
Specific OAMPDUs:
Displays the number of organization specific OAMPDUs that
have been transmitted or received on the port.
Unsupported
OAMPDUs:
Displays the number of unsupported OAMPDUs that have been
transmitted or received on the port.
Frames Lost Due To
OAM:
Displays the number of frames that would otherwise be
transmitted by the OAM sublayer, but did not due to an internal
OAM sublayer transmit error.
8.5.2 Event Log
On this page, you can view the detailed Ethernet OAM event log information of a specific port. The
device will recount the numbers every time you click the clear button or the device is rebooted.
Choose the menu Ethernet OAM→Statistics→Event Log to load the following page.
Figure 8-10 Event Log
131
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Event Log Statistics
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-select the corr
esponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Local: Displays the number of link events that have occurred on the
local link.
Remote: Displays the number of link events that have occurred on the
remote link.
Error Symbol Event:
Displays the number of error symbol period link events that have
occurred on the local link or remote link.
Error Frame Event:
Displays the number of error frame link events that have
occurred on the local link or remote link.
Error Frame Period
Event:
Displays the number of error frame period link events that have
occurred on the local link or remote link.
Error Frame
Seconds Event:
Displays the number of error frame seconds link events that have
occurred on the local link or remote link.
Dying Gasp: Displays the number of Dying Gasp link events that have
occurred on the local link or remote link.
Critical Event:
Displays the number of Critical Event link events that have
occurred on the local link or remote link.
Event Log Table
Type: Displays the type of the link event.
Location: Displays the location where the link event occurred.
Timestamp: Displays the time reference when the link event occurred.
Value: Displays the number of errors in the period.
Window: Displays the period of the link event.
Threshold: Displays the number of errors that is required to be exceeded in
order for the event to be generated.
Accumulated
Errors:
Displays the number of errors that have been detected since the
OAM sublayer was reset.
8.6 DLDP
DLDP Overview
DLDP (Device Link Detection Protocol) is a Layer 2 protocol that enables devices connected
through fiber or twisted-pair Ethernet cables to monitor the physical configuration of the cables and
detect whether a unidirectional link exists. When a unidirectional link appears, the local device can
receive packets from the peer device through the link layer, but the peer device cannot receive
packets from the local device. Unidirectional links can cause a variety of problems, such as
132
spanning-tree topology loops. Once detecting a unidirectional link, DLDP can shut down the
related port automatically or inform users.
DLDP Operation Mechanism
1. DLDP Link States
DLDP defines 6 link states for a device：Initial, Inactive, Active, Advertisement, Probe and Disable.
State Description
Initial DLDP is disabled.
Inactive DLDP is enabled but the link is down.
Active This state is temporary and it indicates that:
1. DLDP is enabled and the link is up.
2. The neighbor entries in this device are empty.
Advertisement This state indicates that no unidirectional link is detected, which includes two
kinds of situations:
1. This device establishes bidirectional links with all its neighbors.
2. DLDP remains in Active state for more than 5 seconds.
Probe A device enters this state from the Active state if it receives a packet from an
unknown neighbor. In this state, the device will send out Probe packets to
detect whether the link is unidirectional.
Disable This state indicates that a unidirectional link is detected.
Table 8-3 DLDP Link State
2. DLDP Work Process
The general DLDP work process chart is shown below:
Figure 8-11 DLDP Process
The process is illustrated below:
○
1EE AA: When DLDP is enabled on the link in down state, the DLDP link state will transit to Inactive.
AA○
2EE AA: When the DLDP-enabled link is up, the DLDP link state will transit to Active. The device will
send out Advertisement packets to the peer device with resynchronization tag in this state.
133
AA○
3EE AA: If the device doesn’t receive any DLDP packets within 5 seconds, the DLDP link state will
transit to Advertisement.
AA○
4EE AA: After receiving a packet from an unknown neighbor, the device’s link state will transit from
Active to Probe, and then send out several probe packets to detect the link state.
AA○
5EE AA: If the device receives echo packets from its peer device, the link state between them will be
tagged as bidirectionally linked and the DLDP state will transit from Probe to Advertisement. A
device in the Advertisement state will send advertisement packets.
AA○
6EE AA: If the device receives no echo packets after a specified period of time, the link will be tagged
as unidirectional and the DLDP state will transit from Probe to Disable. This port will be shut down
automatically or manually (depending on the Shut Mode configured).
The typical bidirectional link detection process is AA○
2EE AA→AA○
4EE AA→AA○
5EE AA, and the typical unidirectional link
detection process is AA○
2EE AA→AA○
4EE AA→AA○
6EE AA.
On the DLDP page, you can enable the DLDP state globally and configure the interval of the
advertisement packets and the port shutdown mode. You can also configure the refresh frequency
of the port states and reset the certain port’s DLDP state manually.
Choose the menu Ethernet OAM→ DLDP→ DLDP to load the following page.
134
Figure 8-12 DLDP Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
DLDP State: Enable/Disable the DLDP function globally.
Adver Interval: Config the interval to send advertisement packets, ranging from 1
to 30 seconds. The default value is 5 seconds.
Shut Mode: Once detecting a unidirectional link, the port can be shut down in
one of the following two modes:
• Auto: In this mode, DLDP generates logs and traps and shuts
down the corresponding port on detecting unidirectional links,
and the DLDP link state transits to Disable.
• Manual: In this mode, DLDP only generates logs and traps if it
detects unidirectional links, and the operation to shut down
the unidirectional link ports is accomplished by the
administrator.
135
Web Refresh State: Enable/Disable the web automatic refresh function.
Web Refresh
Interval:
Configure the interval to refresh the web page, ranging from 1 to
100 seconds, and the default value is 5 seconds.
Port Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port: Port list of the switch.
DLDP State: Enable/Disable DLDP on the selected port.
Protocol State: Displays the DLDP protocol state.
Link State: Displays the state of the links.
Neighbor State: Displays the state of the selected port’s neighbor.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Enable DLDP globally. Required. On the Ethernet OAM→DLDP→DLDP page,
configure DLDP State as Enable under the Global Config tab.
2
Enable
DLDP on the
specified port.
Required. On the Ethernet OAM→DLDP→DLDP page,
configure DLDP State as Enable on specified port in the Port
Config table.
3
Configure Shut Mode. Optional. On the Ethernet OAM→DLDP→DLDP page,
configure the Shut Mode as Auto or Manual under the Global
Config tab.
4
Reset DLDP state. Optional. On the Ethernet OAM→DLDP→DLDP page, select
the specified ports or select all the ports in the Port Config
table and click the Reset button to restore their state.
8.7 Application Example for DLDP
Network requirements
1. Device A and Device B are connected through two fiber pairs, which are cross-connected, as
shown in Figure 8-13.
2. The unidirectional link should be disconnected once being detected, and the ports shut down
by DLDP can be restored after the fiber pairs are correctly connected.
136
Network Diagram
Figure 8-13 DLDP Application Example
Configuration Procedure
Step Operation Description
1
Enable DLDP globally. Required. On the Ethernet OAM→DLDP→DLDP page,
configure DLDP State as enable under the Global Config
tab in device A and B.
2
Enable
DLDP on the
specified ports.
Required. On the Ethernet OAM→DLDP→DLDP page,
configure DLDP State as enable on Gigabit Ethernet ports
1/0/27 and 1/0/28 in the Port Config table in device A and
device B.
3
Configure Shut Mode. Required. On the Ethernet OAM→DLDP→DLDP page,
configure the Shut Mode as auto under the Global Config
tab in device A and B.
4
Check the ports’ state. Required. On the Ethernet OAM→DLDP→DLDP page,
select ports 1/0/27 and 1/0/28 in the Port Config table and
click the Reset button to bring them up.
The DLDP information of Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/27 and 1/0/28 is shown below:
137
After these four ports are correctly connected, select ports 1/0/27 and 1/0/28 in the Port Config
table and click the Reset button to restore their state from Disable.
138
Chapter 9 Multicast
Multicast Overview
In the network, packets are sent in three modes: unicast, broadcast and multicast. In unicast, the
source server sends separate copy information to each receiver. When a large number of users
require this information, the server must send many pieces of information with the same content to
the users. Therefore, large bandwidth will be occupied. In broadcast, the system transmits
information to all users in a network. Any user in the network can receive the information, no
matter the information is needed or not.
Point-to-multipoint multimedia business, such as video conferences and VoD (video-on-demand),
plays an important part in the information transmission field. Suppose a point to multi-point service
is required, unicast is suitable for networks with sparsely users, whereas broadcast is suitable for
networks with densely distributed users. When the number of users requiring this information is
not certain, unicast and broadcast deliver a low efficiency. Multicast solves this problem. It can
deliver a high efficiency to send data in the point to multi-point service, which can save large
bandwidth and reduce the network load. In multicast, the packets are transmitted in the following
way as shown in Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 Information transmission in the multicast mode
Features of multicast:
1. The number of receivers is not certain. Usually point-to-multipoint transmission is needed;
2. Multiple users receiving the same information form a multicast group. The multicast
information sender just need to send the information to the network device once;
3. Each user can join and leave the multicast group at any time;
4. Real time is highly demanded and certain packets drop is allowed.
139
IPv4 Multicast Address
1. IPv4 Multicast IP Address:
As specified by IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority), Class D IP addresses are used as
destination addresses of multicast packets. The multicast IP addresses range from
224.0.0.0~239.255.255.255. The following table displays the range and description of several
special multicast IP addresses.
Multicast IP address range Description
224.0.0.0～224.0.0.255
Reserved multicast addresses for routing protocols
and other network protocols
224.0.1.0～224.0.1.255 Addresses for video conferencing
239.0.0.0～239.255.255.255
Local management multicast addresses, which are
used in the local network only
Table 9-1 Range of the special multicast IP
2. IPv4 Multicast MAC Address:
When a unicast packet is transmitted in an Ethernet network, the destination MAC address is the
MAC address of the receiver. When a multicast packet is transmitted in an Ethernet network, the
destination is not a receiver but a group with uncertain number of members, so a multicast MAC
address, a logical MAC address, is needed to be used as the destination address.
As stipulated by IANA, the high-order 24 bits of a multicast MAC address begins with 01-00-5E
while the low-order 23 bits of a multicast MAC address are the low-order 23 bits of the multicast IP
address. The mapping relationship is described as Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2 Mapping relationship between multicast IPv4 address and multicast MAC address
The high-order 4 bits of the IP multicast address are 1110, identifying the multicast group. Only 23
bits of the remaining low-order 28 bits are mapped to a multicast MAC address. In that way, 5 bits
of the IP multicast address is not utilized. As a result, 32 IP multicast addresses are mapped to the
same MAC addresses.
140
IPv6 Multicast Address
1. IPv6 Multicast Address
An IPv6 multicast address is an identifier for a group of interfaces, and has the following format:
0XFF at the start of the address identifies the address as being a multicast address.
Flags have 4 bits:
(1) The high-order flag is reserved, and must be initialized to 0.
(2) R: Set to 0 to indicate this IPv6 multicast address does not contain an embedded RP
address; set to 1 to indicate this IPv6 multicast address contains an embedded RP address.
When this bit is set to 1, the P and T bits must also be set to 1.
(3) P: Set to 0 to indicate this IPv6 multicast address is not based on a unicast prefix; set to 1 to
indicate this IPv6 multicast address is based on a unicast prefix. When this bit is set to 1,
the T bit must also be set to 1.
(4) T: Set to 0 to indicate that this address is an IPv6 multicast address permanently assigned
by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA); set to 1 to indicate that this address is
a transient, or dynamically assigned IPv6 multicast address.
Scope is a 4-bit value used to limit the scope of the multicast group. The values are as follows:
Value Indication
0、3、F reserved
1 Interface-Local scope
2 Link-Local scope
4 Admin-Local scope
5 Site-Local scope
6、7、9～D unassigned
8 Organization-local scope
E Global scope
Table 9-2 Indications of the Scope
141
Group ID: 112 bits, IPv6 multicast group identifier that uniquely identifies an IPv6 multicast
group in the scope defined by the Scope field.
Reserved Multicast Addresses:
Address Indication
FF01::1 All interface-local IPv6 nodes
FF02::1 All link-local IPv6 nodes
FF01::2 All interface-local IPv6 routers
FF02::2 All link-local IPv6 routers
FF05::2 All site-local IPv6 routers
FF0X::
X ranges from 0 to F. These multicast addresses are
reserved and shall never be assigned to any multicast
group.
Table 9-3 Reserved IPv6 Multicast Addresses
The solicited-node multicast address is a multicast group that corresponds to an IPv6 unicast or
anycast address. It is usually used for obtaining the Layer 2 link-layer addresses of neighboring
nodes within the local-link or applied in IPv6 Duplicate Address Detection. A node is required to
join the associated Solicited-Node multicast addresses for all unicast and anycast addresses that
have been configured for the node's interfaces.
IPv6 Solicited-Node Multicast Address Format:
FF02:0:0:0:0:1:FFXX:XXXX
The IPv6 solicited-node multicast address has the prefix FF02:0:0:0:0:1:FF00:0000/104
concatenated with the 24 low-order bits of a corresponding IPv6 unicast or anycast address.
2. IPv6 Multicast MAC Address
The high-order 16 bits of an IPv6 multicast MAC address begins with 0x3333 while the low-order
32 bits of an IPv6 multicast MAC address are the low-order 32 bits of the IPv6 multicast IP address.
The mapping relationship is described as the following figure:
Figure 9-3 Mapping relationship between multicast IPv6 address and multicast IPv6 MAC address
142
The high-order 16 bits of the IP multicast address are 0x3333, identifying the IPv6 multicast group.
The low-order 32 bits of the IPv6 multicast IP address are mapped to the multicast MAC address.
Multicast Address Table
The switch is forwarding multicast packets based on the multicast address table. As the
transmission of multicast packets cannot span the VLAN, the first part of the multicast address
table is VLAN ID, based on which the received multicast packets are forwarded in the VLAN
owning the receiving port. The multicast address table is not mapped to an egress port but a group
port list. When forwarding a multicast packet, the switch looks up the multicast address table
based on the destination multicast address of the multicast packet. If the corresponding entry
cannot be found in the table, the switch will broadcast the packet in the VLAN owning the receiving
port. If the corresponding entry can be found in the table, it indicates that the destination address
should be a group port list, so the switch will deliver this multicast data to each port. The general
format of the multicast address table is described as Figure 9-4 below.
VLAN ID
Multicast IP
Port
Figure 9-4 Multicast Address Table
IGMP Snooping
In the network, the hosts apply to the near router for joining (leaving) a multicast group by sending
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) messages. When the up-stream device forwards
down the multicast data, the switch is responsible for sending them to the hosts. IGMP Snooping is
a multicast control mechanism, which can be used on the switch for dynamic registration of the
multicast group. The switch, running IGMP Snooping, manages and controls the multicast group via
listening to and processing the IGMP messages transmitted between the hosts and the multicast
router, thereby effectively prevents multicast groups being broadcasted in the network.
MLD Snooping
Multicast Listener Discovery(MLD)snooping is applied for efficient distribution of IPv6 multicast
data to clients and routers in a Layer 2 network. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is
selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all
ports in a VLAN. The list is constructed and maintained by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.
MLD snooping performs a similar function in IPv6 as IGMP snooping in IPv4.
The Multicast module is mainly for multicast management configuration of the switch, including
three submenus: IGMP Snooping, MLD Snooping and Multicast Table.
9.1 IGMP Snooping
IGMP Snooping Process
The switch, running IGMP Snooping, listens to the IGMP messages transmitted between the host
and the router, and tracks the IGMP messages and the registered port. When receiving IGMP
report message, the switch adds the port to the multicast address table; when the switch listens to
IGMP leave message from the host, the router sends the Group-Specific Query message of the
port to check if other hosts need this multicast, if yes, the router will receive IGMP report message;
if no, the router will receive no response from the hosts and the switch will remove the port from
the multicast address table. The router regularly sends IGMP query messages. After receiving the
IGMP query messages, the switch will remove the port from the multicast address table if the
switch receives no IGMP report message from the host within a period of time.
143
IGMP Messages
The switch, running IGMP Snooping, processes the IGMP messages of different types as follows.
1. IGMP Query Message
IGMP query message, sent by the router, falls into two types, IGMP general query message and
IGMP group-specific-query message. The router regularly sends IGMP general message to query
if the multicast groups contain any member. When receiving IGMP leave message, the receiving
port of the router will send IGMP group-specific-query message to the multicast group and the
switch will forward IGMP group-specific-query message to check if other members in the multicast
group of the port need this multicast.
When receiving IGMP general query message, the switch will forward them to all other ports in the
VLAN owning the receiving port. The receiving port will be processed: if the receiving port is not a
router port yet, it will be added to the router port list with its router port time specified; if the
receiving port is already a router port, its router port time will be directly reset.
When receiving IGMP group-specific-query message, the switch will send the group-specific query
message to the members of the multicast group being queried.
2. IGMP Report Message
IGMP report message is sent by the host when it applies for joining a multicast group or responses
to the IGMP query message from the router.
When receiving IGMP report message, the switch will send the report message via the router port
in the VLAN as well as analyze the message to get the address of the multicast group the host
applies for joining. The receiving port will be processed: if the receiving port is a new member port,
it will be added to the multicast address table with its member port time specified; if the receiving
port is already a member port, its member port time will be directly reset.
3. Member Leave Message
The host will send IGMP leave message when leaving a multicast group to inform the router of its
leaving.
When Immediate Leave is not enabled in a VLAN and a leave message is received on a port of
this VLAN, the switch will generate Multicast-Address-Specific Queries (MASQs) on this port to
check if there are other members in this multicast group. The user can control when a port
membership is removed for an existing address in terms of the number and interval of MASQs. If
there is no Report message received from this port during the switch maximum response time, the
port on which the MASQ was sent is deleted from the multicast group. If the deleted port is the last
member of the multicast group, the multicast group is also deleted. The switch will send leave
message to the router ports of the VLAN.
In IPv4，Layer 2 switches can use IGMP Snooping to limit the flooding of multicast traffic by
dynamically configuring Layer 2 interfaces so that IPv4 multicast data is selectively forwarded to a
list of ports that want to receive the data. This list is constructed by snooping IPv4 multicast control
packets.
IGMP Snooping Fundamentals
1. Ports
Router Port: Indicates the switch port directly connected to the multicast router.
Member Port: Indicates a switch port connected to a multicast group member.
144
2. Timers
Router Port Time: Within the time, if the switch does not receive IGMP query message from the
router port, it will consider this port is not a router port any more. The default value is 300 seconds.
Member Port Time: Within the time, if the switch does not receive IGMP report message from the
member port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more. The default value is 260
seconds.
Last Listener Query Interval: The interval between the switch sends out MASQs.
Last Listener Query Count: The number of MASQs that the switch sends before aging out a
multicast address when there is no IGMP report response.
The IGMP Snooping function can be implemented on the following pages: Snooping Config, Port
Config, VLAN Config, Multicast VLAN, Querier Config, Profile Config, Profile Binding,
Packet Statistics and IGMP Authentication.
9.1.1 Snooping Config
To configure the IGMP Snooping on the switch, please firstly configure IGMP global configuration
and related parameters on this page.
If the multicast address of the received multicast data is not in the multicast address table, the
switch will broadcast the data in the VLAN. When Unknown Multicast Discard feature is enabled,
the switch drops the received unknown multicast so as to save the bandwidth and enhance the
process efficiency of the system. Please configure this feature appropriate to your needs.
Choose the menu Multicast →IGMP Snooping →Snooping Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-5 Basic Config
145
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
IGMP Snooping: Select Enable/Disable IGMP Snooping funct
ion globally on the
switch.
Unknown Multicast:
Select the operation for the switch to process unknown multicast,
Forward or Discard.
Report Message
Suppression:
Enable or disable Report Message Suppression function globally.
If this function is enabled,
the first Report Message from the
listener will be forwarded
to the router ports while the subsequent
Report Message will be suppressed to reduce the IGMP packets.
Router Port Time: Specify the aging time of the router port. Withi
n this time, if the
switch does not
receive IGMP query message from the router port,
it will consider this port is not a router port any more.
Member Port Time: Specify the aging time of the member port. Withi
n this time, if the
switch does not receive IGMP report message from th
e member
port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more.
Last Listener Query
Interval:
Enter the interval between the switch sends out MASQs.
Last Listener Query
Count:
Enter t
he number of MASQs that the switch sends before aging
out a multicast address when there is no IGMP report response.
IGMP Snooping Status
Description: Displays IGMP Snooping status.
Member: Displays the member of the corresponding status.
146
9.1.2 Port Config
On this page you can enable or disable the IGMP Snooping and Fast Leave feature for ports of the
switch.
Choose the menu Multicast →IGMP Snooping →Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-6 Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Config
UNIT:1/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure the
link aggregation groups.
Select:
Select the desired port for IGMP Snooping feature configuration. It
is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port of the switch.
IGMP Snooping: Select Enable/Disable IGMP Snooping for the desired port.
Fast Leave:
Select Enable/Disable Fast Leave feature for the desired port. If
Fast Leave is enabled for a port, the switch
will immediately
remove this port from the multicast group upon receiving IGMP
leave messages.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
147
Note:
1. Fast Leave on the port is effective only when the host supports IGMPv2 or IGMPv3.
2. When both Fast Leave feature and Unknown Multicast Discard feature are enabled, the
leaving of a user connected to a port owning multi-user will result in the other users
intermitting the multicast business.
9.1.3 VLAN Config
Multicast groups established by IGMP Snooping are based on VLANs. On this page you can
configure different IGMP parameters for different VLANs.
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→VLAN Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-7 VLAN Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN Config
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID to enable IGMP Snooping for the desir
ed
VLAN.
Router Port Time:
Specify the aging time of the router port. Within this time, if the
switch doesn’
t receive IGMP query message from the router port,
it will consider this port is not a router port any more.
By default, it
is 0 and the global router-time will be used.
Member Port Time:
Specify the aging time of the member port. Within this time, if the
switch doesn’
t receive IGMP report message from the member
port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more.
By
default, it is 0 and the global member-time will be used.
148
Router Ports: Specify
the static router port which is mainly used in the network
with stable topology.
VLAN Table
Select: Select the desired VLAN ID for configuration. It is multi-optional.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID.
Router Port Time: Displays the router port time of the VLAN.
Member Port Time: Displays the member port time of the VLAN.
Static Router Ports: Displays the static router ports of the VLAN.
Dynamic Router
Ports:
Displays the dynamic router ports of the VLAN.
Forbidden Router
Ports:
Displays the forbidden router ports of the VLAN.
Note:
The settings here will be invalid when multicast VLAN is enabled.
Configuration procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Enable IGMP Snooping
function
Required. Enable IGMP Snooping globally on the switch
and for the port on Multicast→IGMP
Snooping→Snooping Config and Port Config page.
2
Configure the multicast
parameters for VLANs
Optional. Configure the multicast parameters for VLANs on
Multicast→IGMP Snooping→VLAN Config page.
If a VLAN has no multicast parameters configuration, it
indicates the IGMP Snooping is not enabled in the VLAN,
thus the multicast data in the VLAN will be broadcasted.
9.1.4 Multicast VLAN
In old multicast transmission mode, when users in different VLANs apply for join the same
multicast group, the multicast router will duplicate this multicast information and deliver each
VLAN owning a receiver one copy. This mode wastes a lot of bandwidth.
The problem above can be solved by configuring a multicast VLAN. By adding switch ports to the
multicast VLAN and enabling IGMP Snooping, you can make users in different VLANs share the
same multicast VLAN. This saves the bandwidth since multicast streams are transmitted only
within the multicast VLAN and also guarantees security because the multicast VLAN is isolated
from user VLANS.
Before configuring a multicast VLAN, you should firstly configure a VLAN as multicast VLAN and
add the corresponding ports to the VLAN on the 802.1Q VLAN page. If the multicast VLAN is
enabled, the multicast configuration for other VLANs on the VLAN Config page will be invalid, that
is, the multicast streams will be transmitted only within the multicast VLAN.
149
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Multicast VLAN to load the following page.
Figure 9-8 Multicast VLAN
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Multicast VLAN
Multicast VLAN: Select Enable/Disable Multicast VLAN feature.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN.
Router Port Time: Specify the aging time of the router po
rt. Within this time, if the
switch doesn’
t receive IGMP query message from the router port,
it will consider this port is not a router port any more.
Member Port Time:
Specify the aging time of the member port. Within this time, if the
switch doesn’t rec
eive IGMP report message from the member
port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more.
150
Replace Source IP: Specify the IP address with which the switch will replace
the
source of IGMP packets.
Dynamic Router
Ports:
Displays the dynamic router ports of the multicast VLAN.
Static Router Ports: Specify
the static router port which is mainly used in the network
with stable topology.
Forbidden Router
Ports:
Specify the forbidden router ports which is mainly used to forbid
ports becoming router ports.
Note:
1. The router port should be in the multicast VLAN, otherwise the member ports cannot receive
multicast streams.
2. The Multicast VLAN won't take effect unless you first complete the configuration for the
corresponding VLAN owning the port on the 802.1Q VLAN page.
3. Configure the link type of the router port in the multicast VLAN as Tagged otherwise all the
member ports in the multicast VLAN cannot receive multicast streams.
4. After a multicast VLAN is created, all the IGMP packets will be processed only within the
multicast VLAN.
Configuration procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Enable IGMP Snooping
function
Required. Enable IGMP Snooping globally on the switch
and for the port on Multicast→IGMP
Snooping→Snooping Config and Port Config page.
2 Create a multicast VLAN Required. Create a multicast VLAN and add all the member
ports and router ports to the VLAN on the VLAN→802.1Q
VLAN→VLAN Config page.
Configure the link type of the router ports as Tagged.
3
Configure parameters for
multicast VLAN
Optional. Enable and configure a multicast VLAN on the
Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Multicast VLAN page.
It is recommended to keep the default time parameters.
4 Look over the configuration
If it is successfully configured, the VLAN ID of the multicast
VLAN
will be displayed in the IGMP Snooping Status table
on the Multicast→IGMP Snooping→
Snooping Config
page.
Application Example for Multicast VLAN:
Network Requirements
Multicast source sends multicast streams via the router, and the streams are transmitted to user A
and user B through the switch.
Router: Its WAN port is connected to the multicast source; its LAN port is connected to the switch.
The multicast packets are transmitted in VLAN3.
151
Switch: Port 3 is connected to the router and the packets are transmitted in VLAN3; port 4 is
connected to user A and the packets are transmitted in VLAN4; port 5 is connected to user B and
the packets are transmitted in VLAN5.
User A: Connected to Port 4 of the switch.
User B: Connected to port 5 of the switch.
Configure a multicast VLAN, and user A and B receive multicast streams through the multicast
VLAN.
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Step Operation Description
1 Create VLANs
Create three VLANs with the VLAN ID 3, 4 and 5 respectively,
and specify the des
cription of VLAN3 as Multicast VLAN on
VLAN→802.1Q VLAN page.
2 Configure ports On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN function pages.
For port 3, configure its link type as Tagged, and add it to VLAN3,
VLAN4 and VLAN5.
For port 4, configure its link type as Untagged
, and add it to
VLAN3 and VLAN4.
For port 5, configure its link type as
Untagged, and add it to
VLAN3 and VLAN5.
3
Enable IGMP
Snooping function
Enable IGMP Snooping function globally on Multicast→IGMP
Snooping→Snooping Config
page. Enable IGMP Snooping
function for port 3, port4 and port 5 on Multicast→IGMP
Snooping→Port Config page.
4
Enable Multicast
VLAN
Enable Multicast VLAN, configure the VLAN ID of a multicast
VLAN as 3 and keep the other parameters as default on
Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Multicast VLAN page.
152
5 Check Multicast VLAN Port 3-5 and Multicast VLAN 3
will be displayed in the IGMP
Snooping Status table on the Multicast→IGMP
Snooping→Snooping Config page.
9.1.5 Querier Config
In an IP multicast network that runs IGMP, a Layer 3 multicast device works as an IGMP querier to
send IGMP queries and manage the multicast table. But IGMP is not supported by the devices in
Layer 2 network. IGMP Snooping Querier can act as an IGMP Router in Layer 2 network. It can
help to create and maintain multicast forwarding table on the switch with the Query messages it
generates.
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Querier Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-9 Querier Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
IGMP Snooping Querier Config
VLAN ID: Enter the ID of the VLAN that enables IGMP Snooping Querier.
Query Interval:
Enter the time interval of sending a general query frame by IGMP
Snooping Querier.
Max Response
Time:
Enter the maximal time for the host to respond to a general query
frame sent by IGMP Snooping Querier.
General Query
Source IP:
Enter the source IP of the general query frame sent by IGMP
Snooping Querier. It should not be a multicast IP or a broadcast IP.
IGMP Snooping Querier Table
Select: Select the desired entry. It is multi-optional.
VLAN ID: Displays t
he ID of the VLAN that enables IGMP Snooping Querier.
Query Interval: Displays the Query Interval of the IGMP Snooping Querier.
Max Response
Time:
Displays the maximal time for the host to respond to a general
query frame sent by IGMP Snooping Querier.
153
General Query
Source IP:
Displays the source IP of the general query frame sent by IGMP
Snooping Querier.
9.1.6 Profile Config
On this page you can configure an IGMP profile.
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Profile Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-10 Profile Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Profile Creation
Profile ID: Specify the Profile ID you want to creat
e, and it should be a
number between 1 and 999.
Mode: The attributes of the profile.
Permit
: Only permit the IP address within the IP range and
deny others.
Deny
: Only deny the IP address within the IP range and permit
others.
Search Option
Search Option: Select the rules for displaying profile entries.
All: Display all profile entries.
Profile ID: Display profile entry of the ID.
IGMP Profile Info
Select: Select the desired entry for configuration.
Profile ID: Displays the profile ID.
154
Mode:
Displays the attribute of the profile.
Permit
: Only permit the IP address within the IP range and
deny others.
Deny
: Only deny the IP address within the IP range and permit
others.
Bind Ports: Displays the ports that the Profile bound to.
Operation: Click the Edit button to configure the mode or IP-
range of the
Profile.
After you have created a profile ID, click Edit to display the following figure.
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Profile Mode
Profile ID: Displays the Profile ID you have created.
Mode: The attributes of the profile.
Permit
: Only permit the IP address within the IP range and
deny others.
Deny
: Only deny the IP address within the IP range and permit
others.
Add IP-range
Start IP: Enter start IP address of the IP-range.
End IP: Enter end IP address of the IP-range.
IP-range Table
Select: Select the desired entry for configuration.
Index: Displays index of the IP-range which is not configurable.
Start IP: Displays the start IP address of the IP-range.
End IP: Displays the end IP address of the IP-range.
155
9.1.7 Profile Binding
When the switch receives IGMP report message, it examines the profile ID bound to the access
port to determine if the port can join the multicast group. If the multicast IP is not filtered, the switch
will add the port to the forward port list of the multicast group. Otherwise, the switch will drop the
IGMP report message. In that way, you can control the multicast groups that users can access.
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Profile Binding to load the following page.
Figure 9-11 Profile Binding
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Profile and Max Group Binding
UNIT:1/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure the
link aggregation groups.
Select: Select the desired entry for configuration.
Port: It is multi-optional. Displays the port number.
Profile ID: The existing Profile ID bound to the selected port.
Max Group: The maximum multicast group a port can join.
156
Overflow Action:
The policy should be taken when the number of multicast group a
port has joined reach the maximum.
Drop: D
rop the successive report packet, and this port can not
join any other multicast group.
Replace:
When the number of the dynamic multicast groups
that a port joins has exceeded the max-
group, the newly joined
multicast group will replace an existing multicast group with the
lowest multicast group address.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Clear Binding: Click the ClearBinding
button to clear all profiles bound to the
port.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1 Create Profile
Required. Configure the Profile ID and mode on
Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Profile Config page.
2 Configure IP-Range Required. Click Edit
of the specified entry in the IGMP Profile
Info table on Multicast→IGMP Snooping→
Profile Config
page to configure the mode or IP-range of the Profile.
3 Configure Profile Binding
for ports
Optional. Configure Profile Binding for ports on
Multicast→IGPM Snooping→Porfile Binding page.
9.1.8 Packet Statistics
On this page you can view the multicast data traffic on each port of the switch, which facilitates you
to monitor the IGMP messages in the network.
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Packet Statistics to load the following page.
157
Figure 9-12 Packet Statistics
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh: Select Enable/Disable auto refresh feature.
Refresh Period:
Enter the time from 3 to 300 in seconds to specify the auto refresh
period.
IGMP Statistics
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Query Packet: Displays the number of query packets the port received.
Report Packet (V1): Displays the number of IGMPv1 report packets the port received.
Report Packet (V2): Displays the number of IGMPv2 report packets the port received.
Report Packet (V3): Displays the number of IGMPv3 report packets the port received.
Leave Packet: Displays the number of leave packets the port received.
Error Packet: Displays the number of error packets the port received.
158
9.1.9 IGMP Authentication
IGMP Authentication (Internet Group membership Authentication Protocol) is a multicast
authentication protocol used to authenticate who wants to join the limited multicast source. On this
page you can configure IGMP Authentication feature for port.
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→IGMP Authentication to load the following
page.
Figure 9-13 IGMP Authentication
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
Accounting: Enable/Disable the IGMP Authentication Account feature.
Port Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select:
Select the desired port for IGMP Authentication feature
configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
159
General Query
Source IP:
Enter the source IP of the general query frame sent by IGMP
Snooping Querier. It should not be a multicast IP or a broadcast IP.
IGMP
Authentication:
Select Enable/Disable IGMP Authentication for the desired port.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Note:
The IGMP Authentication feature will take effect only when AAA function is enabled and the
RADIUS server is configured. For how to enable AAA function and configure RADIUS server,
please refer to 13.11 AAA.
9.2 MLD Snooping
MLD Snooping
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping is applied for efficient distribution of IPv6 multicast
data to clients and routers in a Layer 2 network. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is
selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all
ports in a VLAN. The list is constructed and maintained by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.
MLD snooping performs a similar function in IPv6 as IGMP snooping in IPv4.
The switch, running MLD Snooping, listens to the MLD messages transmitted between the host
and the router, and tracks the MLD messages and the registered port. When receiving MLD report
message, the switch adds the port to the multicast address table; when the switch listens to MLD
Done message from the host, the router sends the Multicast-Address-Specific Query message of
the port to check if other hosts need this multicast, if yes, the switch will receive MLD report
message; if no, the switch will receive no response from the hosts and the switch will remove the
port from the multicast address table. The router regularly sends MLD query messages. After
receiving the MLD query messages, the switch will remove the port from the multicast address
table if the switch receives no MLD report message from the host within a period of time.
MLD Snooping Fundamentals
1. MLD Messages
MLD Queries
：
MLD Queries include General Queries and Multicast-Address-Specific Queries
(MASQs) and are sent out from the MLD router.
MLD Reports
：
When a host wants to join a multicast group or responds to the MLD queries, it will
send out an MLD report.
MLD Done Messages
：
When a host wants to leave a multicast group, it will send out an MLD
Done message to inform the IPv6 multicast routers of its leave.
2. Relevant Ports of the Switch
Router Port: Indicates the switch port that links toward the MLD router.
Member Port: Indicates the switch port that links toward the multicast members.
3. Timers
Router Port Aging Time: Within this time, if the switch does not receive MLD queries from the
router port, it will delete this port from the router port list. The default value is 300 seconds.
Member Port Aging Time: Within this time, if the switch does not receive MLD reports from the
member port, it will delete this port from the MLD multicast group. The default value is 260
seconds.
160
General Query Interval: The interval between the multicast router sends out general queries.
Last Listener Query Interval: The interval between the switch sends out MASQs.
Last Listener Query Count: The number of MASQs that the switch sends before aging out a
multicast address when there is no MLD report response.
MLD Snooping Process
1. General Query
The MLD router regularly sends MLD general queries to query if the multicast groups contain any
members. When receiving MLD general queries, the switch will forward them to all other ports in
the VLAN. The receiving port will be processed: if the receiving port is not a router port yet, it will
be added to the router port list with its router port aging time specified; if the receiving port is
already a router port, its router port aging time will be directly reset.
2. Membership Report
The host will send MLD report messages when it applies for joining a multicast group or responds
to the MLD query message from the router.
When receiving MLD report message, the switch will forward the report message via the router
port in the VLAN, and analyze the message to get the address of the multicast group the host
applies for joining. If the multicast group does not exist, it will create the group entry. The receiving
port will be processed: if the receiving port is a new member port, it will be added to the forward list
of the multicast group with its member port aging time specified; if the receiving port is already a
member port, its member port aging time will be directly reset.
3. Member Leave
The host will send MLD Done message when leaving a multicast group to inform the router of its
leaving.
When Immediate Leave is not enabled in a VLAN and a Done message is received on a port of
this VLAN, the switch will generate MASQs on this port to check if there are other members in this
multicast group. The user can control when a port membership is removed for an exiting address
in terms of the number and interval of MASQs. If there is no Report message received from this
port during the switch maximum response time, the port on which the MASQ was sent is deleted
from the multicast group. If the deleted port is the last member of the multicast group, the multicast
group is also deleted. The switch will send Done message to the router ports of the VLAN.
In IPv6，Layer 2 switches can use Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Snooping to limit the
flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring Layer 2 interfaces so that IPv6 multicast
data is selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data. This list is constructed
by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.
The MLD Snooping function can be implemented on Snooping Config, Port Config, VLAN
Config, Multicast VLAN, Querier Config, Profile Config, Profile Binding and Packet
Statistics pages.
9.2.1 Snooping Config
To configure the MLD Snooping on the switch, please firstly configure MLD global configuration
and related parameters on this page.
161
Chose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Snooping Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-14 Snooping Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
MLD Snooping: Enable or disable MLD Snooping function globally.
Unknown Multicast: Choose to forward or drop unknown multicast data.
Unknown IPv6 multicast packets refer to those packets without
corresponding forwarding entries in the IPv6 multicast table:
When unknown multicast filter is enabled, the switch
will discard
all received unknown IPv6 multicast packets;
When unknown multicast filer is disabled, all
unknown IPv6
multicast packets are flooded in the ingress VLAN.
Report Message
Suppression:
Enable or disable Report Message Suppression function globally.
If this function is enabled, the first Report Message from the
listener will forward to the router ports while the subsequent
Report Message from the group
will be suppressed to reduce the
MLD traffic in the network.
Router Port Time: Enter the glob
al router port aging time. If the router port does not
receive Query Message in the aging time, it will be aged.
Member Port Time:
Enter the global member port aging time. If the member port
does not receive Report Message in the aging time, it will be
aged.
162
Last Listener Query
Interval:
Enter the interval between the switch sends out MASQs.
Last Listener Query
Count:
Enter t
he number of MASQs that the switch sends before aging
out a multicast address when there is no MLD report response.
MLD Snooping Status
Description: Displays MLD Snooping status.
Member: Displays the member of the corresponding status.
Note:
1. Configurations of the Router Port Time and Member Port Time in 8.2.3 VLAN Config override
their global configurations here.
3. Before creating a Multicast VLAN, you should enable the MLD snooping function in this VLAN
in 8.2.3 VLAN Config.
Configuration Procedure of Multicast VLAN:
Step Operation Description
1
Create VLAN. Required. On the VLAN →802.1Q VLAN →VLAN Config
page, click the Create
button to create a VLAN. Enter the
VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN. Meanwhile,
specify its member ports.
2
Enable MLD Snooping
globally.
Required. On the Multicast →MLD Snooping →Global
Config page, enable the MLD Snooping function globally.
3
Enable MLD Snooping in the
VLAN.
Required. On the Multicast →MLD Snooping →VLAN
Config page, specify the VLAN ID as the VLAN created in
step 1.
4
Enable the Multicast VLAN. Required. On the Multicast →MLD Snooping →Multicast
page, enable the Multicast VLAN function and specify the
Multicast VLAN ID as the VLAN specified in Step 1.
163
9.2.2 Port Config
On this page you can configure MLD Snooping function with each single port.
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-15 Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Config
UNIT:1/LAGS Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS to
configure the link aggregation groups.
Select: Select the port you want to configure.
Port: Displays the port number.
MLD Snooping:
Select Enable/Disable MLD Snooping for the desired
port.
Fast Leave:
Select Enable/Disable Fast Leave feature for the
desired port. If Fast Leave is enabled for a port, the
s
witch will immediately remove this port from the
multicast group upon receiving MLD done messages.
LAG: Displays the LAG number.
164
9.2.3 VLAN Config
On this page you can configure MLD Snooping function with each single VLAN. You need to
create VLAN if you want to enable MLD Snooping function in this VLAN.
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→VLAN Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-16 VLAN Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN Config
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID you want to configure.
Router Port Time:
Specify the aging time of the router port. Within this time, if the
switch don't receive MLD query message from the router port, it
will consider this port is not a router port any more.
By default, it
is 0 and the global router-time will be used.
Member Port Time:
Specify the aging time of the member port. Within this time, if the
switch don't receive MLD report message from the member port,
it will consider this port is not a member port any more.
By
default, it is 0 and the global member-time will be used.
Static Router Ports:
Specify the static router port which is mainly used in the network
with stable topology.
Forbidden Router
Ports:
Specify the forbidden router ports which is mainly used to forbid
ports becoming router ports.
VLAN Table
Select: Select the VLAN ID you want to change.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID.
165
Router Port Time: Displays the router port time of this VLAN.
Member Port Time: Displays the member port time of this VLAN.
Static Router Ports: Displays the static router ports of this VLAN.
Dynamic Router
Ports
：
Displays the dynamic router ports of this VLAN.
Forbidden Router
Ports:
Displays the forbidden router ports of the VLAN.
Note:
1. The MLD snooping function in a VLAN will take effect when global MLD Snooping function is
enabled in 9.2.1 Snooping Config and the VLAN is created in Chapter 6 VLAN.
2. When the router port time or member port time is set for a VLAN, this value overrides the value
configured globally in 9.2.1 Snooping Config.
9.2.4 Multicast VLAN
In old multicast transmission mode, when users in different VLANs apply for join the same
multicast group, the multicast router will duplicate this multicast information and deliver each
VLAN owning a receiver one copy. This mode wastes a lot of bandwidth.
The problem above can be solved by configuring a multicast VLAN. By adding switch ports to the
multicast VLAN and enabling MLD Snooping, you can make users in different VLANs share the
same multicast VLAN. This saves the bandwidth since multicast streams are transmitted only
within the multicast VLAN and also guarantees security because the multicast VLAN is isolated
from user VLANS.
Before configuring a multicast VLAN, you should firstly configure a VLAN as multicast VLAN and
add the corresponding ports to the VLAN on the 802.1Q VLAN page. If the multicast VLAN is
enabled, the multicast configuration for other VLANs on the VLAN Config page will be invalid, that
is, the multicast streams will be transmitted only within the multicast VLAN.
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Multicast VLAN to load the following page.
166
Figure 9-17 Multicast VLAN Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Multicast VLAN
Multicast VLAN: Select Enable/Disable Multicast VLAN feature.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN.
Router Port Time:
Specify the aging time of the router port. Within this time, if the
switch doesn’
t receive IGMP query message from the router port,
it will consider this port is not a router port any more.
Member Port Time:
Specify the aging time of the member port. Within this time, if the
switch doesn’
t receive IGMP report message from the member
port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more.
Replace Source IP: Specify the IP address with
which the switch will replace the
source of MLD packets.
Dynamic Router
Ports:
Displays the dynamic router ports of the multicast VLAN.
Static Router Ports: Specify
the static router port which is mainly used in the network
with stable topology.
167
Forbidden Router
Ports:
Specify the forbidden router ports which is mainly used to forbid
ports becoming router ports.
Note:
1. The router port should be in the multicast VLAN, otherwise the member ports cannot receive
multicast streams.
2. The Multicast VLAN won't take effect unless you first complete the configuration for the
corresponding VLAN owning the port on the 802.1Q VLAN page.
3. Configure the link type of the router port in the multicast VLAN as Tagged otherwise all the
member ports in the multicast VLAN cannot receive multicast streams.
4. After a multicast VLAN is created, all the MLD packets will be processed only within the
multicast VLAN.
9.2.5 Querier Config
In an IPv6 multicast network that runs MLD, a Layer 3 multicast device works as an MLD querier to
send out MLD queries and manage the multicast table. But MLD is not supported by the devices in
Layer 2 network. MLD Snooping Querier can act as an MLD Router in Layer 2 network. It can help
to create and maintain multicast forwarding table on the switch with the Query messages it
generates.
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Querier Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-18 Querier Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
MLD Snooping Querier Config
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID which you want to start Querier.
Query Interval:
Enter the Query message interval time. The Querier
will send General Query Message within this interval.
Max Response Time:
Enter the value of Maximum Response Time of the
Query message.
General Query
Source IP:
Enter the Query Message source IP address.
It is
FE80::02FF:FFFF:FE00:0001 by default.
MLD Snooping Querier List
168
Select: Select the Querier you want to change.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID.
Query Interval: Displays the Query message interval time.
Max Response Time: Displays the value of Maximum Response Time of the
Query message.
General Query
Source IP:
Displays the Query message source IP address.
Note:
The MLD Snooping Querier doesn’t participate in the MLD Querier Election, but an MLD Snooping
Querier will affect the MLD Querier Election in the IPv6 network running MLD because of its
relatively smaller IP address.
9.2.6 Profile Config
On this page you can configure an MLD profile.
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Profile Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-19 Profile Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Profile Creation
Profile ID: Specify the Profile ID you want to create, and it should
range from 1 to 999.
Mode: The attributes of the profile.
Permit:
Only permit the IP address within the IP
range and deny others.
Deny:
Only deny the IP address within the IP
range and permit others.
Search Option
Search Option: Select the rules for displaying profile entries.
169
All: Display all profile entries.
Profile ID: Display profile entry of the ID.
MLD Profile Info
Select: Select the profile entries you want to config.
Profile ID: Displays the profile ID.
Mode: Displays the attribute of the profile.
Permit:
Only permit the IP address within the IP
range and deny others.
Deny:
Only deny the IP address within the IP
range and permit others.
Bind Ports: Displays the ports that the profile bound to.
Operation: Click the Edit
button to configure the mode or
IP-range of the Profile.
After you have created a profile ID, click Edit to display the following figure.
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Profile Mode
Profile ID: Displays the Profile ID you have created.
Mode: Displays the attribute of the profile.
Permit
: Only permit the IP address within the IP range and
deny others.
Deny
: Only deny the IP address within the IP range and permit
others.
Add IP-range
Start IP: Enter start IP address of the IP-range.
End IP: Enter end IP address of the IP-range.
170
IP-range Table
Select: Select the desired entry for configuration.
Index: Displays index of the IP-range which is not configurable.
Start IP: Displays the start IP address of the IP-range.
End IP: Displays the end IP address of the IP-range.
9.2.7 Profile Binding
When the switch receives MLD report message, it examines the profile ID bound to the access
port to determine if the port can join the multicast group. If the multicast IP is not filtered, the switch
will add the port to the forward port list of the multicast group. Otherwise, the switch will drop the
MLD report message. In that way, you can control the multicast groups that users can access.
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Profile Binding to load the following page.
Figure 9-20 Profile Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Profile and Max Group Binding
UNIT:1/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS to
configure the link aggregation groups.
Select:
Select the desired port for multicast filtering. It is
multi-optional.
171
Port: The port to be bound.
Profile ID: The existing Profile ID bound to the selected port.
Max Group: T
he maximum multicast group a port can join, range
from 0 to 1000.
Overflow Action:
The policy should be taken when the number of
multicast group a port has joined reach the maximum.
Drop: Drop the successive r
eport packet, and this
port cannot join any other multicast group.
Replace: When the number of the dynamic multicast
groups that a port joins has exceeded the max-group,
the newly joined multicast group will replace an
existing multicast group with the lowest multicast
group address.
LAG: The LAG number which the port belongs to.
Clear Binding: Click the Clear Binding button to clear all profiles bound
to the port.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1 Create Profile
Required. Configure the Profile ID and mode on
Multicast→MLD Snooping→Profile Config page.
2 Configure IP-Range Required. Click Edit
of the specified entry in the IGMP Profile
Info table on Multicast→MLD Snooping→
Profile Config
page to configure the mode or IP-range of the Profile.
3 Configure Profile Binding
for ports
Optional. Configure Profile Binding for ports on
Multicast→MLD Snooping→Porfile Binding page.
9.2.8 Packet Statistics
On this page you can view the MLD packets the switch received. It helps you to monitor the MLD
Snooping function.
172
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Packet Statistics to load the following page.
Figure 9-21 Packet Statistics
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Fresh
Auto Fresh: Select Enable/Disable auto fresh feature.
Fresh Period:
Enter the time from 3 to 300 seconds to specify the
auto fresh period.
MLD Statistics
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Query Packet:
Displays the number of query packets the port
received.
Report Packet (V1): Displays
the number of query packets the port
received.
Report Packet (V2): Displays the number of MLDv2 report packets the port
received.
Done Packet:
Displays the number of leave packets the port
received.
173
Error Packet: Displays the number of error packets th
e port
received.
9.3 Multicast Table
In a network, receivers can join different multicast groups appropriate to their needs. The switch
forwards multicast streams based on IPv4/IPv6 multicast address table.
The Multicast Table function is implemented on the IPv4 Multicast Table, Static IPv4 Multicast
Table, IPv6 Multicast Table and Static IPv6 Multicast Table pages.
9.3.1 IPv4 Multicast Table
On this page you can view the information of the multicast groups already on the switch. Multicast
IP addresses range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The range for receivers to join is from
224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Choose the menu Multicast→Multicast Table→IPv4 Multicast Table to load the following page.
Figure 9-22 IPv4 Multicast Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
Search Option: Select the rule for displaying multicast IP table.
All: Displays all multicast IP entries.
Multicast IP:
Enter the multicast IP address the
desired entry must carry.
VLAN ID:
Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must
carry.
Forward Port: Enter the port number the desired entry
must carry.
Multicast IP Table
Multicast IP: Displays multicast IP address.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group.
Forward Port: Displays the forward port of the multicast group.
Type: Displays the type of the multicast IP.
9.3.2 Static IPv4 Multicast Table
On this page you can configure the static IPv4 multicast table.
Choose the menu Multicast→Multicast Table→Static IPv4 Multicast Table to load the following
page.
174
Figure 9-23 Static IPv4 Multicast Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Static Multicast
Multicast IP: Enter the multicast IP address t
he desired entry must
carry.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry.
Forward Port: Enter the forward ports.
Search Option
Search Option: Select the rule for displaying multicast IP table.
All: Displays all static multicast IP entries.
Multicast IP:
Enter the multicast IP address the
desired entry must carry.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must
carry.
Forward Port:
Enter the port number the desired
entry must carry.
Static Multicast Table
Select: Select the static mul
ticast group entries you want to
configure.
Multicast IP: Displays multicast IP address.
175
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group.
Forward Port: Displays the forward port of the multicast group.
9.3.3 IPv6 Multicast Table
This page displays the IPv6 multicast groups which are already on the switch.
Choose the menu Multicast→Multicast Table→IPv6 Multicast Table to load the following page.
Figure 9-24 IPv6 Multicast Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
Search Option: Select the rules for displaying multicast IP table.
All: Displays all multicast IP entries.
Multicast IP:
Enter the multicast IP address the
desired entry must carry.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must
carry.
Forward Port:
Enter the port number the desired
entry must carry.
Multicast IP Table
Multicast IP: Displays the multicast IP.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID.
Forward Ports: Displays the forward ports of the group.
9.3.4 Static IPv6 Multicast Table
On this page you can configure the static IPv6 multicast table.
Choose the menu Multicast→Multicast Table→Static IPv6 Multicast Table to load the following
page.
176
Figure 9-25 IPv6 Multicast Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Static Multicast
Multicast IP:
Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must
carry.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry.
Forward Port: Enter the forward ports.
Search Option
Search Option: Select the rule for displaying multicast IP table.
All: Displays all static multicast IP entries.
Multicast IP:
Enter the multicast IP address the
desired entry must carry.
VLAN ID:
Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must
carry.
Forward Port:
Enter the port number the desired
entry must carry.
Static Multicast Table
Select:
Select the static multicast group entries you want to
configure.
Multicast IP: Displays multicast IP address.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group.
Forward Port: Displays the forward port of the multicast group.
Note:
177
Chapter 10 Routing
Routing is the method by which the host or gateway decides where to send the datagram. Routing
is the task of finding a path from a sender to a desired destination. It may be able to send the
datagram directly to the destination, if that destination is on one of the networks that are directly
connected to the host or gateway. However, what if the destination is not directly reachable? The
host or gateway will attempt to send the datagram to a gateway that is nearer to the destination.
The goal of a routing protocol is very simple: It is to supply the information that is needed to do
routing.
The Routing module is mainly for routing management configuration of the switch, including the
following submenus: Interface, Routing Table, Static Routing, DHCP Server, DHCP Relay and
ARP.
10.1 Interface
Interface is a virtual interface in Layer 3 mode and mainly used for realizing the Layer 3
connectivity between VLANs or routed ports. Each VLAN interface is corresponding to one VLAN.
Each routed port is corresponding to one port. Each Layer 3 port-channel is corresponding to one
port channel. Loopback Interface is purely software implemented. Interface has its own IP address
and subnet mask to identify the subnet it belongs to, and it works as the gateway of the subnet to
forward Layer 3 IP packets.
Introduction of IPv6 Address
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), also called IPng (IP next generation), was developed by the
IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) as the successor to IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4).
Compared with IPv4, IPv6 increases the IP address size from 32 bits to 128 bits; this solves the
IPv4 address exhaustion problem.
IPv6 features
IPv6 has the following features:
1. Adequate address space: The source and destination IPv6 addresses are both 128 bits (16
bytes) long. IPv6 can provide 3.4 x 1038 addresses to completely meet the requirements of
hierarchical address division as well as allocation of public and private addresses.
2. Header format simplification: IPv6 cuts down some IPv4 header fields or move them to IPv6
extension headers to reduce the load of basic IPv6 headers, thus making IPv6 packet handling
simple and improving the forwarding efficiency. Although the IPv6 address size is four times
that of IPv4 addresses, the size of basic IPv6 headers is 40 bytes and is only twice that of IPv4
headers (excluding the Options field).
3. Flexible extension headers: IPv6 cancels the Options field in IPv4 packets but introduces
multiple extension headers. In this way, IPv6 enhances the flexibility greatly to provide
scalability for IP while improving the handling efficiency. The Options field in IPv4 packets
contains 40 bytes at most, while the size of IPv6 extension headers is restricted by that of IPv6
packets.
4. Built-in security: IPv6 uses IPSec as its standard extension header to provide end-to-end
security. This feature provides a standard for network security solutions and improves the
interoperability between different IPv6 applications.
179
5. Automatic address configuration: To simplify the host configuration, IPv6 supports stateful
and stateless address configuration.
Stateful address configuration means that a host acquires an IPv6 address and related
information from a server (for example, DHCP server).
Stateless address configuration means that a host automatically configures an IPv6
address and related information on basis of its own link-layer address and the prefix
information advertised by a router.
In addition, a host can generate a link-local address on basis of its own link-layer address and
the default prefix (FE80::/64) to communicate with other hosts on the link.
6. Enhanced neighbor discovery mechanism: The IPv6 neighbor discovery protocol is a
group of Internet control message protocol version 6 (ICMPv6) messages that manages the
information exchange between neighbor nodes on the same link. The group of ICMPv6
messages takes the place of Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) message, Internet Control
Message Protocol version 4 (ICMPv4) router discovery message, and ICMPv4 redirection
message to provide a series of other functions.
Introduction to IPv6 address
1. IPv6 address format
An IPv6 address is represented as a series of 16-bit hexadecimals, separated by colons (:).
An IPv6 address is divided into eight groups, and the 16 bits of each group are represented by
four hexadecimal numbers which are separated by colons, for example,
2001:0d02:0000:0000:0014: 0000:0000:0095. The hexadecimal letters in IPv6 addresses are
not case-sensitive.
To simplify the representation of IPv6 addresses, zeros in IPv6 addresses can be handled as
follows:
Leading zeros in each group can be removed. For example, the above-mentioned address
can be represented in shorter format as 2001:d02:0:0:14:0:0:95.
Two colons (::) may be used to compress successive hexadecimal fields of zeros at the
beginning, middle, or end of an IPv6 address. For example, the above-mentioned address
can be represented in the shortest format as 2001:d02::14:0:0:95.
Note:
Two colons (::) can be used only once in an IPv6 address, usually to represent the longest
successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. If two colons are used more than once, the device is
unable to determine how many zeros double-colons represent when converting them to zeros to
restore a 128-bit IPv6 address.
An IPv6 address consists of two parts: address prefix and interface ID. The address prefix and
the interface ID are respectively equivalent to the network ID and the host ID in an IPv4
address.
180
An IPv6 address prefix is represented in "IPv6 address/prefix length" format, where "IPv6
address" is an IPv6 address in any of the above-mentioned formats and "prefix length" is a
decimal number indicating how many leftmost bits from the preceding IPv6 address are used
as the address prefix.
2. IPv6 address classification
IPv6 addresses fall into three types: unicast address, multicast address, and anycast address.
Unicast address: An identifier for a single interface, on a single node. A packet that is sent
to a unicast address is delivered to the interface identified by that address.
Multicast address: An identifier for a set of interfaces (typically belonging to different nodes),
similar to an IPv4 multicast address. A packet sent to a multicast address is delivered to all
interfaces identified by that address. There are no broadcast addresses in IPv6. Their
function is superseded by multicast addresses.
Anycast address: An identifier for a set of interfaces (typically belonging to different nodes).
A packet sent to an anycast address is delivered to one of the interfaces identified by that
address (the nearest one, according to the routing protocols’ measure of distance).
The type of an IPv6 address is designated by the first several bits called format prefix. The
following table lists the mappings between address types and format prefixes.
Type Format Prefix (binary) IPv6 Prefix ID
Unicast
address
Unassigned address 00…0 (128 bits) ::/128
Loopback address 00…1 (128 bits) ::1/128
Link-local address 1111111010 FE80::/10
Site-local address 1111111011 FEC0::/10
Global unicast address
(currently assigned) 001 2xxx::/4 or 3xxx::/4
Reserved type
(to be assigned in future) Other formats
Multicast address 11111111 FF00::/8
Anycast address
Anycast addresses are taken from unicast
address space and are not syntactically
distinguishable from unicast addresses.
Table 10-1 Mappings between address types and format prefixes
3. IPv6 Unicast Address：
181
IPv6 unicast address is an identifier for a single interface. It consists of a subnet prefix and an
interface ID.
Subnet Prefix: This section is allocated by the IANA (The Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority), the ISP (Internet Service Provider) or the organizations.
Interface ID: An interface ID is used to identify interfaces on a link. The interface ID must be
unique to the link.
There are several ways to form interface IDs. The IPv6 addresses with format prefixes 001
through 111, except for multicast addresses (1111 1111), are all required to have 64-bit
interface IDs in EUI-64 format.
For all IEEE 802 interface types (for example, Ethernet and FDDI interfaces), Interface IDs in
the modified EUI-64 format are constructed in the following way:
The first three octets (24 bits) are taken from the Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) of the
48-bit link-layer address (the MAC address) of the interface, the fourth and fifth octets (16 bits)
are a fixed hexadecimal value of FFFE, and the last three octets (24 bits) are taken from the
last three octets of the MAC address. The construction of the interface ID is completed by
setting the universal/local (U/L) bit--the seventh bit of the first octet--to a value of 0 or 1. A
value of 0 indicates a locally administered identifier; a value of 1 indicates a globally unique
IPv6 interface identifier.
Tak e MAC address 0012:0B0A:2D51 as an example. Insert FFFE to the middle of the address
to get 0012:0BFF:FE0A:2D51. Then set the U/L bit to 1 to obtain an interface ID in EUI-64
format as 0212:0BFF:FE0A:2D51.
IPv6 unicast address can be classified into several types, as shown in Table 10-1. The two
most common types are introduced below:
Global unicast address
A Global unicast address is an IPv6 unicast address that is globally unique and is routable on
the global Internet.
Global unicast addresses are defined by a global routing prefix, a subnet ID, and an interface
ID. The IPv6 global unicast address starts with binary value 001 (2000::/3). The global routing
prefix is a value assigned to a site (a cluster of subnets/links) by IANA. The subnet ID is an
identifier of a subnet within the site.
The figure below shows the structure of a global unicast address.
Figure 10-1 Global Unicast Address Format
182
Link-local address
A link-local address is an IPv6 unicast address that can be automatically configured on any
interface using the link-local prefix FE80::/10 (1111 1110 10) and the interface identifier in the
modified EUI-64 format. Link-local addresses are used in the neighbor discovery protocol and
the stateless autoconfiguration process. Nodes on a local link can use link-local addresses to
communicate. The figure below shows the structure of a link-local address.
Figure 10-2 Link-local Address Format
IPv6 devices must not forward packets that have link-local source or destination addresses to
other links.
Note:
You can configure multiple IPv6 addresses per interface, but only one link-local address.
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery
The IPv6 neighbor discovery process uses ICMP messages and solicited-node multicast
addresses to determine the link-layer address of a neighbor on the same network (local link),
verify the reachability of a neighbor, and track neighboring devices.
1. IPv6 Neighbor Solicitation Message and Neighbor Advertisement Message
A value of 135 in the Type field of the ICMP packet header identifies a neighbor solicitation
(NS) message. Neighbor solicitation messages are sent on the local link when a node wants
to determine the link-layer address of another node on the same local link.
After receiving the neighbor solicitation message, the destination node replies by sending a
neighbor advertisement (NA) message, which has a value of 136 in the Type field of the ICMP
packet header, on the local link. After the source node receives the neighbor advertisement,
the source node and destination node can communicate.
Neighbor advertisement messages are also sent when there is a change in the link-layer
address of a node on a local link.
Address Resolution
The address resolution procedure is as follows:
Node A multicasts an NS message. The source address of the NS message is the IPv6
address of an interface of node A and the destination address is the solicited-node multicast
address of node B. The NS message contains the link-layer address of node A.
183
After receiving the NS message, node B judges whether the destination address of the
packet corresponds to the solicited-node multicast address. If yes, node B can learn the
link-layer address of node A, and unicasts an NA message containing its link-layer address.
Node A acquires the link-layer address of node B from the NA message.
Neighbor Reachability Detection
After node A acquires the link-layer address of its neighbor node B, node A can verify whether
node B is reachable according to NS and NA messages.
Node A sends an NS message whose destination address is the IPv6 address of node B.
If node A receives an NA message from node B, node A considers that node B is reachable.
Otherwise, node B is unreachable.
Duplicate Address Detection
Neighbor solicitation messages are used in the stateless autoconfiguration process to verify
the uniqueness of unicast IPv6 addresses before the addresses are assigned to an interface.
After node A acquires an IPv6 address, it will perform duplicate address detection (DAD) to
determine whether the address is being used by other nodes (similar to the gratuitous ARP
function of IPv4). DAD is accomplished through NS and NA messages. The DAD procedure is
as follows:
Node A sends an NS message whose source address is the unassigned address :: and
destination address is the corresponding solicited-node multicast address of the IPv6
address to be detected. The NS message contains the IPv6 address.
If node B uses this IPv6 address, node B returns an NA message. The NA message
contains the IPv6 address of node B.
Node A learns that the IPv6 address is being used by node B after receiving the NA
message from node B. Otherwise, node B is not using the IPv6 address and node A can
use it.
2. IPv6 Router Advertisement Message
Router advertisement (RA) messages, which have a value of 134 in the Type field of the ICMP
packet header, are periodically sent out each configured interface of an IPv6 router.
RA messages typically include the following information:
One or more onlink IPv6 prefixes that nodes on the local link can use to automatically
configure their IPv6 addresses.
Lifetime information for each prefix included in the advertisement.
Sets of flags that indicate the type of autoconfiguration (stateless or stateful) that can be
completed.
184
Default router information (whether the device sending the advertisement should be used
as a default router and, if so, the amount of time, in seconds, the device should be used as
a default router).
Additional information for hosts, such as the hop limit and maximum transmission unit (MTU)
a host should use in packets that it originates.
RAs are also sent in response to device solicitation messages. Device solicitation messages,
which have a value of 133 in the Type field of the ICMP packet header, are sent by hosts at
system startup or anytime needed so that the host can immediately autoconfigure without
needing to wait for the next scheduled RA message.
Hosts discover and select default devices by listening to Router Advertisements (RAs).
Stateless address autoconfiguration means that the node automatically configures an IPv6
address and other information for its interface according to the address prefix and other
configuration parameters in the received RA messages.
3. IPv6 Neighbor Redirect Message
A value of 137 in the type field of the ICMP packet header identifies an IPv6 neighbor redirect
message. Devices send neighbor redirect messages to inform hosts of better first-hop nodes
on the path to a destination.
A device will send an IPv6 ICMP redirect message when the following conditions are satisfied:
The receiving interface is the forwarding interface.
The selected route itself is not created or modified by an IPv6 ICMP redirect message.
The selected route is not the default route.
The forwarded IPv6 packet does not contain any routing header.
You can configure the system’s Layer 3 interfaces on this page.
Choose the menu Routing→Interface→Interface Config to load the following page.
Figure 10-3 Interface Config
185
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Interface
Interface ID: Enter the ID of the interface corresponding to VLAN interface
,
loopback interface, routed port or port channel.
IP Address Mode: Specify IP Address allocation mode.
None: without ip.
Static: setup manually.
DHCP: allocated through DHCP.
BOOTP: allocated through BOOTP.
IP Address: Specify the IP address of the interface.
Subnet Mask: Specify the subnet mask of the interface's IP address.
Admin Status: Specify interface administrator status. Choose Disable to disable
the interface's Layer 3 capabilities.
Interface Name: Specify the name of the network interface.
Interface List
Select : Select the interfaces to modify or delete.
ID: Displays the ID of the interface.
Mode: Display IP address allocation mode.
None: without ip.
Static: setup manually.
DHCP: allocated through DHCP.
BOOTP: allocated through BOOTP.
IP Address: Displays the IP address of the interface.
Subnet Mask: Displays the subnet mask of the interface.
Interface Name: Displays the name of the interface.
Status: Displays interfa
ce current working status. Working status is up
when admin status is enabled
, line protocol is up and IP Address
is set.
Operation: You can configure the interface by clicking the Edit
, or check
Detail information by clicking Detail.
186
For IPv4 interface
Click Edit to display the following figure:
Figure 10-4 IPv4 Interface Config
Modify Interface
Interface ID:
Display the ID of the interface corresponding to the VLAN
interface, loopback interface, routed port or port channel.
IP Address Mode: View and modify the IP address allocation mode.
None: without ip.
Static: setup manually.
DHCP: allocated through DHCP.
BOOTP: allocated through BOOTP.
IP Address: View and modify the IP address of the interface.
Subnet Mask: View and modify the subnet mask of the interface.
Admin Status: View and modify the Admin status. Choose Disable
to disable
the interface's Layer 3 capabilities.
Interface Name: View and modify the interface name.
Secondary IP Create
IP Address: Specify the secondary IP address of the interface.
Subnet Mask: Specify the subnet mask of the interface's secondary IP address.
Secondary IP List
Select: Select the secondary IP.
IP Address: Displays the secondary IP address of the current interface.
187
Subnet Mask: Displays the subnet mask of the secondary IP address.
For IPv6 interface
Click Edit to display the following figure:
Figure 10-5 System IPv6
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
IPv6:
Interface ID:
Enable/Disable IPv6 function globally on the switch.
Choose the interface type and input the interface ID.
Interface
types include VLAN, routed port and port channel.
Link-local Address Config
Config Mode: Select the link-local address configuration mode.
Manual:
When this option is selected, you should assign a
link-local address manually.
Auto: When this option is selected,
the switch will generate a
link-local address automatically.
Link-local Address: Enter a link-local address.
188
Status: Displays the status of the link-local address.
Normal: Indicates that the link-local address is normal.
Try: Indicates that the link-
local address may be newly
configured.
Repeat: Indicates that the link-local address is duplicate
. It is
illegal to access the switch using the IPv6 address (including
link-local and global address).
Global Address Autoconfig via RA Message
Enable global
address auto
configuration via RA
message:
When this option is enabled, the switch automatically
configures a
global address and other information according to the address
prefix and other configuration parameters from the received RA
(Router Advertisement) message.
Global Address Autoconfig via DHCPv6 Server
Enable Global
Address Autoconfig
via DHCPv6 Server:
When this option is enabled, the system will try to obtain the global
address from the DHCPv6 Server.
Add a global address manually
Address Format:
You can select the global address format according to your
requirements.
EUI-64: Indicates that
you only need to specify an address
prefix, and then the system will create a global address
automatically.
Not EUI-64:
Indicates that you have to specify an intact global
address.
Global Address: When selecting the mode of EUI-64, please input the addres
s
prefix here, otherwise, please input an intact IPv6 address here.
Global address Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete or modify the corresponding
global address.
Global Address: Modify the global address.
Prefix Length: Modify the prefix length of the global address.
Type: Displays the configuration mode of the global address.
Manual:
Indicates that the corresponding address is
configured manually.
Auto:
Indicates that the corresponding address is created
automatically using the RA message
or obtained from the
DHCPv6 Server.
Preferred
Lifetime/Valid
Lifetime:
Displays the preferred time and valid time of the global address.
189
Status: Displays the status of the global address.
Normal: Indicates that the global address is normal.
Try: Indicat
es that the global address may be newly
configured.
Repeat:
Indicates that the corresponding address is duplicate.
It is illegal to access the switch using this address.
Tips:
After adding a global IPv6 address to your switch manually here, you can configure your PC’s
global IPv6 address in the same subnet with the switch and login to the switch via its global IPv6
address.
Click Detail to display the following figure:
Figure 10-6 The Interface’s Detail Information
Detail Information
Interface ID: Displays the ID of the interface, including VLAN interface
,
loopback interface, routed port and port channel.
IP Address Mode: Displays the IP address allocation mode.
None: without ip.
Static: setup manually.
DHCP: allocated through DHCP.
BOOTP: allocated through BOOTP.
IP Address: Displays the IP address and subnet mask of the interface.
Secondary IP: Displays Secondary IP Address and subnet mask.
Interface Status: Displays the interface current working sta
tus, which is up when
Admin Status is enable, line protocol is up and IP address is set.
Line Protocol
Status:
Displays the line protocol status, which is up if any up-
link port is
connected to the interface.
190
Admin Status: Displays the Admin status. Choose Disable
to disable the
interface's Layer 3 capabilities.
Interface Name: Displays the name of the interface.
Interface Setting Detail Information
Displays the detailed setting information of the interface.
10.2 Routing Table
This page displays the routing information summary generated by different routing protocols.
10.2.1 IPv4 Routing Table
Choose the menu Routing→Routing Table→IPv4 Routing Table to load the following page.
Figure 10-7 Routing Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Routing Information Summary
10.2.2 IPv6 Routing Table
Choose the menu Routing→Routing Table→IPv6 Routing Table to load the following page.
Figure 10-8 IPv6 Routing Table
Protocol Displays the protocol of the route.
Destination/Mask:
Displays the destination and subnet of the route.
Next Hop: Displays the IP address to which the packet should be sent next.
Distance: Displays the management distance of the ro
ute. The smaller the
distance, the higher the priority.
Metric: Displays the metric of the route.
Interface name: Displays the description of the egress interface.
191
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
IPv6 Routing Information Summary
10.3 Static Routing
Static routes are special routes manually configured by the administrator and cannot change
automatically with the network topology accordingly. Hence, static routes are commonly used in a
relative simple and stable network. Proper configuration of static routes can greatly improve
network performance.
10.3.1 IPv4 Static Routing Config
Choose the menu Routing→Static Routing→Static Routing Config to load the following page.
Figure 10-9 Static Routing Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Static Routing Config
Protocol Displays the protocol of the route.
Destination/Mask:
Displays the destination and subnet of the route.
Next Hop: Displays the IPv6 address to which the packet should be sent next.
Distance: Displays the management distance of the ro
ute. The smaller the
distance, the higher the priority.
Metric: Displays the metric of the route.
Interface name: Displays the description of the egress interface.
Destination: Specify the destination IP address of the packets.
Subnet Mask: Specify the subnet mask of the destination IP address.
Next Hop: Enter the IP address to which the packet should be sent next.
Distance: Enter the distance metric of route. The smaller the distance
, the
higher the priority.
192
Static Route Table
10.3.2 IPv6 Static Routing Config
Choose the menu Routing→Static Routing→Static Routing Config to load the following page.
Figure 10-10 Static Routing Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Static Routing Config
Static Route Table
Select: Specify the static route entries to modify.
Destination
Address: Displays the destination IP address of the packets.
Subnet Mask: Displays the subnet mask of the destination IP address.
Next Hop: Displays the IP address to which the packet should be sent next.
Distance: Displays the distance metric of ro
ute. The smaller the distance,
the higher the priority.
Metric: Displays the metric of the route.
Interface Name: Displays the name of the VLAN interface.
IPv6 Address: Specify the destination IPv6 address of the packets.
Prefix Length: Specify the prefix length of the IPv6 address.
Next Hop: Enter the IPv6 address to which the packet should be sent next.
Distance:
Enter the distance metric of route. The smaller the distance, the
higher the priority.
Select: Select the IPv6 static route entries to modify.
IPv6 Address: Displays the destination IPv6 address of the packets.
Prefix Length: Displays the prefix length of the destination IPv6 address.
193
10.4 DHCP Server
DHCP module is used to configure the DHCP functions of the switch, including two submenus,
DHCP Server and DHCP Relay.
Overview
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a network configuration protocol for hosts on
TCP/IP networks, and it provides a framework for distributing configuration information to hosts.
DHCP is adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and
additional configuration options. DHCP captures the behavior of DHCP participants so the
administrator can manage the parameters of the host in the network.
As workstations and personal computers proliferate on the Internet, the administrative complexity
of maintaining a network is increased by an order of magnitude. The assignment of local network
resources to each client represents one such difficulty. In most environments, delegating such
responsibility to the user is not plausible and, indeed, the solution is to define the resources in
uniform terms, and to automate their assignment.
The DHCP dealt with the issue of assigning an internet address to a client, as well as some other
resources.
DHCP Elements
DHCP is built on a client-server model, where designated DHCP server hosts allocate network
addresses and deliver configuration parameters to DHCP clients. Generally a DHCP server can
allocate configuration parameters to more than one client. Figure 10-11 DHCP model shows you
the model.
Next Hop: Displays the IPv6
address to which the packet should be sent
next.
Distance: Displays the distance metric of route. The smaller the distance
,
the higher the priority.
Metric: Displays the metric of the route.
Interface Name: Displays the name of the VLAN interface.
194
Figure 10-11 DHCP model
To me et the different requirements of DHCP clients, DHCP server is always designed to supply
hosts with the configuration parameters in three policies.
1) Manual Assignment: For the specific DHCP clients (e.g., web server), the configuration
parameters are manually specified by the administrator and are assigned to these clients via
a DHCP server.
2) Automatic Assignment: The DHCP server must supplies the configuration parameters to
DHCP client with the lease time continued for ever.
3) Dynamic Assignment: A network administrator assigns a range of IP addresses to DHCP
server, and each client computer on the LAN is configured to request an IP address from the
DHCP server with a fixed period of time (e.g., 2 hours), allowing the DHCP server to reclaim
(and then reallocate) IP addresses that are not renewed.
The Process of DHCP
DHCP uses UDP as its transport protocol. DHCP messages from a client to a server are sent to
the 'DHCP server' port (67), and DHCP messages from a server to a client are sent to the 'DHCP
client' port (68). DHCP clients and servers both construct DHCP messages by filling in fields in the
fixed format section of the message and appending tagged data items in the variable length option
area. The process is shown as follows.
Figure 10-12 The Process of DHCP
1) DHCP discover: the client broadcasts messages on the physical subnet to discover available
DHCP servers in the LAN. Network administrators can configure a local router (e.g. a relay
agent) to forward DHCP-DISCOVER messages to a DHCP server in a different subnet.
2) DHCP offer: Each server who received the DHCP-DISCOVER message may respond a
DHCP-OFFER message that includes configuration parameters (in the example below, IP
address) to the client. The server unicast the DHCP-OFFER message to the client (using the
DHCP/BOOTP relay agent if necessary) if possible, or may broadcast the message to a
broadcast address on the client's subnet.
3) DHCP request: A client can receive DHCP offers from multiple servers, but it will accept only
one DHCP-OFFER and broadcast a DHCP-REQUEST message which includes the server’s
195
identifier and the IP address offered by the server. Based on the server’s identifier, servers
are informed whose offer the client has accepted.
4) DHCP acknowledgement: The server selected in the DHCP-REQUEST message commits the
binding for the client to persistent storage and responds with a DHCP-ACK message
containing the configuration parameters for the requesting client. If the selected server is
unable to satisfy the DHCP-REQUEST message (e.g., the requested IP address has been
allocated), the server should respond with a DHCP-NAK message.
5) In Dynamic assignment policy, the DHCP client is assigned an IP address with a lease time
(e.g. 2 hours) from the DHCP server. This IP address will be reclaimed by the DHCP server
when its lease time expires. If the client wants to use the IP address continually, it should
unicast a DHCP-REQUEST message to the server to extend its lease.
After obtaining parameters via DHCP, a host should be able to exchange packets with any other
host in the networks.
The Format of DHCP Message
Figure 10-12 The Process of DHCPgives the process of DHCP and Figure 10-13 describes each
field in the DHCP message. The numbers in parentheses indicate the size of each field in octets.
The names for the fields given in the figure will be used throughout this document to refer to the
fields in DHCP messages.
Figure 10-13 The Format of DHCP Message
1) op：Message type, ‘1’ = BOOT-REQUEST, ‘2’ = BOOT-RE PLY.
2) htype：Hardware address type, '1' for ethernet.
3) hlen：Hardware address length, '6' for ethernet.
4) hops：Clients set this field to zero and broadcast the DHCP-REQUEST message , optionally
used by relay-agents when booting via a relay-agent.
5) xid：Transaction ID, a random number chosen by the client, used by the client and server to
associate messages.
6) secs：Filled in by client, seconds elapsed since client started trying to boot.
7) flags：A client that cannot receive unicast IP datagrams until its protocol software has been
configured with an IP address should set the first bit in the 'flags' field to 1 in any
DHCP-DISCOVER or DHCP-REQUEST message that client sends. A client that can receive
196
unicast IP datagrams before its protocol software has been configured should clear the first bit
to 0. A server or relay agent sending or relaying a DHCP message directly to a DHCP client
should examine the first bit in the 'flags' field. If this bit is set to 1, the DHCP message should
be sent as an IP broadcast and if the bit is cleared to 0, the message should be sent as an IP
unicast. The remaining bits of the flags field are reserved for future use and must be set to
zero by clients and ignored by servers and relay agents.
8) ciaddr：Client IP address, filled in by client in DHCPREQUEST when verifying previously
allocated configuration parameters.
9) yiaddr：'your' (client) IP address, configuration parameters allocated to the client by DHCP
server.
10) siaddr：IP address of next server to use in bootstrap, returned in DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK
and DHCPNAK by server.
11) giaddr：Relay agent IP address, used in booting via a relay-agent.
12) chaddr：Client hardware address.
13) sname：Optional server host name, null terminated string.
14) file：Boot file name, null terminated string, "generic" name or null in DHCPDISCOVER, fully
qualified directory-path name in DHCPOFFER.
15) options：Optional parameters field. See the options documents (RFC 2132) for a list of defined
options. We will introduce some familiar options in the next section.
DHCP Option
This section defines a generalized use of the 'options' field for giving information useful to a wide
class of machines, operating systems and configurations. Sites with a single DHCP server that is
shared among heterogeneous clients may choose to define other, site-specific formats for the use
of the 'options' field. Figure 10-14 gives the format of options field.
Figure 10-14 DHCP Option
All options begin with a Code octet, which uniquely identifies the option followed by the length
octet. The value of the length octet does not include the Code and Length octets. The common
options are illustrated as below.
1) option 1：Subnet Mask option. The subnet mask option is option1 which identifies the
assigned IP address with network, and its length is 4 octets.
2) option 3：Router option. The router option is option 3 which specifies an IP address for routers
on the client's subnet.
3) option 6：DNS option. The DNS option is option 6, and it assigns the IP address of domain
name server to the client which allows the client can use the web service in the internet.
4) option 12：Host Name option. The option12 is used to specify the name of the client, which
may be requested by the DHCP server for authentication.
5) option 50：Requested IP Address option. The option 50 is used in a DHCP-REQUEST
message to allow the client to request the particular IP address.
197
6) option 51：Lease Time option. In DHCP-OFFER and DHCP-ACK message, the DHCP server
uses this option to specify the lease time in which the clients can use the IP address legally.
7) option 53：Message Type option. This option is used to convey the type of the DHCP
message. Legal values for this option show in Table 10-2:
Value
Message Type
1
DHCP-DISCOVER
2
DHCP-OFFER
3
DHCP-REQUEST
4
DHCP-DECLINE
5
DHCP-ACK
6
DHCP-NAK
7
DHCP-RELEASE
8
DHCP-INFORM
Table 10-2 Option 53
8) option 54：Server Identifier option. DHCP servers include option 54 in the DHCP-OFFER
message in order to allow the client to distinguish between lease offers. DHCP clients use the
option in a DHCP-REQUEST message to indicate which lease offers is being accepted.
9) option 55：Parameter Request List option. This option is used by a DHCP client to request
values for specified configuration parameters.
10) option 61：Client hardware address.
11) option 66：TFTP server name option. This option is used to identify a TFTP server.
12) option 67：Boot-file name option. This option is used to identify a boot-file.
13) option 150：TFTP server address option. This option is used to specify the address of the
TFTP server which assigns the boot-file to the client.
For particulars of DHCP option, please refer to RFC 2132. In the next section, DHCP Server and
DHCP Relay function on this switch will be introduced in detail.
Application Environment of DHCP Server
DHCP Server assigns IP address to the client efficiently in the following environment.
1) More and more device proliferates in the network, and it is a hard work to configure the IP
parameter for every device manually.
2) There are not enough network resources to assign to every device exclusively.
3) Only a little device need static IP address to connect the network.
Details of DHCP Server
A typical application of the switch working at DHCP Server function is shown below. It can be
altered to meet the network requirement.
198
Figure 10-15 DHCP Server Application
To guarantee the process of assigning IP address fluency and in safety, and to keep the network
run steadily, the DHCP Server function on the switch performs the following tasks.
Create different IP pool for every VLAN. The device in different VLAN can get the IP address
in different subnet.
When receiving a DHCP-DISCOVER packet from the client, the switch judges the VLAN
which the ingress port belong to, and chooses the IP in the same subnet with the VLAN
interface to assign to the client.
With a DHCP Relay running between the client and the server, when receiving a
DHCP-DISCOVER packet transmitting from the Relay, the switch will choose the IP from the
IP pool in the same subnet with the Relay’s IP to assign to the client. If the IP pool is not
configured on the switch or the configured IP pool doesn’t match the Relay’s network
segment, the client may not get network parameters successfully.
The switch can detect the IP address automatically before assigning it to avoid conflict.
IP Detection
To avoid IP conflict, the switch will detect the IP address to be assigned in LAN through Ping test.
The DHCP server will send the Ping test packet with the destination IP being the IP address to be
assigned. If the server receives the Reply packet from the destination host in the ping time, it
means that the IP address has been used, and the server will choose another IP as destination IP
to test again. The server will assign the IP address if the server not receives the Reply packet in
the Ping time.
Policy of IP Assignment
The switch chooses the IP assigned to clients based on the rules shown as follows.
1) First, the server will choose the IP which has been bound to the client manually.
2) Then, the server will assign the IP which has been assigned to the client once.
3) For the next, the server will assign the IP which is specified in the DHCP-DISCOVER packet
from the client.
4) At last, the server will choose the first IP from the IP pool which has not been assigned.
Tips for Configure DHCP Server Function
199
1) Configure the Excluded IP address which cannot be assigned by the switch, e.g. web server’s
IP, broadcast IP of subnet and gateway’s IP.
2) Specify IP address for specific clients, and then the switch will supply these IP address to
them only forever.
3) Configure the IP pool in which the IP address can be assigned to the clients.
The DHCP Server, allowing the clients in all VLANs to get the IP address from the server
automatically, is implemented on the DHCP Server, Pool Setting, Manual Binding, Binding
Table and Packet Statistics pages.
10.4.1 DHCP Server
This page allows you to enable the DHCP Server function, configure the Excluded IP Address
which cannot be assigned by the switch in every network.
Choose the menu Routing→DHCP Server→DHCP Server to load the following page.
Figure10-16 DHCP Server
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
DHCP Server: Enable/Disable the switch as a DHCP server.
Option 60:
Configure DHCP option 60. If this option is configured, DHCP
server will response packets containing this option if the client
running CAPWAP protocol requests this option.
200
Ping Time Config
Excluded IP Address
Configure the Excluded IP Address which cannot be assigned by the switch.
Excluded IP Address Table
Select: Select the entry to delete the Excluded IP Address pool.
ID:
Displays the corresponding ID of the Excluded IP Address
pool.
Start IP Address: Displays the start IP Address of the Excluded IP Address pool.
End IP Address: Displays the last IP Address of the Excluded IP Address pool.
10.4.2 Pool Setting
This page shows you how to configure the IP pool in which the IP address can be assigned to the
clients in the network.
Choose the menu Routing→DHCP Server→DHCP Server Pool to load the following page.
Option 138:
Configure DHCP option 138. If this option is configured, DHCP
se
rver will response packets containing this option if the client
running CAPWAP protocol request this option.
Ping Packets: The number of packets to be sent.
Ping Timeout: The time it takes to determine the specific IP not exist.
Start IP Address: The first one of the IP addresses that should not be assigned.
End IP Address: The last one of the IP addresses that should not be assigned.
201
Figure 10-17 Pool Setting
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
DHCP Server Pool
Pool Table
Select: Select the entry to delete the IP pool.
Pool Name: Displays the name of the IP Pool.
Network Address: Displays the network address of the IP Pool.
Subnet Mask: Displays the subnet mask of the IP Pool.
Lease Time: Displays the lease time of the IP Pool.
Operation:
Allows you to view or modify the information of the
corresponding IP Pool.
Edit: Click to modify the settings of the Pool.
Detail: Click to get the information of the Pool.
10.4.3 Manual Binding
In this page, you can specify the IP address for specific clients, and then the switch will supply
these specified parameters to them only forever.
Pool Name: Enter the name of the pool.
Network Address: Specify the network number of the IP addresses in the pool.
Subnet Mask:
Specify the corresponding subnet mask of the IP address in the
pool.
Lease Time: Specify the lease time of IP addresses in the pool.
Default Gateway: Specify the IP address of the default gateway for a client.
DNS Server: Specify the IP address of the DNS server for a client.
Netbios Server: Specify the IP address of the Netbios server.
Netbios Node Type: Specify the node type of the Netbios server.
Next Server
Address:
Specify the next DHCP server’s ip address duri
ng the DHCP boot
process.
Domain Name: Specify the domain name of the DHCP client.
Bootfile: Specify the boot file name of the DHCP client.
202
Choose the menu Routing→DHCP Server→Manual Binding to load the following page.
Figure 10-18 Manual Binding
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Manual Binding
Pool Name: Select the IP Pool containing the IP address to be bound.
IP Address: Specify the IP address to be bound.
Binding Mode: Select the binding mode of the manual binding.
Client ID: Specify the identifier of the client.
Hardware Address: Specify the hardware address to be bound.
Hardware Type: Select the hardware protocol of the client.
Manual Binding Table
Displays the list of the configured binding entries of IP addresses and hardware addresses.
10.4.4 Binding Table
In this page, you can view the information about the clients attached to the Server.
Choose the menu Routing→DHCP Server→Binding Table to load the following page.
Figure 10-19 DHCP Server Binding Table
DHCP Server Binding Table
ID: Displays the ID of the client.
IP Address: Displays the IP address
that the Switch has allocated to the
client.
Client ID / Hardware
Address:
Displays the MAC address of the client.
203
Type: Displays the type of this binding entry.
Lease Time Left(s): Displays the lease time of the client left.
Click Delete to delete the selected entry.
10.4.5 Packet Statistics
In this page, you can view the DHCP packets the switch received or sent.
Choose the menu Routing→DHCP Server→Packet Statistics to load the following page.
Figure10-20 Statistics
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Packets Received
BOOTREQUEST: Displays the Bootp Request packet received.
DHCPDISCOVER: Displays the Discover packet received.
DHCPREQUEST: Displays the Request packet received.
DHCPDECLINE: Displays the Decline packet received.
DHCPRELEASE: Displays the Release packet received.
DHCPINFORM: Displays the Inform packet received.
Packets Sent
BOOTREPLY: Displays the Bootp Reply packet sent.
DHCPOFFER: Displays the Offer packet sent.
DHCPACK: Displays the Ack packet sent.
DHCPNAK: Displays the Nak packet sent.
204
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Set the link type for port. Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page,
set the link type for the port basing on its connected device.
2
Create VLAN. Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config
page, click the Create button to create a VLAN. Ente
r the
VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN. Meanwhile,
specify its member ports.
3
Create VLAN interface. Required. On the Routing→Static Routing→Static Routing
Config page, create the interface IP address of the VLAN.
4
Enable DHCP Server. Required. On the Routing→DHCP Server→DHCP Server
page, enable the DHCP Server function.
5
Configure Excluded IP
Address.
Optional. On the Routing→DHCP Server→DHCP Server
page,
configure the Excluded IP Address which cannot be
assigned by the switch.
6
Configure IP Pool. Required. On the Routing→DHCP Server→Pool Setting
page,
configure the parameters of IP Pool, including Mask,
lease time, gateway and DNS address.
7
Bind IP Manually Optional. On the Routing→DHCP Server→Manual Binding
page, you can specify the IP address for specific clients.
10.4.6 Application Example for DHCP Server and Relay
Network Requirements
Every building in the campus belongs to separate VLANs with different network segments.
The access points in each building are divided into two parts. One part is the fixed computers
with static IP addresses in the teachers’ offices; the other is the classroom, in which most
clients are laptops with dynamic IP addresses obtained from the DHCP server.
DNS Server is in VLAN 1and its IP address is 160.20.30.2.
205
Network Diagram
Use the central switch and enable its DHCP server function to allocate IP addresses to clients in
the network. Enable the DHCP relay function on each access switch in VLAN 10, 20 and 30. For
details about DHCP relay, please refer to 10.5 DHCP Relay.
Configuration Procedure
Configure Central Switch
Step Operation Note
1
Create VLAN Required. On page VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config, create
VLAN10, VLAN20 and VLAN30, and configure their ports.
2
Create VLAN
interface
Required. On page Routing→Interface→Interface Config,
configure VLAN interface 192.168.10.1/24 for VLAN10,
192.168.20.1/24 for VLAN20, and 192.168.30.1 for VLAN30.
3
Enable DHCP
Server
Required. On page Routing→DHCP Server→DHCP Server,
enable DHCP Server function under the Global Config.
4
Configure the IP
address pool
Required. On page Routing→DHCP Server→Pool Setting,
configure IP address pool pa
rameters for each VLAN interface.
Take VLAN10 as an example, configure its Network Address as
192.168.10.0, Subnet Mask as 255.255.255.0, Default gateway as
192.168.10.1 (the IP address of the VLAN interface), DNS Server
as 160.20.30.2, and customize the Pool Name and Lease Time.
5
Configure the
reserved
addresses
Required. On page Routing→DHCP Server→DHCP Server,
under the Excluded IP Address, configure reserved IP addresses
for the fixed computers in each VLAN.
206
Step Operation Note
6
Manually binding
IP addresses
Optional. On page Routing→ DHCP Server→Manual Binding,
bind specified ip addresses to the specific clients.
Configure Access Switch
Step Operation Note
•
Enable DHCP
Relay.
Required. On the Routing→DHCP Server→Global Config page,
enable
the DHCP Server function, and the DHCP Relay function
will be enabled at the same time.
•
Configure Option
82 support.
Optional. On the Routing→DHCP Relay→Global Config page,
configure the Option 82 parameters.
•
Configure DHCP
Server.
Required. On the Routing→DHCP Relay→DHCP Server page,
specify the DHCP Server with the IP address of the central switch.
10.5 DHCP Relay
Application Environment of DHCP Relay
In DHCP model, DHCP clients broadcast its DHCP request, so the DHCP sever and clients must
be on the same subnet, which require the DHCP server is available in every subnet. It is costly to
build so much DHCP Server. DHCP relay agent solves the problem. Via a relay agent, DHCP
clients request an IP address from the DHCP server in another subnet, and DHCP clients in
different subnets can share the same DHCP server in the internet.
Details of DHCP Relay
A typical application of the switch working at DHCP Relay function is shown below. It can be
altered to meet the network requirement.
Figure 10-21 DHCP Relay Application
207
To allow all clients in different VLAN request IP address from one server successfully, the DHCP
Relay function can transmit the DHCP packet between clients and server in different VLANs, and
all clients in different VLANs can share one DHCP Server.
When receiving DHCP-DISCOVER and DHCP-REQUEST packets, the switch will fill the
giaddr field with the interface IP of the receiving port, optionally insert the option 82
information, and then forward the packet to the server.
When receiving DHCP-OFFER and DHCP-ACP packets from the server, the switch will
delete the option 82 information and forward the packet to the interface which receives the
request.
The process will be shown as follows.
Figure 10-22 DHCP Relay Process
DHCP Relay Configuration
1) Configure the Option 82 parameters to record the information of the clients. You are
suggested to configure the option82 on the nearest Relay of the client.
2) Specify the DHCP Server which assigns IP addresses actually.
Option 82
On this switch, Option 82 is used to record the location of the DHCP Client, the ethernet port and
the VLAN, etc. Upon receiving the DHCP-REQUEST packet, the switch adds the Option 82 field to
the packet and then transmits the packet to DHCP Server. The Server can be acquainted with the
location of the DHCP Client via Option 82, so as to locate the DHCP Client, and assign the
distribution policy of IP addresses and the other parameters for fulfilling the security control and
account management of the client.
Option 82 can contain 255 sub-options at most. If Option 82 is defined, at least one sub-option
should be defined. This Switch supports two sub-options, Circuit ID and Remote ID. Since there is
no universal standard about the content of Option 82, different manufacturers define the
sub-options of Option 82 to their need. For this Switch, the sub-options are defined as follows:
The Circuit ID is defined to be the number and VLAN of the port which receives the DHCP
Request packets. The Remote ID is defined to be the MAC address of DHCP Relay device which
receives the DHCP Request packets from DHCP Clients. Furthermore these two parameters also
can be manually configured.
The format of Option 82 defined on the switch by default is given in the following figure. The
numbers in parentheses indicate the size of each field in octets. By default, sub-option1 is Circuit
ID option recording the VLAN and ethernet port information, while sub-option2 is Remote ID option
recording the MAC address information of the client. You can define the sub-options manually.
208
Figure10-23 Option 82
Note:
The option 82 parameters configured on the switch should base on and meet the requirement of
the network.
The DHCP Relay, allowing the clients to get the IP address from the server in another subnet, is
implemented on the DHCP Relay page.
10.5.1 Global Config
This page allows you to enable the DHCP Relay function.
Choose the menu Routing→DHCP Relay→Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 10-24 Global Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
DHCP Relay: Enable the DHCP relay feature.
Option 82 configuration
Configure the Option 82 which cannot be assigned by the switch.
Option 82 Support: Enable or disable the Option 82 feature.
Existed Option 82
Field:
Select the operation for the existed Option 82 field of the
DHCP request packets from the Host.
Keep: Indicates to keep the Option 82 field of the packets.
Replace: Indicates to replace the Option
82 field of the
packets with the switch defined one.
Drop: Indicates to discard the packets including the
Option 82 field.
209
Customization: Enable or disable the switch to define the Option 82 field.
Circuit ID: Enter the sub-option Circuit ID for the cus
tomized Option 82
field.
Remote ID: Enter the sub-
option Remote ID for the customized Option 82
field.
10.5.2 DHCP Server
This page enables you to configure DHCP Servers on the specified interface.
Choose the menu Routing→DHCP Relay→DHCP Server to load the following page.
Figure 10-25 DHCP Server
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Add DHCP Server Address
Interface ID: Select the interface type and enter the interface ID.
Server Address: Enter the DHCP server IP address.
DHCP Server List
Select: Select the desire DHCP server item.
Interface ID: Displays the interface ID.
Server Address: Displays the DHCP server address.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Enable DHCP Relay. Required. On the Routing→DHCP Relay→Global Config
page, enable the DHCP Relay function.
2
Configure
Option 82
support.
Optional. On the Routing→DHCP Relay→Global Config
page, configure the Option 82 parameters.
3
Configure DHCP Server. Required. On the Routing→DHCP Relay→DHCP Server
page, specify the DHCP Server with IP address.
210
10.6 ARP
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) records the mapping relationship between IP addresses and
MAC addresses in the ARP table. You can also define a static ARP cache entry on the page Static
ARP.
10.6.1 ARP Table
Choose the menu Routing→ARP→ARP Table to load the following page.
Figure 10-26 ARP Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
ARP Table
Interface: Displays the network interface of ARP entry.
IP Address: Enter the IP address of the ARP entry.
MAC Address: Displays the MAC address of ARP entry.
Type: Displays the type of ARP entry, e.g. Static, Dynamic.
10.6.2 Static ARP
You can configure the static ARP entry on this page.
Choose the menu Routing→ARP→Static ARP to load the following page.
Figure 10-27 Static ARP
ARP Config
IP Address: Configure the IP address of the ARP entry.
MAC address: Configure the MAC address of the ARP entry.
ARP Table
Here you can view or delete the current static ARP entries.
211
Chapter 11 QoS
QoS (Quality of Service) functions to provide different quality of service for various network
applications and requirements and optimize the bandwidth resource distribution so as to provide a
network service experience of a better quality.
QoS
This switch classifies the ingress packets, maps the packets to different priority queues and then
forwards the packets according to specified scheduling algorithms to implement QoS function.
Figure 11-1 QoS function
Traffic classification: Identifies packets conforming to certain characters according to certain
rules.
Map: The user can map the ingress packets to different priority queues based on the priority
modes. This switch implements three priority modes based on port, on 802.1P and on DSCP.
Queue scheduling algorithm: When the network is congested, the problem that many packets
compete for resources must be solved, usually in the way of queue scheduling. The switch
supports four schedule modes: SP, WRR, SP+WRR and Equ.
Priority Mode
This switch implements three priority modes based on port, on 802.1P and on DSCP. By default, the
priority mode based on port is enabled and the other two modes are optional.
1. Port Priority
Port priority is just a property of the port. After port priority is configured, the data stream will be
mapped to the egress queues according to the CoS of the port and the mapping relationship
between CoS and queues.
213
2. 802.1P Priority
Figure 11-2 802.1Q frame
As shown in the figure above, each 802.1Q Tag has a Pri field, comprising 3 bits. The 3-bit priority
field is 802.1p priority in the range of 0 to 7. 802.1P priority determines the priority of the packets
based on the Pri value. On the Web management page of the switch, you can configure different
priority tags mapping to the corresponding priority levels, and then the switch determine which
packet is sent preferentially when forwarding packets. The switch processes untagged packets
based on the default priority mode.
3. DSCP Priority
Figure 11-3 IP datagram
As shown in the figure above, the ToS (Type of Service) in an IP header contains 8 bits. The first
three bits indicate IP precedence in the range of 0 to 7. RFC2474 re-defines the ToS field in the IP
packet header, which is called the DS field. The first six bits (bit 0-bit 5) of the DS field indicate
DSCP precedence in the range of 0 to 63. The last 2 bits (bit 6 and bit 7) are reserved. On the Web
management page, you can configure different DS field mapping to the corresponding priority
levels. Non-IP datagram with 802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P
priority mode; the untagged non-IP datagram are mapped based on port priority mode.
Schedule Mode
When the network is congested, the problem that many packets compete for resources must be
solved, usually in the way of queue scheduling. The switch implements eight scheduling queues,
TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3, TC4, TC5, TC6 and TC7. TC0 has the lowest priority while TC7 has the
highest priority. The switch provides four schedule modes: SP, WRR, SP+WRR and Equ.
1. SP-Mode: Strict-Priority Mode. In this mode, the queue with higher priority will occupy the
whole bandwidth. Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent only when the queue with
higher priority is empty. The switch has eight egress queues labeled as TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3,
TC4, TC5, TC6 and TC7. In SP mode, their priorities increase in order. TC7 has the highest
priority. The disadvantage of SP queue is that: if there are packets in the queues with higher
priority for a long time in congestion, the packets in the queues with lower priority will be
“starved to death” because they are not served.
214
Figure 11-4 SP-Mode
2. WRR-Mode: Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, packets in all the queues are sent in
order based on the weight value for each queue and every queue can be assured of a certain
service time. The weight value indicates the occupied proportion of the resource. WRR queue
overcomes the disadvantage of SP queue that the packets in the queues with lower priority
cannot get service for a long time. In WRR mode, though the queues are scheduled in order,
the service time for each queue is not fixed, that is to say, if a queue is empty, the next queue
will be scheduled. In this way, the bandwidth resources are made full use of. The default
weight value ratio of TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3, TC4, TC5, TC6 and TC7 is 1:2:4:8:16:32:64:127.
Figure 11-5 WRR-Mode
3. SP+WRR Mode: Strict-Priority + Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, the switch provides
two scheduling groups, SP group and WRR group. Queues in SP group and WRR group are
scheduled strictly based on Strict-Priority mode while the queues inside WRR group follow the
WRR mode. In SP + WRR mode, TC7 and the queue with its weight value set as 0 are in the
SP group; other queues, with none-zero weight value, belong to the WRR group and the
weight value can be customized, ranging from 0 to 127. In this way, when scheduling queues,
the switch allows TC7 and zero-weight-value queue to occupy the whole bandwidth following
the SP mode and the queues in the WRR group will take up the bandwidth according to their
ratio.
215
4. Equ-Mode: Equal-Mode. In this mode, all the queues occupy the bandwidth equally. The
weight value ratio of all the queues is 1:1:1:1:1:1:1:1.
Note:
In SP + WRR mode, TC7 and the queue with its weight value set as 0 are in the SP group.
The QoS module is mainly for traffic control and priority configuration, including three submenus:
DiffServ, Bandwidth Control and Voice VLAN.
11.1 DiffServ
This switch classifies the ingress packets, maps the packets to different priority queues and then
forwards the packets according to specified scheduling algorithms to implement QoS function.
This switch implements three priority modes based on port, on 802.1P and on DSCP, and supports
four queue scheduling algorithms. The port priorities are labeled as CoS0, CoS1… CoS7.
The DiffServ function can be implemented on Port Priority, Schedule Mode, 802.1P Priority and
DSCP Priority pages.
11.1.1 Port Priority
On this page you can configure the port priority.
Choose the menu QoS→DiffServ→Port Priority to load the following page.
Figure 11-6 Port Priority Config
216
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Priority Config
UNIT:1/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure
the link aggregation groups.
Select: Select the desired port to configure its priority. It is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the physical port number of the switch.
Priority: Specify the priority for the port.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1 Select the port priority Required. On QoS→DiffServ→Port Priority page,
configure the port priority.
2
Configure the mapping
relation between the 802.1P
priority and TC
Required. On QoS→DiffServ→802.1P Priority page,
configure
the mapping relation between the 802.1P
priority and TC.
3 Select a schedule mode Required. On QoS→DiffServ→Schedule Mode page,
select a schedule mode.
11.1.2 Schedule Mode
On this page you can select a schedule mode for the switch. When the network is congested, the
problem that many packets compete for resources must be solved, usually in the way of queue
scheduling. The switch will control the forwarding sequence of the packets according to the priority
queues and scheduling algorithms you set. On this switch, the priority levels are labeled as TC0,
TC1… TC7.
Choose the menu QoS→DiffServ→Schedule Mode to load the following page.
Figure 11-7 Schedule Mode
217
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Schedule Mode Config
Schedule Mode: Select a schedule mode.
SP-Mode
：
Strict-P
riority Mode. In this mode, the queue with
higher priority will occupy the whole bandwidth. Packets in the
queue with lower priority are sent only when the queue with
higher priority is empty.
WRR-Mode:
Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, packets
in all
the queues are sent in order based on the weight value for
each queue. The weight values of TC0-TC7
can be customized
and their default values are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64:127 respectively.
SP+WRR-Mode: Strict-
Priority + Weight Round Robin Mode. In
this mode, the
switch provides two scheduling groups, SP group
and WRR group.
SP group is processed prior to WRR group.
Queues in SP group are scheduled strictly based on
Strict-Priority mode while the queues inside WRR gr
oup follow
the WRR mode. In SP+WRR mode, TC7 and
the queue with its
weight value set as 0 are in the SP group;
other queues, with
none-zero weight value,
belong to the WRR group and the
weight value can be customized. The default weight value
s of
TC0-TC6 are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 respectively, while the valu
e of
TC7 is 0 and non-configurable.
Equ-Mode: Equal-Mode. In this mode, all the queues oc
cupy the
bandwidth equally. The weight value ratio of all the queues is
1:1:1:1:1:1:1:1.
Queue Weight: Input the queue weight of the 8 TC queues. Configuration is not
available when Equ-Mode or SP-
Mode is selected as the schedule
mode.
11.1.3 802.1P Priority
On this page you can configure the mapping relation between the 802.1P priority tag-id/CoS-id and
the TC-id.
802.1P gives the Pri field in 802.1Q tag a recommended definition. This field, ranging from 0-7, is
used to divide packets into 8 priorities. 802.1P Priority is enabled by default, so the packets with
802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P priority mode but the untagged
packets are mapped based on port priority mode. With the same value, the 802.1P priority tag and
the CoS will be mapped to the same TC.
218
Choose the menu QoS→DiffServ→802.1P Priority to load the following page.
Figure 11-8 802.1P Priority
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Priority and CoS-mapping Config
Select: Select the desired 802.1P tag-id/cos-
id for 802.1P priority
configuration. It is multi-optional.
Tag-id/CoS-id:
Indicates the precedence level defined by IEEE 802.1P and the
CoS ID.
Queue TC-id:
Indicates the priority level of egress queue the packets with tag
and CoS-id are mapped to.
The priority levels of egress queue are
labeled as TC0, TC1, TC2 …TC7.
Note:
To complete QoS function configuration, you have to go to the Schedule Mode page to select a
schedule mode after the configuration is finished on this page.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the mapping
relation between the 802.1P
priority Tag/CoS and the TC
Required. On QoS→DiffServ→802.1P Priority page,
configure the mapping relation between the 802.1P
priority Tag/CoS and the TC.
2 Select a schedule mode Required. On QoS→DiffServ→Schedule Mode page,
select a schedule mode.
11.1.4 DSCP Priority
On this page you can configure DSCP priority. DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) is a new definition to IP
ToS field given by IEEE. This field is used to divide IP datagram into 64 priorities. When DSCP
Priority is enabled, IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels based on DSCP priority
mode; non-IP datagram with 802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P
priority mode if 8021.1P Priority mode is enabled; the untagged non-IP datagram are mapped based
on port priority mode.
219
Choose the menu QoS→DiffServ→DSCP Priority to load the following page.
Figure 11-9 DSCP Priority
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
DSCP Priority Config
DSCP Priority: Select Enable or Disable DSCP Priority.
Priority Level
Select:
Select the desired DSCP value for DSCP priority configuration. It
is multi-optional.
DSCP:
Indicates the priority determined by the DS region of IP datagram.
It ranges from 0 to 63.
Priority Level: Indicates the 802.1P priority t
he packets with tag are mapped to.
The priorities are labeled as CoS0 ~ CoS7.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the mapping relation
between the DSCP priority and
802.1P priority
Required. On QoS→DiffServ→DSCP Priority
page,
enable DSCP Priority and configure
the mapping
relation between the DSCP priority and CoS.
2 Configure the mapping relation
between the CoS and the TC
Required. On QoS→DiffServ→802.1P Priority
page,
configure the mapping rela
tion between the CoS and
the TC.
3 Select a schedule mode Required. On QoS→DiffServ→Schedule Mode
page,
select a schedule mode.
220
11.2 Bandwidth Control
Bandwidth function, allowing you to control the traffic rate and broadcast flow on each port to
ensure network in working order, can be implemented on Rate Limit and Storm Control pages.
11.2.1 Rate Limit
Rate limit functions to control the ingress/egress traffic rate on each port via configuring the
available bandwidth of each port. In this way, the network bandwidth can be reasonably distributed
and utilized.
Choose the menu QoS→Bandwidth Control→Rate Limit to load the following page.
Figure 11-10 Rate Limit
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Rate Limit Config
UNIT:1/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure
the link aggregation groups.
Select:
Select the desired port for Rate configuration. It is
multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Ingress Rate
(1-1000000Kbps):
Configure the bandwidth for receiving packets on the port. You
can select a rate from the dropdown list or manually
set Ingress
rate, the system will automatically select integral multiple of
64Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Ingress
rate.
221
Egress
Rate(1-1000000Kbps):
Configure the bandwidth for sending packets on the port.
You can
select a rate from the dropdown list or manually
set Egress rate,
the system will automatically select integral multiple of 64Kbps
that closest to the rate you entered as the real Egress rate.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Note:
1. If you enable ingress rate limit feature for the storm control-enabled port, storm control feature
will be disabled for this port.
2. When manually set Ingress/Egress rate, the system will automatically select integral multiple
of 64Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Ingress/Egress rate. For example, if
you enter 1000Kbps for egress rate, the system will automatically select 1024Kbps as the real
Egress rate.
3. When egress rate limit feature is enabled for one or more ports, you are suggested to disable
the flow control on each port to ensure the switch works normally.
11.2.2 Storm Control
Storm Control function allows the switch to filter broadcast, multicast and UL frame in the network.
If the transmission rate of the three kind packets exceeds the set bandwidth, the packets will be
automatically discarded to avoid network broadcast storm.
Choose the menu QoS→Bandwidth Control→Storm Control to load the following page.
Figure 11-11 Storm Control
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Storm Control Config
UNIT:1/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure
the link aggregation groups.
Select: Select the desire
d port for Storm Control configuration. It is
multi-optional.
222
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
PPS: Enable or disable the PPS mode.
Broadcast Rate
Mode:
Select the broadcast rate mode, pps mode is invalid if the PPS is
disabled.
kbps: Specify the threshold in kbits per second.
ratio: Specify the threshold as a percentage of the bandwidth.
pps: Specify the threshold in packets per second.
Broadcast: Enable/Disable broadcast control feature for the port.
Mulitcast Rate
Mode:
Select the multicast rate mode, pps mode is invalid if
PPS is
disabled.
Multicast: Enable/Disable multicast control feature for the port.
UL-Frame Rate
Mode:
Select the UL-Frame rate mode, pps mode is invalid if
PPS is
disabled.
UL-Frame: Enable/Disable UL-Frame control feature for the port.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Note:
1. If you enable storm control feature for the ingress rate limit-enabled port, ingress rate limit
feature will be disabled for this port.
2. If the PPS function is enabled, the storm control type can ONLY be pps. If the PPS function is
disabled, the storm control type can be set as kbps or ratio.
11.3 Voice VLAN
Voice VLANs are configured specially for voice data stream. By configuring Voice VLANs and
adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLANs, you can perform QoS-related
configuration for voice data, ensuring the transmission priority of voice data stream and voice
quality.
OUI Address (Organizationally unique identifier address)
The switch can determine whether a received packet is a voice packet by checking its source MAC
address. If the source MAC address of a packet complies with the OUI addresses configured by
the system, the packet is determined as voice packet and transmitted in voice VLAN.
An OUI address is a unique identifier assigned by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) to a device vendor. It comprises the first 24 bits of a MAC address. You can recognize
which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address. The following table shows the
OUI addresses of several manufacturers. The following OUI addresses are preset of the switch by
default.
223
Number
OUI Address Vendor
1 00-01-e3-00-00-00 Siemens phone
2 00-03-6b-00-00-00 Cisco phone
3 00-04-0d-00-00-00 Avaya phone
4 00-60-b9-00-00-00 Philips/NEC phone
5 00-d0-1e-00-00-00 Pingtel phone
6 00-e0-75-00-00-00 Polycom phone
7 00-e0-bb-00-00-00 3com phone
Table 11-1 OUI addresses on the switch
Port Voice VLAN Mode
A voice VLAN can operate in two modes: automatic mode and manual mode.
Automatic Mode: In this mode, the switch automatically adds a port which receives voice packets
to voice VLAN and determines the priority of the packets through learning the source MAC of the
UNTAG packets sent from IP phone when it is powered on. The aging time of voice VLAN can be
configured on the switch. If the switch does not receive any voice packet on the ingress port within
the aging time, the switch will remove this port from voice VLAN. Voice ports are automatically
added into or removed from voice VLAN.
Manual Mode: You need to manually add the port of IP phone to voice VLAN, and then the switch
will assign ACL rules and configure the priority of the packets through learning the source MAC
address of packets and matching OUI address.
In practice, the port voice VLAN mode is configured according to the type of packets sent out from
voice device and the link type of the port. The following table shows the detailed information.
Port Voice
VLAN Mode
Voice
Stream Type Link type of the port and processing mode
Automatic Mode
TAG voice
stream
Untagged: Not supported.
Tagged: Supported. The default VLAN of the port cannot
be
voice VLAN.
UNTAG voice
stream
Untagged: Supported.
Tagged: Not supported.
Manual Mode
TAG voice
stream
Untagged: Not supported.
Tagged：Supported. The default VLAN of the port should
not
be voice VLAN.
UNTAG voice
stream
Untagged: Supported.
Tagged: Not supported.
Table 11-2 Port voice VLAN mode and voice stream processing mode
224
Security Mode of Voice VLAN
When voice VLAN is enabled for a port, you can configure its security mode to filter data stream. If
security mode is enabled, the port just forwards voice packets, and discards other packets whose
source MAC addresses do not match OUI addresses. If security mode is not enabled, the port
forwards all the packets.
Security Mode
Packet Type Processing Mode
Enable
UNTAG packet When the source MAC addre
ss of the packet is the OUI
address that can be identified, the packet can be
transmitted in the voice VLAN. Otherwise, the packet will
be discarded.
Packet with voice
VLAN TAG
Packet with other
VLAN TAG
The processing mode for the device to deal w
ith the packet
is determined by whether the port permits the VLAN or not,
independent of voice VLAN security mode.
Disable
UNTAG packet
Do not check the source MAC address of the packet and all
the packets can be transmitted in the voice VLAN.
Packet
with voice
VLAN TAG
Packet with other
VLAN TAG
The processing mode for the device to deal with the packet
is determined by whether the port permits the VLAN or
not, independent of voice VLAN security mode.
Table 11-3 Security mode and packets processing mode
Note:
Don’t transmit voice stream together with other business packets in the voice VLAN except for
some special requirements.
The Voice VLAN function can be implemented on Global Config, Port Config and OUI Config
pages.
11.3.1 Global Config
On this page, you can configure the global parameters of the voice VLAN, including VLAN ID and
aging time.
Choose the menu QoS→Voice VLAN→Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 11-12 Global Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
Voice VLAN: Select Enable/Disable Voice VLAN function.
225
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID of the voice VLAN.
Aging Time: Specifies the living time o
f the member port in auto mode after the
OUI address is aging out.
Priority: Select the priority of the port when sending voice data.
11.3.2 Port Config
Before the voice VLAN function is enabled, the parameters of the ports in the voice VLAN should
be configured on this page.
Choose the menu QoS→Voice VLAN→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 11-13 Port Config
Note:
To enable voice VLAN function for the LAG member port, please ensure its member state accords
with its port mode.
If a port is a member port of voice VLAN, changing its port mode to be “Auto” will make the port
leave the voice VLAN and will not join the voice VLAN automatically until it receives voice streams.
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Config
UNIT:1/LAGS: Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to configure the
link aggregation groups.
Select:
Select the desired port for voice VLAN configuration. It is
multi-optional.
226
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Port Mode: Select the mode for the port to join the voice VLAN.
Auto:
In this mode, the switch automatically adds a port to the
voice VLAN or removes a port from the voice VLAN by
checking whether the port receives voice data or not.
Manual:
In this mode, you can manually add a port to the voice
VLAN or remove a port from the voice VLAN.
Security Mode: Configure the security mode for forwarding packets.
Disable: All packets are forwarded.
Enable: Only voice data are forwarded.
Member State: Displays the state of the port in the current voice VLAN.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
11.3.3 OUI Config
The switch supports OUI creation and adds the MAC address of the special voice device to the
OUI table of the switch. The switch determines whether a received packet is a voice packet by
checking its OUI address. The switch analyzes the received packets. If the packets recognized as
voice packets, the access port will be automatically added to the Voice VLAN.
Choose the menu QoS→Voice VLAN→OUI Config to load the following page.
Figure 11-14 OUI Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create OUI
OUI: Enter the OUI address of the voice device.
Mask: Enter the OUI address mask of the voice device.
Description: Give a description to the OUI for identification.
227
OUI Table
Select: Select the desired entry to view the detailed information.
OUI: Displays the OUI address of the voice device.
Mask: Displays the OUI address mask of the voice device.
Description: Displays the description of the OUI.
Configuration Procedure of Voice VLAN:
Step Operation Description
1
Create VLAN Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config
page, click the Create button to create a VLAN.
2
Add OUI address Optional. On QoS→Voice VLAN→OUI Config page, you
can check whether the switch is supporting the OUI
template or not. If not, please add the OUI address.
3
Configure the parameters
of the ports in voice VLAN.
Required. On QoS→Voice VLAN→Port Config page,
configure the parameters of the ports in voice VLAN.
4
Enable Voice VLAN Required. On QoS→Voice VLAN→Global Config page,
configure the global parameters of voice VLAN.
Return to CONTENTS
228
Chapter 12 PoE
Note:
Only T2600G-28MPS support PoE function.
PoE (Power over Ethernet) technology describes a system to transmit electrical power along with
data to remote devices over standard twisted-pair cable in an Ethernet network. It is especially
useful for supplying power to IP telephones, wireless LAN access points, cameras and so on.
Composition
A PoE system usually consists of PSE and PD.
PSE: Power sourcing equipment (PSE) is a device such as a switch that provides power on the
Ethernet cable to the linked device.
PD: A powered device (PD) is a device accepting power from the PSE and thus consumes energy.
PDs fall into two types, standard PDs and nonstandard PDs. Standard PDs refer to the powered
devices that comply with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at. Examples include wireless LAN access
points, IP Phones, IP cameras, network hubs, embedded computers etc.
Advantage
Cheap cabling: The remote device such as cameras can be powered by PSE in no need
of prolonging its power cord additionally and Ethernet cable is much cheaper than AC
wire or power cord.
Easy to connect: PoE uses only one Ethernet cable with no need of external power
supply.
Reliable: A powered device can be either powered by PSE using Ethernet cable or
powered through the provided power adapter. It is very convenient to provide a backup
power supply for the PDs.
Flexibility: In compliance with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at, global organizations can
deploy PoE everywhere without concern for any local variance in AC power standards,
outlets, plugs, or reliability.
Wide use: It can be applied to wireless LAN access points, IP Phones, IP cameras,
network hubs, embedded computers etc.
T2600G-28MPS is a Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE). All the Auto-Negotiation RJ45 ports on
the switch support Power over Ethernet (PoE) function, which can automatically detect and supply
power for those powered devices (PDs) complying with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at. The
maximum power T2600G-28MPS can supply is 384W and the maximum power each PoE port can
supply is 30W.
PoE function can be configured in the two sections, PoE Config and PoE Time-Range.
12.1 PoE Config
All the RJ45 ports on the switch can be configured to supply power for the powered devices that
comply with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at. As the power every port or the system can provide is
limited, some attributes should be set to make full use of the power and guarantee the adequate
power to the linked PDs. When the power exceeds the maximum power limit or the power is
inadequate to power the device, the switch may disconnect the power supply to the PD linked to
the port with lower priority. When detecting a PD is unplugged, the switch will stop supplying the
power to the PD.
229
PoE Config, mainly for PoE attributes configuration, is implemented on PoE Config and PoE
Profile pages.
12.1.1 PoE Config
On this page, you can configure the parameters to implement PoE function.
Choose the menu PoE→PoE Config→PoE Config to load the following page.
Figure 12-1 PoE Config
The following items are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
System Power Limit:
Defines the max power the PoE switch can supply.
It ranges from
1W to 384W.
System Power
Consumption:
Displays the PoE switch's real time system power consumption.
System Power
Remain:
Displays the PoE switch's real time remaining system power.
Port Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding entry
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port to configure its parameters.
Port: Displays the port number.
PoE Status:
Select to disable/enable the PoE feature for the corresponding
port. If set e
nable, the corresponding port can supply power to the
linked PD (Powered Device).
230
PoE Priority:
The priority levels include High, Middle and Low in descending
order. When the supply power exceeds the system power limit,
the port with lower priority will s
top supplying power; If these ports
have the same priority levels, the port with smaller
port number
will stop supplying power first.
Power Limit
(0.1w-30w):
Defines the max power the corresponding port can supply. Class1
represents 4W, Class2 represents 7W, Class3 represents 15.4W
and Class4 represents 30W.
Time Range: Select the time range for the PoE port to supply power. If
No limit
is selected, the PoE port will supply power all the time.
PoE Profile: Select the profile you want to apply to the sele
cted port. If a PoE
Profile is selected, the three attributes including PoE Status, PoE
Priority and Power Limit are not available.
Power (W): Displays the port's real time power supply.
Current (mA): Displays the port's real time current.
Voltage (V): Displays the port's real time voltage.
PD Class: Displays the class the linked PD (Powered Device) belongs to.
Power Status: Displays the port's real time power status.
Note:
When Time Range is selected, the corresponding port's other PoE configurations would not work.
12.1.2 PoE Profile
PoE (Power over Ethernet) Profile is a short cut for the configuration of the PoE port. You can
create some profiles to be applied to the ports. In a profile, the PoE status, PoE priority and Power
limit are configured.
Choose the menu PoE→PoE Config→Profile Profile to load the following page.
Figure 12-2 Profile Config
The following items are displayed on this screen:
231
Create PoE Profile
Profile Name: Enter the name of the profile.
PoE Status:
Select to the enable/disable PoE feature for the corresponding
port. If set enable, the port may supply power to the linked PD
(Power Device).
PoE Priority:
The priority levels include High, Middle and Low in descending
order. When the s
upply power exceeds the system power limit,
the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be disconnected.
Power Limit:
Defines the max power the corresponding port can supply. Class1
represents 4W, Class2 represents 7W, Class3 represents 15.4W,
and Class4 represents 30W.
PoE Profile
Select: Select the desired profile to delete.
Profile Name: Displays the name of the profile.
PoE Status: Displays the PoE status of the port in the profile.
PoE Priority: Displays the PoE priority of the port in the profile.
Power Limit: Displays the max power the port in the profile can supply.
12.2 Time-Range
A time-range based PoE enables you to implement PoE power supply by differentiating the
time-ranges. A time-range can be specified for each port. The port will not supply power when the
specified time-range is configured and the system time is not within the time-range.
On this switch time-range consists of Holiday, Absolute and Periodic. A specific Time-range is the
intersection of Absolute Time and Periodic Time, combined with the Holiday you defined.
Absolute Time-range defines one or several time ranges with specific starting time and ending time
in the Gregorian calendar. Seven time ranges can be created at most, and their union is the
Absolute Time-range. Absolute Time-range does not recur. If no absolute time range is configured,
the Absolute Time-range takes effect from January 1, 2000 00:00 to December 31, 2099 24:00.
For example, under Absolute type, create time range 1 from January 1, 2015 00:00 to January 31,
2015 24:00, and time range 2 from March 1, 2015 00:00 to March 31, 2015 24:00, which makes
Absolute Time-range effective in both January and March.
Periodic Time-range defines one or several time ranges with specific starting time and ending time in
a week. Periodic Time-range recurs periodically on the day/days you configured in the week. Seven
time ranges can be created at most, and their union is the Periodic Time-range. If no periodic time
range is configured, the Periodic Time-range takes effect all the time from Monday to Sunday.
If the Holiday mode is configured as Include, the Time-range will be the intersection of the Absolute
Time and the Periodic Time.
If the Holiday mode is configure as Exclude, the Time range will be the intersection of the Absolute
Time and the Periodic Time, with Holiday excluded.
The Time-Range configuration can be implemented on Time-Range Summary, Time-Range
Create and Holiday Config pages.
232
12.2.1 Time-Range Summary
On this page you can view or delete the current Time-ranges.
Choose the menu PoE→Time-Range→Time-Range Summary to load the following page.
Figure 12-3 Time-Range Table
The following items are displayed on this screen:
Time-Range Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding time-range.
Index: Displays the index of the time-range.
Time-Range Name: Displays the name of the time-range.
Mode: Displays the mode of the time-
range. The mode can be one or a
combination of the following modes: Include/Exclude Holiday
,
Absolute and Periodic. Refer to Time-Range Create and
Holiday
Config for more details.
State Displays active state of the time-range.
Operation: Click Edit to modify this time-range and click Detail
to display the
complete information of this time–range.
12.2.2 Time-Range Create
On this page you can create time-ranges.
Choose the menu PoE→Time-Range→Time-Range Create to load the following page.
233
Figure 12-4 Time-Range Create
Note:
1. Up to 7 absolute time-ranges and 7 periodic time-ranges can be created in one Time-range.
2. If there is no entry in the Absolute Time table, the Absolute Time-range is from
2000/01/01-00:00 to 2099/12/31-24:00 by default.
3. If there is no entry in the Periodic Time table, the Periodic Time-range takes effect all the time
from Monday to Sunday by default.
The following items are displayed on this screen:
Time Range Config
Name: Enter the name of the time-range for time identification.
Holiday: Select Holiday mode. By default, the mode is Include.
Include: The Holiday has no effect on the Time-range
, which
means the final Time-
range will be the intersection of the Absolute
Time and Periodic Time.
Exclude: The final Ti
me range will be the intersection of the
Absolute Time and the Periodic Time, with Holiday excluded.
Add Absolute or Periodic
Type: Select the time range type, Absolute or Periodic.
Absolute Time-range defines up to 7 time ranges with
specific
starting ti
me and ending time in the Gregorian calendar. It does not
recur.
Periodic Time-range defines up to 7 time ranges with
specific
starting time and ending time in a week. Periodic Time-
range recurs
periodically on the day/days you configured in the week.
From Time: Set the start time of the absolute time range.
234
To Time: Set the end time of the absolute time range.
Absolute Time Table
Index: Displays the index of the absolute time range.
From Time: Displays start time of the absolute time range.
To Time: Displays end time of the absolute time range.
Operation: Click the Delete button to delete the corresponding time range.
Periodic Time Table
Index: Displays the index of the periodic time range.
Start Time: Displays the start time of the periodic time range.
End Time: Displays the end time of the periodic time range.
Day of the Week: Displays the recurring days in the periodic time range.
Operation: Click the Delete button to delete the corresponding time range.
12.2.3 Holiday Config
You can define holidays in this page. The holiday will be excluded from the Time-range you
created if the Holiday mode is Exclude.
Choose the menu PoE→Time-Range→Holiday Config to load the following page.
Figure 12-5 Holiday Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Holiday
Holiday Name: Enter the name of the holiday.
Start Date: Specify the start date of the holiday.
End Date: Specify the end date of the holiday.
Holiday Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding holiday.
Index: Displays the index of the holiday.
Holiday Name: Displays the name of the holiday.
Start Date: Displays the start date of the holiday.
235
Chapter 13 ACL
ACL (Access Control List) is used to filter packets by configuring match rules and process policies
of packets in order to control the access of the illegal users to the network. Besides, ACL functions
to control traffic flows and save network resources. It provides a flexible and secured access
control policy and facilitates you to control the network security.
On this switch, ACLs classify packets based on a series of match conditions, which can be L2-L4
protocol key fields carried in the packets. A time-range based ACL enables you to implement ACL
control over packets by differentiating the time-ranges.
The ACL module is mainly for ACL configuration of the switch, including four submenus:
Time-Range, ACL Config, Policy Config, ACL Binding and Policy Binding.
13.1 Time-Range
If a configured ACL is needed to be effective in a specified time-range, a time-range should be
firstly specified in the ACL. As the time-range based ACL takes effect only within the specified
time-range, data packets can be filtered by differentiating the time-ranges.
On this switch absolute time, week time and holiday can be configured. Configure an absolute time
section in the form of “the start date to the end date” to make ACLs effective; configure a week time
section to make ACLs effective on the fixed days of the week; configure a holiday section to make
ACLs effective on some special days. In each time-range, four time-slices can be configured.
The Time-Range configuration can be implemented on Time-Range Summary, Time-Range
Create and Holiday Config pages.
13.1.1 Time-Range Summary
On this page you can view the current time-ranges.
Choose the menu ACL→Time-Range→Time-Range Summary to load the following page.
Figure 13-1 Time-Range Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Time-Range Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding time-range.
Index: Displays the index of the time-range.
Time-Range Name: Displays the name of the time-range.
Slice: Displays the time-slice of the time-range.
Mode: Displays the mode the time-range adopts.
Operation: Click the Edit button to modify the time-range. Click the Detail
button
to display the complete information of this time–range.
237
13.1.2 Time-Range Create
On this page you can create time-ranges.
Choose the menu ACL→Time-Range→Time-Range Create to load the following page.
Figure 13-2 Time-Range Create
Note:
To successfully configure time-ranges, please firstly specify time-slices and then time-ranges.
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Time-Range
Name: Enter the name of the time-range for time identification.
Holiday: Select Holiday you set as a time-range.
The ACL rule based on this
time-range takes effect only when the system time is within the holiday.
Absolute: Select Absolute to configure absolute time-range.
The ACL rule based
on this time-
range takes effect only when the system time is within the
absolute time-range.
Week: Select Week to configure week time-range.
The ACL rule based on this
time-range takes effect only when the system time is within the
week
time-range.
Create Time-Slice
Start Time: Set the start time of the time-slice.
End Time: Set the end time of the time-slice.
Time-Slice Table
Index: Displays the index of the time-slice.
Start Time: Displays the start time of the time-slice.
238
End Time: Displays the end time of the time-slice.
Delete: Click the Delete button to delete the corresponding time-slice.
13.1.3 Holiday Config
Holiday mode is applied as a different secured access control policy from the week mode. On this
page you can define holidays according to your work arrangement.
Choose the menu ACL→Time-Range→Holiday Config to load the following page.
Figure 13-3 Holiday Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Holiday
Start Date: Specify the start date of the holiday.
End Date: Specify the end date of the holiday.
Holiday Name: Enter the name of the holiday.
Holiday Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding holiday.
Index: Displays the index of the holiday.
Holiday Name: Displays the name of the holiday.
Start Date: Displays the start date of the holiday.
End Date: Displays the end date of the holiday.
13.2 ACL Config
An ACL may contain a number of rules, and each rule specifies a different package range. Packets
are matched in match order. Once a rule is matched, the switch processes the matched packets
taking the operation specified in the rule without considering the other rules, which can enhance
the performance of the switch.
The ACL Config function can be implemented on ACL Summary, ACL Create, MAC ACL,
Standard-IP ACL, Extend-IP ACL, Combined ACL and IPv6 ACL pages.
13.2.1 ACL Summary
On this page, you can view the current ACLs configured in the switch.
239
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→ACL Summary to load the following page.
Figure 13-4 ACL Summary
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
Select ACL: Select the ACL you have created
ACL Type: Displays the type of the ACL you select.
Rule Order: Displays the rule order of the ACL you select.
13.2.2 ACL Create
On this page you can create ACLs.
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→ACL Create to load the following page.
Figure 13-5 ACL Create
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
ACL Create
ACL ID: Enter ACL ID of the ACL you want to create.
Rule Order: User Config order is set to be match order in this ACL.
13.2.3 MAC ACL
MAC ACLs analyze and process packets based on a series of match conditions, which can be the
source MAC addresses and destination MAC addresses carried in the packets.
240
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→MAC ACL to load the following page.
Figure 13-6 Create MAC Rule
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create MAC-Rule
ACL ID: Select the desired MAC ACL for configuration.
Rule ID: Enter the rule ID.
Operation:
Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match
the rules.
Permit: Forward packets.
Deny: Discard Packets.
S-MAC: Enter the source MAC address contained in the rule.
D-MAC: Enter the destination MAC address contained in the rule.
MASK:
Enter MAC address mask. If it is set to 1, it must strictly match the
address.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID contained in the rule.
EtherType: Enter EtherType contained in the rule.
User Priority: Select the user priority contain
ed in the rule for the tagged packets
to match.
Time-Range: Select the time-range for the rule to take effect.
241
13.2.4 Standard-IP ACL
Standard-IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, which
can be the source IP addresses and destination IP addresses carried in the packets.
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL to load the following page.
Figure 13-7 Create Standard-IP Rule
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Standard-IP ACL
ACL ID: Select the desired Standard-IP ACL for configuration.
Rule ID: Enter the rule ID.
Operation:
Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match
the rules.
Permit: Forward packets.
Deny: Discard Packets.
S-IP: Enter the source IP address contained in the rule.
D-IP: Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule.
Mask:
Enter IP address mask. If it is set to 1, it must strictly match the
address.
Time-Range: Select the time-range for the rule to take effect.
242
13.2.5 Extend-IP ACL
Extend-IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, which
can be the source IP addresses, destination IP addresses, IP protocol and other information of this
sort carried in the packets.
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→Extend-IP ACL to load the following page.
Figure 13-8 Create Extend-IP Rule
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Extend-IP ACL
ACL ID: Select the desired Extend-IP ACL for configuration.
Rule ID: Enter the rule ID.
Operation:
Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the
rules.
Permit: Forward packets.
Deny: Discard Packets.
Fragment:
Select if the rule will take effect on the fragment packets. When the
fragment is selected, this rule will process
all the fragments and the
last piece of fragment will be always forwarded.
S-IP: Enter the source IP address contained in the rule.
D-IP: Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule.
Mask: Enter IP address mask. If it is set to 1, it must str
ictly match the
address.
IP Protocol: Select IP protocol contained in the rule.
243
TCP Flag
：
Configure TCP flag when TCP is selected from the pull-
down list of IP
Protocol.
S-Port:
Configure TCP/IP source port contained in the rule when TCP/UDP is
selected from the pull-down list of IP Protocol.
D-Port: Configure TCP/IP destination por
t contained in the rule when
TCP/UDP is selected from the pull-down list of IP Protocol.
DSCP: Enter the DSCP information contained in the rule.
IP ToS: Enter the IP ToS contained in the rule.
IP Pre: Enter the IP Precedence contained in the rule.
Time-Range: Select the time-range for the rule to take effect.
13.2.6 Combined ACL
Combined ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, which
can be the source MAC addresses, destination MAC addresses source IP addresses, destination
IP addresses and other information of this sort carried in the packets.
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→Combined ACL to load the following page.
Figure 13-9 Combined ACL
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create combined Rule
ACL ID: Select the desired Combined ACL for configuration.
Rule ID: Enter the rule ID.
Operation:
Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the
rules.
Permit: Forward packets.
Deny: Discard Packets.
244
S-MAC: Enter the source MAC address contained in the rule.
D-MAC: Enter the destination MAC address contained in the rule.
Mask:
Enter IP address mask. If it is set to 1, it must strictly match the
address.
VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID contained in the rule.
EtherType Enter EtherType contained in the rule.
User Priority
Select the user priority contained in the rule for the tagged packets to
match.
Fragment:
Select if the rule will take effect on the fragment packets. When the
fragment is selecte
d, this rule will process all the fragments and the
last piece of fragment will be always forwarded.
S-IP: Enter the source IP address contained in the rule.
D-IP: Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule.
Mask: Enter IP address mask. If
it is set to 1, it must strictly match the
address.
Time-Range: Select the time-range for the rule to take effect.
Note:
Before binding a Combined ACL to an interface or VLAN, you should configure the SDM template
as “default” or “enterpriseV4” and save your configurations. See SDM Template for more
information about SDM template configuration.
13.2.7 IPv6 ACL
IPv6 ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, such as the
source IPv6 addresses, destination IPv6 addresses and port number carried in the packets.
245
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→IPv6 ACL to load the following page.
Figure 13-10 IPv6 ACL Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Extend-IP ACL
ACL ID: Select the desired IPv6 ACL for configuration.
Rule ID: Enter the rule ID.
Operation:
Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the
rules.
Permit: Forward packets.
Deny: Discard Packets.
DSCP: Enter the DSCP information contained in the rule.
Flow Label: Enter the Flow Label information contained in the rule.
IPv6 Source IP: Click to enable the IPv6 source IP verification.
S-IP: Enter the source IPv6 address contained in the rule, you ca
n
input all the 128 bits, but only upper 64 bits are verified.
Mask: Enter IP address mask. If it is set to 1, the
upper 64 bits in the
source address of the packet must strictly match the S-
IP you
configured. This field is 64-bit long.
IPv6 Destination IP: Click to enable the IPv6 destination IP verification.
246
D-IP: Enter the destination
IPv6 address contained in the rule, you can
input all the 128 bits, but only upper 64 bits are verified.
Mask: Enter IP address mask. If it is set to 1, the upper 64 bit
s in the
destination address of the packet must strictly match the D-
IP you
configured. This field is 64-bit long.
S-Port: Configure L4
source port contained in the rule when TCP/UDP is
defined.
D-Port: Configure L4 destination port contained in the rule
when TCP/UDP is
defined.
Time-Range: Select the time-range for the rule to take effect.
Note:
Before binding an IPv6 ACL to an interface or VLAN, you should configure the SDM template as
“enterpriseV6” and save your configurations. See SDM Template for more information about SDM
template configuration.
13.3 Policy Config
A Policy is used to control the data packets those match the corresponding ACL rules by
configuring ACLs and actions together for effect.
The Policy Config can be implemented on Policy Summary, Police Create and Action Create
pages.
13.3.1 Policy Summary
On this page, you can view the ACL and the corresponding operations in the policy.
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Config→Policy Summary to load the following page.
Figure 13-11 Policy Summary
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
Select Policy: Select name of the desired policy for
view. If you want to delete the
desired policy, please click the Delete button.
Action Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding policy.
Index: Displays the index of the policy.
ACL ID: Displays the ID of the ACL contained in the policy.
247
S-Mirror: Displays the source mirror port of the policy.
S-Condition: Displays the source condition added to the policy.
Redirect: Displays the redirect added to the policy.
QoS Remark: Displays the QoS remark added to the policy.
Operation: Edit the information of this action.
13.3.2 Policy Create
On this page you can create the policy.
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Config→Policy Create to load the following page.
Figure 13-12 Create Policy
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Policy
Policy Name: Enter the name of the policy.
13.3.3 Action Create
On this page you can add ACLs for the policy.
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Config→Action Create to load the following page.
Figure 13-13 Action Create
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Action
248
Select Policy: Select the name of the policy.
Select ACL: Select the ACL for configuration in the policy.
S-Mirror: Select S-Mirro
r to mirror the data packets in the policy to the specific
port.
S-Condition: Select S-
Condition to limit the transmission rate of the data packets in
the policy.
Rate:
Specify the forwarding rate of the data packets those match
the corresponding ACL.
Out of Band:
Specify the disposal way of the data packets those
are transmitted beyond the rate.
Redirect:
Select Redirect to change the forwarding direction of the data packets
in the policy.
Destination Port:
Forward the data packets those match the
corresponding ACL to the specific port.
QoS Remark:
Select QoS Remark to forward the data packets based on the QoS
settings.
DSCP:
Specify the DSCP region for the data packets those match
the corresponding ACL.
Local Priority: Specify the local priority for the data packets those
match the corresponding ACL.
13.4 ACL Binding
ACL Binding function can have the ACL take its effect on a specific port/VLAN. The ACL will take
effect only when it is bound to a port/VLAN. In the same way, the port/VLAN will receive the data
packets and process them based on the ACL only when the ACL is bound to the port/VLAN.
The ACL Binding can be implemented on Binding Table, Port Binding and VLAN Binding
pages.
249
13.4.1 Binding Table
On this page view the ACL bound to port/VLAN.
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Binding→Binding Table to load the following page.
Figure 13-14 Binding Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
Show Mode: Select a show mode appropriate to your needs.
ACL VLAN-Bind Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding binding ACL.
Index: Displays the index of the binding ACL.
ACL ID: Displays the ID of the binding ACL.
Interface: Displays the port number or VLAN ID bound to the ACL.
Direction: Displays the binding direction.
ACL Port-Bind Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding binding ACL.
Index: Displays the index of the binding ACL.
ACL ID: Displays the ID of the binding ACL.
Interface: Displays the port number or VLAN ID bound to the ACL.
Direction: Displays the binding direction.
250
13.4.2 Port Binding
On this page you can bind an ACL to a port.
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Binding→Port Binding to load the following page.
Figure 13-15 Bind the policy to the port
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port-Bind Config
ACL ID: Select the ID of the ACL you want to bind.
Port: Select the number of the port you want to bind.
Port-Bind Table
Index: Displays the index of the binding ACL.
ACL ID: Displays the ID of the binding ACL.
Port: Displays the number of the port bound to the corresponding ACL.
Direction: Displays the binding direction.
251
13.4.3 VLAN Binding
On this page you can bind an ACL to a VLAN.
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Binding→VLAN Binding to load the following page.
Figure 13-16 Bind the policy to the VLAN
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN-Bind Config
ACL ID: Select the ID of the ACL you want to bind.
VLAN ID: Enter the ID of the VLAN you want to bind.
VLAN-Bind Table
Index: Displays the index of the binding ACL.
ACL ID: Displays the ID of the binding ACL.
VLAN ID: Displays the ID of the VLAN bound to the corresponding ACL.
Direction: Displays the binding direction.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Configure ACL rules Required. On ACL→ACL Config
configuration pages,
configure ACL rules to match packets.
2
Bind the ACL
to the
port/VLAN
Required. On ACL→ACL Binding
configuration pages,
bind the ACL to the port/VLAN to make the ACL effective on
the corresponding port/VLAN.
13.5 Policy Binding
Policy Binding function can have the policy take its effect on a specific port/VLAN. The policy will
take effect only when it is bound to a port/VLAN. In the same way, the port/VLAN will receive the
data packets and process them based on the policy only when the policy is bound to the
port/VLAN.
The Policy Binding can be implemented on Binding Table, Port Binding and VLAN Binding
pages.
252
13.5.1 Binding Table
On this page view the policy bound to port/VLAN.
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Binding→Binding Table to load the following page.
Figure 13-17 Binding Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
Show Mode: Select a show mode appropriate to your needs.
Policy VLAN-Bind Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding binding policy.
Index: Displays the index of the binding policy.
Policy Name: Displays the name of the binding policy.
Interface: Displays the port number or VLAN ID bound to the policy.
Direction: Displays the binding direction.
Policy Port-Bind Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding binding policy.
Index: Displays the index of the binding policy.
Policy Name: Displays the name of the binding policy.
Interface: Displays the port number or VLAN ID bound to the policy.
Direction: Displays the binding direction.
253
13.5.2 Port Binding
On this page you can bind a policy to a port.
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Binding→Port Binding to load the following page.
Figure 13-18 Bind the policy to the port
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port-Bind Config
Policy Name: Select the name of the policy you want to bind.
Port: Select the number of the port you want to bind.
Port-Bind Table
Index: Displays the index of the binding policy.
Policy Name: Displays the name of the binding policy.
Port:
Displays the number of the port bound to the corresponding policy.
Direction: Displays the binding direction.
254
13.5.3 VLAN Binding
On this page you can bind a policy to a VLAN.
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Binding→VLAN Binding to load the following page.
Figure 13-19 Bind the policy to the VLAN
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN-Bind Config
Policy Name: Select the name of the policy you want to bind.
VLAN ID: Enter the ID of the VLAN you want to bind.
VLAN-Bind Table
Index: Displays the index of the binding policy.
Policy Name: Displays the name of the binding policy.
VLAN ID: Displays the ID of the VLAN bound to the corresponding policy.
Direction: Displays the binding direction.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Configure ACL rules Required. On ACL→ACL Config
configuration pages,
configure ACL rules to match packets.
2
Configure Policy Required. On ACL→Policy Config
configuration pages,
configure the policy to control the data packets those match
the corresponding ACL rules.
3
Bind the policy to the
port/VLAN
Required. On ACL→Policy Binding configuration pages,
bind the policy to the port/VLAN to make the policy effective
on the corresponding port/VLAN.
13.6 Application Example for ACL
Network Requirements
1. The manager of the R&D department can access to the forum of the company and the Internet
without any forbiddance. The MAC address of the manager is 00-64-A5-5D-12-C3.
2. The staff of the R&D department cannot access to the Internet but can visit the forum.
255
3. The staff of the marketing department can access to the Internet but cannot visit the forum.
4. The R&D department and marketing department cannot communicate with each other.
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Step Operation Description
1
Configure for
requirement 1
On ACL→ACL Config→ACL Create page, create ACL 11.
On ACL→ACL Config→MAC ACL page, select ACL 11, create Rule 1,
configure the operation as Permit, configure the S-
MAC as
00-64-A5-5D-12-C3 and mask as FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-F F.
On ACL→Policy Config→Policy Create page, create a policy named
manager.
On ACL→Policy Config→Action Create
page, add ACL 11 to Policy
manager.
On ACL→Policy Binding→Port Binding page, select Policy manager
to bind to port 3.
256
Step Operation Description
2
Configure for
requirement 2
and 4
On ACL→ACL Config→ACL Create page, create ACL 500.
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL page, select ACL 500,
create Rule 1, configure operation as Deny, configure S-
IP as
10.10.70.0 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.50.0
and mask as 255.255.255.0.
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL page, select ACL 500,
create Rule 2, configure operation as Deny, configure S-
IP as
10.10.70.0 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.88.5
and mask as 255.255.255.255.
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL page, select ACL 500,
create Rule 3, configure operation as Permit, configure S-
IP as
10.10.70.0 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.88.5
and mask as 255.255.255.255.
On ACL→Policy Config→Policy Create page, create a policy named
limit1.
On ACL→Policy Config→Action Create page, add ACL 500 to Policy
limit1.
On ACL→Policy Binding→Port Binding
page, select Policy limit1 to
bind to port 3.
3
Configure for
requirement 3
and 4
On ACL→ACL Config→ACL Create page, create ACL 501.
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL page, select ACL 501,
create Rule 4, configure operation as Deny, configure S-
IP as
10.10.50.0 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.70.0
and mask as 255.255.255.0.
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL page, select ACL 501,
create Rule 5, configure operation as Deny, configure S-
IP as
10.10.50.0 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.88.5
and mask as 255.255.255.255.
On ACL→Policy Config→Policy Create page, create a policy named
limit2.
On ACL→Policy Config→Action Create page, add ACL 501 to Policy
limit2.
On ACL→Policy Binding→Port Binding
page, select Policy limit2 to
bind to port 4.
Return to CONTENTS
257
Chapter 14 Network Security
Network Security module is to provide the multiple protection measures for the network security,
including five submenus: IP-MAC Binding, IPv6-MAC Binding, DHCP Snooping, DHCPv6
Snooping, ARP Inspection, ND Detection, IP Source Guard, DoS Defend, 802.1X, PPPoE and
AAA. Please configure the functions appropriate to your need.
14.1 IP-MAC Binding
The IP-MAC Binding function allows you to bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the
connected Port number of the Host together. Basing on the IP-MAC binding table, ARP Inspection
and IP Source Guard functions can control the network access and only allow the Hosts matching
the bound entries to access the network.
The following three IP-MAC Binding methods are supported by the switch.
(1) Manually: You can manually bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port
number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the
LAN.
(2) Scanning: You can quickly get the information of the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID
and the connected port number of the Hosts in the LAN via the ARP Scanning function,
and bind them conveniently. You are only requested to enter the IP address on the ARP
Scanning page for the scanning.
(3) DHCP Snooping: You can use DHCP Snooping functions to monitor the process of the
Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server, and record the IP address, MAC address,
VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding.
These three methods are also considered as the sources of the IP-MAC Binding entries. The
entries from various sources should be different from one another to avoid collision. Among the
entries in collision, only the entry from the source with the highest priority will take effect. These
three sources (Manual, Scanning and Snooping) are in descending order of priority.
The IP-MAC Binding function is implemented on the Binding Table, Manual Binding and ARP
Scanning pages.
14.1.1 Binding Table
On this page, you can view the information of the bound entries.
Choose the menu Network Security→IP-MAC Binding→Binding Table to load the following
page.
Figure 14-1 Binding Table
258
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search
Source:
Displays the Source of the entry.
• All: All the bound entries will be displayed.
• Manual:
Only the manually added entries will be
displayed.
• Scanning:
Only the entries formed via ARP Scanning
will be displayed.
• Snooping:
Only the entries formed via DHCP Snooping
will be displayed.
IP Select
Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding
entry based on the IP address you entered.
Binding Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to modify the Host Name and Protect
Type. It is multi-optional.
Host Name
Displays the Host Name here.
IP Address
Displays the IP Address of the Host.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC Address of the Host.
VLAN ID:
Displays the VLAN ID here.
Port:
Displays the number of port connected to the Host.
Protect Type:
Allows you to view and modify the Protect Type of the entry.
Source
: Displays the Source of the entry.
Collision:
Displays the Collision status of the entry.
• Warning:
Indicates that the collision may be caused by the
MSTP function.
• Critical:
Indicates that the entry has a collision with the
other entries.
Note:
Among the entries with Critical collision level, the one with the highest Source priority will take
effect.
14.1.2 Manual Binding
You can manually bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together in
the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN.
259
Choose the menu Network Security→IP-MAC Binding→Manual Binding to load the following
page.
Figure 14-2 Manual Binding
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Manual Binding Option
Host Name:
Enter the Host Name.
IP Address:
Enter the IP Address of the Host.
MAC Address:
Enter the MAC Address of the Host.
VLAN ID:
Enter the VLAN ID.
Protect Type:
Select the Protect Type for the entry.
Port:
Select the number of port connected to the Host.
Manual Binding Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to be deleted. It is multi-optional.
Host Name:
Displays the Host Name here.
IP Address:
Displays the IP Address of the Host.
MAC Address:
Displays the MAC Address of the Host.
VLAN ID:
Displays the VLAN ID here.
Port:
Displays the number of port connected to the Host.
Protect Type:
Displays the Protect Type of the entry.
Source:
Displays the source of the entry.
260
Collision:
Displays the Collision status of the entry.
• Warning:
Indicates that the collision may be caused by the
MSTP function.
• Critical:
Indicates that the entry has a collision with the
other entries.
14.1.3 ARP Scanning
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) is used to analyze and map IP addresses to the corresponding
MAC addresses so that packets can be delivered to their destinations correctly. IP address is the
address of the Host on Network layer. MAC address, the address of the Host on Data link layer, is
necessary for the packet to reach the very device. So the destination IP address carried in a
packet need to be translated into the corresponding MAC address.
ARP functions to translate the IP address into the corresponding MAC address and maintain an
ARP Table, where the latest used IP address-to-MAC address mapping entries are stored. When
the Host communicates with a strange Host, ARP works as the following figure shown.
Figure 14-3 ARP Implementation Procedure
(1) Suppose there are two hosts in the LAN: Host A and Host B. To send a packet to Host B, Host
A checks its own ARP Table first to see if the ARP entry related to the IP address of Host B
exists. If yes, Host A will directly send the packets to Host B. If the corresponding MAC
address is not found in the ARP Table, Host A will broadcast ARP request packet, which
contains the IP address of Host B, the IP address of Host A, and the MAC address of Host A,
in the LAN.
(2) Since the ARP request packet is broadcasted, all hosts in the LAN can receive it. However,
only the Host B recognizes and responds to the request. Host B sends back an ARP reply
packet to Host A, with its MAC address carried in the packet.
(3) Upon receiving the ARP reply packet, Host A adds the IP address and the corresponding
MAC address of Host B to its ARP Table for the further packets forwarding.
ARP Scanning function enables the switch to send the ARP request packets of the specified IP
field to the Hosts in the LAN or VLAN. Upon receiving the ARP reply packet, the switch can get the
IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected port number of the Host by analyzing the
packet and bind them conveniently.
261
Choose the menu Network Security→IP-MAC Binding→ARP Scanning to load the following
page.
Figure 14-4 ARP Scanning
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Scanning Option
Start IP Address:
Specify the Start IP Address.
End IP
Address: Specify the End IP Address.
VLAN ID:
Enter the VLAN ID.
Scan:
Click the Scan button to scan the Hosts in the LAN.
Scanning Result
Select:
Select the desired entry to be deleted or bound. It is
multi-optional.
Host Name:
Displays the Host Name here.
IP Address:
Displays the IP Address of the Host.
MAC Address:
Displays the MAC Address of the Host.
VLAN ID:
Displays the VLAN ID here.
Port:
Displays the number of port connected to the Host.
Protect Type:
Displays the Protect Type of the entry.
Source:
Displays the source of the entry.
Collision:
Displays the Collision status of the entry.
• Warning:
Indicates that the collision may be caused by the
MSTP function.
• Critical:
Indicates that the entry has a collision with the
other entries.
14.2 IPv6-MAC Binding
The IPv6-MAC Binding function allows you to bind the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN ID and
the connected Port number of the Host together. Basing on the IPv6-MAC binding table, ND
262
detection and IPv6 Source Guard functions can control the network access and only allow the
Hosts matching the bound entries to access the network.
The following three IPv6-MAC Binding methods are supported by the switch.
(1) Manually: You can manually bind the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port
number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in
the LAN.
(2) ND Snooping: You can use ND Snooping functions to monitor the process of the
duplication address detection, And record the IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the
connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding.
(3) DHCP Snooping: You can use DHCPv6 Snooping functions to monitor the process of the
Host obtaining the IPv6 address from DHCPv6 server, and record the IPv6 address, MAC
address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding.
These three methods are also considered as the sources of the IPv6-MAC Binding entries. The
entries from various sources should be different from one another to avoid collision. Among the
entries in collision, only the entry from the source with the highest priority will take effect. These
three sources (Manual, DHCP Snooping, ND Snooping) are in descending order of priority.
The IPv6-MAC Binding function is implemented on the Binding Table, Manual Binding and ND
Snooping pages.
14.2.1 Binding Table
On this page, you can view the information of the IPv6-related bound entries.
Choose the menu Network Security→IPv6-MAC Binding→Binding Table to load the following
page.
Figure 14-5 Binding Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search
Source:
Displays the Source of the entry.
• All: All the bound entries will be displayed.
• Manual:
Only the manually added entries will be
displayed.
• ND Snooping: Only the entries generated via ND
snooping will be displayed.
263
• DHCP Snooping: Only the entries generated via DHCP
Snooping will be displayed.
IP Select
Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding
entry based on the IPv6 address you entered.
Binding Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to modify the Host Name and Protect
Type. It is multi-optional.
Host Name
Displays the Host Name here.
IP A
ddress Displays the IPv6 Address of the Host.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC Address of the Host.
VLAN ID:
Displays the VLAN ID here.
Port:
Displays the number of port connected to the Host.
Protect Type:
Allows you to view and modify the Protect Type of the entry.
Active Status:
Displays the active status of the entry.
Source:
Displays the Source of the entry.
Collision:
Displays the Collision status of the entry.
• Warning:
Indicates that the collision may be caused by the
MSTP function.
• Critical: Indi
cates that the entry has a collision with the
other entries.
Note:
Among the entries with Critical collision level, the one with the highest Source priority will take
effect.
14.2.2 Manual Binding
You can manually bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together in
the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN.
264
Choose the menu Network Security→IPv6-MAC Binding→Manual Binding to load the
following page.
Figure 14-6 Manual Binding
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Manual Binding Option
Host Name:
Enter the Host Name.
IP Address:
Enter the IPv6 Address of the Host.
MAC Address:
Enter the MAC Address of the Host.
VLAN ID:
Enter the VLAN ID.
Protect Type:
Select the Protect Type for the entry.
Port:
Select the number of port connected to the Host.
Manual Binding Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to be deleted. It is multi-optional.
Host Name:
Displays the Host Name here.
IP Address:
Displays the IP Address of the Host.
MAC Address:
Displays the MAC Address of the Host.
VLAN ID:
Displays the VLAN ID here.
Port:
Displays the number of port connected to the Host.
Protect Type:
Displays the Protect Type of the entry.
Active Status
: Displays the active status of the entry.
265
Collision:
Displays the Collision status of the entry.
• Warning: Indicates that the collision may be
caused by the
MSTP function.
• Critical:
Indicates that the entry has a collision with the
other entries.
14.2.3 ND Snooping
ND snooping maintains an ND snooping table using the DAD NS messages in IPv6. ND snooping
entries in this table is used to:
• Cooperate with the IPv6-MAC binding.
• Cooperate with the ND detection feature.
• Cooperate with the IPv6 Source Guard feature.
1. Creating an ND snooping entry
The switch only uses received DAD NS messages to create ND snooping entries.
2. Updating an ND snooping entry
Upon receiving an ND packet, the switch searches the ND snooping table for an entry containing
the source IPv6 address of the packet. The switch matches the ND packet’s MAC address and
the receiving port against that in the entry.
• If both of them match those in the entry, the switch updates the aging time in this ND snooping
entry.
• If neither of them matches the entry, the switch initiates a verification process.
1) The switch checks the validity of the existing ND snooping entry.
The switch sends out an NS message according to the ND snooping entry. If a
corresponding NA message (whose source IPv6 address, source MAC address, receiving
port, and source VLAN are consistent with those of the existing entry) is received, the
device updates the aging time of the existing entry. If no corresponding NA message is
received within one second after the NS message is sent, the device starts to check the
validity of the received ND packet.
2) The switch checks the validity of the received ND packet.
The switch sends out an NS message to verify the reachability of the ND packet (marked
as packet A). The NS message’s destination IPv6 address is specified as the source IPv6
address of packet A. If a corresponding NA message (whose source IPv6 address, source
MAC address, receiving port, and source VLAN are consistent with those of packet A) is
received, the switch updates the existing entry. If no corresponding NA message is
received within one second after the NS message is sent, the switch deletes the entry.
3. Aging out an ND snooping entry
An ND snooping entry is aged out after 120 minutes. If an ND snooping entry is not updated
within 60 minutes, the switch initiates a verification. The switch sends out an NS message
including the IPv6 address of the ND snooping entry.
• If a corresponding NA message is received (the source IPv6 address, source MAC address,
receiving port, and source VLAN are consistent with those of the existing entry), the switch
updates the aging time of the existing entry.
• If no corresponding NA message is received within one second after the NS message is sent
266
out, the switch removes the entry when the timer expires.
Choose the menu Network Security→IPv6-MAC Binding→ND Snooping to load the following
page.
Figure 14-7 ARP Scanning
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
ND Snooping
N
D Snooping: Enable/Disable the ND Snooping function globally.
VLAN ID:
Enable/Disable the ND
Snooping function in the specified
VLAN.
VLAN Configuration
Display
:
Displays the VLANs with ND Snooping function enabled.
Port Configure
UN I T: 1:
Click 1 to configure the physical ports.
267
Select:
Select your desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port:
Displays the number of port.
Maximum Entry
:
Configure the max ND binding entries a port can learn via ND
snooping.
LAG
: Displays the LAG which the port belongs to.
14.3 DHCP Snooping
Nowadays, the network is getting larger and more complicated. The amount of the PCs always
exceeds that of the assigned IP addresses. The wireless network and the laptops are widely used
and the locations of the PCs are always changed. Therefore, the corresponding IP address of the
PC should be updated with a few configurations. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol),
the network configuration protocol optimized and developed basing on the BOOTP, functions to
solve the above mentioned problems.
DHCP Working Principle
DHCP works via the “Client/Server” communication mode. The Client applies to the Server for
configuration. The Server assigns the configuration information, such as the IP address, to the
Client, so as to reach a dynamic employ of the network source. A Server can assign the IP
address for several Clients, which is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 14-8 Network diagram for DHCP-snooping implementation
For different DHCP Clients, DHCP Server provides three IP address assigning methods:
(1) Manually assign the IP address: Allows the administrator to bind the static IP address to
the specific Client (e.g.: WWW Server) via the DHCP Server.
(2) Automatically assign the IP address: DHCP Server assigns the IP address without an
expiration time limitation to the Clients.
(3) Dynamically assign the IP address: DHCP Server assigns the IP address with an
expiration time. When the time for the IP address expired, the Client should apply for a
new one.
268
The most Clients obtain the IP addresses dynamically, which is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 14-9 Interaction between a DHCP client and a DHCP server
(1) DHCP-DISCOVER Stage: The Client broadcasts the DHCP-DISCOVER packet to find the
DHCP Server.
(2) DHCP-OFFER Stage: Upon receiving the DHCP-DISCOVER packet, the DHCP Server
selects an IP address from the IP pool according to the assigning priority of the IP
addresses and replies to the Client with DHCP-OFFER packet carrying the IP address and
other information.
(3) DHCP-REQUEST Stage: In the situation that there are several DHCP Servers sending the
DHCP-OFFER packets, the Client will only respond to the first received DHCP-OFFER
packet and broadcast the DHCP-REQUEST packet which includes the assigned IP
address of the DHCP-OFFER packet.
(4) DHCP-ACK Stage: Since the DHCP-REQUEST packet is broadcasted, all DHCP Servers
on the network segment can receive it. However, only the requested Server processes the
request. If the DHCP Server acknowledges assigning this IP address to the Client, it will
send the DHCP-ACK packet back to the Client. Otherwise, the Server will send the
DHCP-NAK packet to refuse assigning this IP address to the Client.
Option 82
The DHCP packets are classified into 8 types with the same format basing on the format of
BOOTP packet. The difference between DHCP packet and BOOTP packet is the Option field. The
Option field of the DHCP packet is used to expand the function, for example, the DHCP can
transmit the control information and network parameters via the Option field, so as to assign the IP
address to the Client dynamically. For the details of the DHCP Option, please refer to RFC 2132.
Option 82 records the location of the DHCP Client. Upon receiving the DHCP-REQUEST packet,
the switch adds the Option 82 to the packet and then transmits the packet to DHCP Server.
Administrator can be acquainted with the location of the DHCP Client via Option 82 so as to locate
the DHCP Client for fulfilling the security control and account management of Client. The Server
supported Option 82 also can set the distribution policy of IP addresses and the other parameters
according to the Option 82, providing more flexible address distribution way.
269
Option 82 can contain 255 sub-options at most. If Option 82 is defined, at least a sub-option
should be defined. This switch supports two sub-options: Circuit ID and Remote ID. Since there is
no universal standard about the content of Option 82, different manufacturers define the
sub-options of Option 82 to their need. For this switch, the sub-options are defined as the following:
The Circuit ID is defined to be the number of the port which receives the DHCP Request packets
and its VLAN number. The Remote ID is defined to be the MAC address of DHCP Snooping
device which receives the DHCP Request packets from DHCP Clients.
DHCP Cheating Attack
During the working process of DHCP, generally there is no authentication mechanism between
Server and Client. If there are several DHCP servers in the network, network confusion and
security problem will happen. The common cases incurring the illegal DHCP servers are the
following two:
(1) It’s common that the illegal DHCP server is manually configured by the user by mistake.
(2) Hacker exhausted the IP addresses of the normal DHCP server and then pretended to be
a legal DHCP server to assign the IP addresses and the other parameters to Clients. For
example, hacker used the pretended DHCP server to assign a modified DNS server
address to users so as to induce the users to the evil financial website or electronic trading
website and cheat the users of their accounts and passwords. The following figure
illustrates the DHCP Cheating Attack implementation procedure.
Figure 14-10 DHCP Cheating Attack Implementation Procedure
DHCP Snooping feature only allows the port connected to the DHCP Server as the trusted port to
forward all types of DHCP packets and thereby ensures that users get proper IP addresses. DHCP
Snooping is to monitor the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server, and
record the IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for
automatic binding. The bound entry can cooperate with the ARP Inspection, IP Source Guard and
the other security protection features. DHCP Snooping feature prevents the network from the
DHCP Server Cheating Attack by discarding the DHCP response packets on the distrusted port,
so as to enhance the network security.
270
14.3.1 Global Config
Choose the menu Network Security→DHCP Snooping→Global Config to load the following
page.
Figure 14-11 DHCP Snooping
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
DHCP Snooping Configuration
DHCP Snoop
ing: Enable/Disable the DHCP Snooping function globally.
VLAN ID
:
Enable/Disable the DHCP Snooping function in the specified
VLAN.
VLAN Configuration
Display
:
Display the VLANs which enable DHCP Snooping function.
271
14.3.2 Port Config
Choose the menu Network Security→DHCP Snooping→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 14-12 DHCP Snooping
DHCP Snooping Port Configuration
UNIT:1/LAGS:
Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to
configure the link aggregation groups.
Select:
Select your desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port:
Displays the port number.
Trusted Port:
Select Enable/Disable the port to be a Trusted Port. Only the
Trusted Port can receive the DHCP packets from DHCP
servers.
MAC Verify:
Select Enable/Disable the MAC Verify feature. There are two
fields of the DHCP packet containing the MAC address of the
Host. The MAC Verify feature is to compare the two fields and
discard the packet if the two fields are different.
Ra
te Limit:
Select the value to specify the maximum amount of DHCP
messages that can be forwarded by the switch of this port per
second. The excessive DHCP packets will be discarded.
Decline Protect:
Select the value to specify the maximum amount of DHCP
de
cline packets that can be forwarded by the switch of this
port per second. The excessive DHCP decline packets will be
discarded.
272
LAG:
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs.
14.3.3 Option 82 Config
The switch can propagate the control information and the network parameters via the Option 82
field to provide more information for the Host. When the DHCP option 82 feature is enabled on the
switch, a host is identified by the switch port through which it connects to the network (in addition
to its MAC address). The DHCP option 82 feature is supported only when DHCP snooping is
globally enabled.
Choose the menu Network Security→DHCP Snooping→Option 82 Config to load the following
page.
Figure 14-13 Option 82 Config
Option 82 Configuration
UNIT:1/LAGS:
Click 1 to configure the physical ports. Click LAGS
to
configure the link aggregation groups.
Select:
Select your desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port:
Displays the port number.
Option 82 Support:
Enable/Disable the Option 82 feature.
Operation Strategy
: Select the operation for the existed Option 82 field o
f the
DHCP request packets from the Host. The option 82 field in
DHCP reply packets will be remove when the option 82
feature is enable，
no matter which operation is configured for
the existed option 82 filed.
•
Keep: Indicates to keep the Option 82 field of the packets.
•
Replace:
Indicates to replace the Option 82 field of the
packets with the switch defined one.
•
Drop:
Indicates to discard the packets including the Option
82 field.
Circuit ID
Customization
:
Enable or disable the switch to define the Option
82
sub-option Circuit ID field. With Disable selected
, configure
VLAN ID and port number from which the packet is
received
as the circuit ID default value.
273
Circuit ID:
Enter the sub-
option Circuit ID for the customized Option 82
field.
Remote
ID
Customizat
ion:
Enable or disable the switch to define the Option 82
sub-option Remote ID field. With Disable selected
, configure
the switch system MAC
address as the remote ID default
value.
Remote ID:
Enter the sub-
option Remote ID for the customized Option 82.
LAG:
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs.
14.4 DHCPv6 Snooping
DHCPv6 Snooping functions to monitor the process of the host obtaining the IPv6 address from
the DHCPv6 server. DHCPv6 Snooping records the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN and the
connected port number of the host for automatic binding.
Choose the menu Network Security→DHCPv6 Snooping→DHCPv6 Snooping to load the
following page.
Figure 14-14 DHCPv6 Snooping
DHCPV6 Snooping
DHCP
v6 Snooping: Enable/Disable the DHCPv6 Snooping function globally.
VLAN ID
: Enable/Disable the DHCPv6
Snooping function in the specified
VLAN.
VLAN Configuration
Display
:
Displays the VLANs with DHCPv6 Snooping function enabled.
Trusted Port
UNIT:1/LAGS
: Select the desired unit or LAGS for configuration.
274
Trusted Port:
Select the port to be a Trusted Port. Only the Trusted Port can
forward the DHCPv6 packets from DHCPv6 servers.
14.5 ARP Inspection
According to the ARP Implementation Procedure stated in 14.1.3 ARP Scanning, it can be found
that ARP protocol can facilitate the Hosts in the same network segment to communicate with one
another or access to external network via Gateway. However, since ARP protocol is implemented
with the premise that all the Hosts and Gateways are trusted, there are high security risks during
ARP Implementation Procedure in the actual complex network. Thus, the cheating attacks against
ARP, such as imitating Gateway, cheating Gateway, cheating terminal Hosts and ARP Flooding
Attack, frequently occur to the network, especially to the large network such as campus network.
The following part will simply introduce these ARP attacks.
Imitating Gateway
The attacker sends the MAC address of a forged Gateway to Host, and then the Host will
automatically update the ARP table after receiving the ARP response packets, which causes that
the Host cannot access the network normally. The ARP Attack implemented by imitating Gateway
is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 14-15 ARP Attack - Imitating Gateway
As the above figure shown, the attacker sends the fake ARP packets with a forged Gateway
address to the normal Host, and then the Host will automatically update the ARP table after
receiving the ARP packets. When the Host tries to communicate with Gateway, the Host will
encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets, which results in a breakdown of the
normal communication.
Cheating Gateway
The attacker sends the wrong IP address-to-MAC address mapping entries of Hosts to the
Gateway, which causes that the Gateway cannot communicate with the legal terminal Hosts
normally. The ARP Attack implemented by cheating Gateway is illustrated in the following figure.
275
Figure 14-16 ARP Attack – Cheating Gateway
As the above figure shown, the attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A to the Gateway,
and then the Gateway will automatically update its ARP table after receiving the ARP packets.
When the Gateway tries to communicate with Host A in LAN, it will encapsulate this false
destination MAC address for packets, which results in a breakdown of the normal communication.
Cheating Terminal Hosts
The attacker sends the false IP address-to-MAC address mapping entries of terminal Host/Server
to another terminal Host, which causes that the two terminal Hosts in the same network segment
cannot communicate with each other normally. The ARP Attack implemented by cheating terminal
Hosts is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 14-17 ARP Attack – Cheating Terminal Hosts
As the above figure shown, the attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A to Host B, and then
Host B will automatically update its ARP table after receiving the ARP packets. When Host B tries
to communicate with Host A, it will encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets,
which results in a breakdown of the normal communication.
276
Man-In-The-Middle Attack
The attacker continuously sends the false ARP packets to the Hosts in LAN so as to make the
Hosts maintain the wrong ARP table. When the Hosts in LAN communicate with one another, they
will send the packets to the attacker according to the wrong ARP table. Thus, the attacker can get
and process the packets before forwarding them. During the procedure, the communication
packets information between the two Hosts are stolen in the case that the Hosts were unaware of
the attack. That is called Man-In-The-Middle Attack. The Man-In-The-Middle Attack is illustrated in
the following figure.
Figure 14-18 Man-In-The-Middle Attack
Suppose there are three Hosts in LAN connected with one another through a switch.
Host A: IP address is 192.168.0.101; MAC address is 00-00-00-11-11-11.
Host B: IP address is 192.168.0.102; MAC address is 00-00-00-22-22-22.
Attacker: IP address is 192.168.0.103; MAC address is 00-00-00-33-33-33.
1. First, the attacker sends the false ARP response packets.
2. Upon receiving the ARP response packets, Host A and Host B updates the ARP table of their
own.
3. When Host A communicates with Host B, it will send the packets to the false destination MAC
address, i.e. to the attacker, according to the updated ARP table.
4. After receiving the communication packets between Host A and Host B, the attacker processes
and forwards the packets to the correct destination MAC address, which makes Host A and
Host B keep a normal-appearing communication.
5. The attacker continuously sends the false ARP packets to the Host A and Host B so as to make
the Hosts always maintain the wrong ARP table.
In the view of Host A and Host B, their packets are directly sent to each other. But in fact, there is a
Man-In-The-Middle stolen the packets information during the communication procedure. This kind
of ARP attack is called Man-In-The-Middle attack.
ARP Flooding Attack
The attacker broadcasts a mass of various fake ARP packets in a network segment to occupy the
network bandwidth viciously, which results in a dramatic slowdown of network speed. Meantime,
the Gateway learns the false IP address-to-MAC address mapping entries from these ARP
277
packets and updates its ARP table. As a result, the ARP table is fully occupied by the false entries
and unable to learn the ARP entries of legal Hosts, which causes that the legal Hosts cannot
access the external network.
The IP-MAC Binding function allows the switch to bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID
and the connected Port number of the Host together when the Host connects to the switch. Basing
on the predefined IP-MAC Binding entries, the ARP Inspection functions to detect the ARP packets
and filter the illegal ARP packet so as to prevent the network from ARP attacks.
The ARP Inspection function is implemented on the ARP Detect, ARP Defend and ARP
Statistics pages.
14.5.1 ARP Detect
ARP Detect feature enables the switch to detect the ARP packets basing on the bound entries in
the IP-MAC Binding Table and filter the illegal ARP packets, so as to prevent the network from
ARP attacks, such as the Network Gateway Spoofing and Man-In-The-Middle Attack, etc.
Choose the menu Network Security→ARP Inspection→ARP Detect to load the following page.
Figure 14-19 ARP Detect
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
ARP Detect
ARP Detect:
Enable/Disable the ARP Detect function, and click the
Apply
button to apply.
Trusted Port
Trusted Port:
Select the port
for which the ARP Detect function is unnecessary
as the Trusted Port. The specific ports, such as up-
linked port,
routing port and LAG port, should be set as Trusted Port. To
ensure the normal communication of the switch, please
configure the ARP Trusted
Port before enabling the ARP Detect
function.
278
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Bind the IP address, MAC
address, VLAN ID and the
connected Port number of
the Host together.
Required. On the IP-MAC Binding
page, bind the IP
address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the connected Port
number of the Host together via Manual Binding, ARP
Scanning or DHCP Snooping.
2
Enable the protection for the
bound entry.
Required. On the Network Security→IP-MAC
Binding→Binding Table page, specify a protect type for
the corresponding bound entry.
3
Specify the trusted port. Required. On the Network Security→ARP
Inspection→ARP Detect
page, specify the trusted port.
The specific ports, such as up-linked port
, routing port
and LAG port, should be set as Trusted Port.
4
Enable ARP Detect feature. Required. On the Network Security→ARP
Inspection→ARP Detect
page, enable the ARP Detect
feature.
14.5.2 ARP Defend
With the ARP Defend enabled, the switch can terminate receiving the ARP packets for 300
seconds when the transmission speed of the legal ARP packet on the port exceeds the defined
value so as to avoid ARP Attack flood.
Choose the menu Network Security→ARP Inspection→ARP Defend to load the following page.
Figure 14-20 ARP Defend
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
ARP Defend
Select:
Select your desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
279
Port:
Displays the port number.
Defend:
Select Enable/Disable the ARP Defend feature for the port.
Speed(10
-100)pps:
Enter a value to specify the maximum amount of the received ARP
packets per second.
Current Speed(pps):
Displays the current speed of the received ARP packets.
Status
Displays the status of the ARP attack.
LAG:
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to.
Operation:
Click the Recover
button to restore the port to the normal status.
The ARP Defend for this port will be re-enabled.
Note:
It’s not recommended to enable the ARP Defend feature for the LAG member port.
14.5.3 ARP Statistics
ARP Statistics feature displays the number of the illegal ARP packets received on each port, which
facilitates you to locate the network malfunction and take the related protection measures.
Choose the menu Network Security→ARP Inspection→ARP Statistics to load the following
page.
Figure 14-21 ARP Statistics
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
280
Auto Refresh:
Enable/Disable the Auto Refresh feature.
Refresh Interval:
Specify the refresh interval to display the ARP Statistics.
Illegal ARP Packet
Port:
Displays the port number.
Trusted Port:
Indicates the port is an ARP Trusted Port or not.
Illegal ARP Packet:
Displays the number of the received illegal ARP packets.
14.6 ND Detection
ND Brief Introduction
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery (ND) protocol uses five types of ICMPv6 messages to implement the
following functions:
• Address resolution
• Neighbor reachability detection
• Duplicate address detection (DAD)
• Router/prefix discovery and address autoconfiguration
• Redirection
Five types of the ICMPv6 messages are listed below:
ICMPv6 Message Function
Neighbor Solicitation (NS) • Acquires the neighbor’s link-layer address.
• Verifies whether a neighbor is reachable.
• Detects duplicate address.
Neighbor Advertisement (NA) • Responses to an NS message.
• Notifies the neighbor nodes of link layer changes
Router Solicitation (RS) • R
equests for an address prefix and other
configuration parameters for autoconfiguration.
Router Advertisement (RA) • Responses to an RS message.
•
Advertises information such as the prefix
information options and flag bits.
Redirect (RR) •
Informs the source host of another next hop to a
particular
destination when certain conditions are
met.
ND Attack
Because of the absence of security mechanism, ND protocol is easy to be exploited by attackers.
Attackers can exploit the ND protocols as follows:
• The attackers send forged NS/NA/RS packets with the IPv6 address of a victim host. The
281
gateway or the other hosts who have received these NS/NA/RS packets will update their ND
entry with the wrong address information. AS a result, all packets intended for the victim will be
sent to the attacking host rather than the victim host.
• The attackers send forged RA packets with the IPv6 address of a victim gateway. All the hosts
attached to the victim gateway may receive incorrect IPv6 configuration parameters and
maintain false ND entries.
A forged ND packet has the following two features:
• The source MAC address in the Ethernet frame header is inconsistent with that carried in the
source link layer address option of the ND packet.
• The mapping between the source IPv6 address and the source MAC address in the Ethernet
frame header is invalid.
ND Detection Process
Generally, the ND detection feature uses the entries in the IPv6-MAC binding table to verify the
packets received on the untrusted ports, thus filtering the forged ND packets and keeping out the
attacks.
1. ND packets received on the ND-trusted port will not be checked.
2. RS/NS packets with their source IPv6 address unspecified will not be checked.
3. RA/RR packets received on the ND-untrusted port will be discarded directly; the other ND
packets received on the ND-untrusted port will be checked.
a) Source MAC consistence check. If the RS/NS packet’s source MAC address in the Ethernet
frame header is different from that carried in the source layer address option, the RS/NS
packet will be discarded.
b) IPv6-MAC binding check. Look up the IPv6-MAC binding table to compare the IPv6 address,
MAC address, VLAN ID and receiving port between the entry and the ND packet. If a match
is found, the ND packet is considered legal and forwarded; if no match is found, the ND
packet is considered illegal and discarded directly.
282
Choose the menu Network Security→ND Detection→ND Detection to load the following page.
Figure 14-22 ND Detection
ND Detection
ND
Detection: Enable/Disable the ND Detection function.
VLAN ID:
Enter the VLAN ID in which you want to enable/
disable the ND
Detection function.
VLAN Configuration
Display:
Display the VLANs with ND detection function enabled.
Trusted Port
UNIT:1/LAGS
Select the desired unit or LAG for configuration.
Trusted Port
: Select Enable/Disable the port to be a Trusted
Port. Only the
Trusted Port can forward the Router Advertisement Message
and Router Redirect Message from Routers.
14.7 IP Source Guard
IP Source Guard is to filter the IP packets based on the IP-MAC Binding entries. Only the packets
matched to the IP-MAC Binding rules can be processed, which can enhance the bandwidth utility.
283
Choose the menu Network Security→IP Source Guard to load the following page.
Figure 14-23 IP Source Guard
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
IP Source Guard Config
Select:
Select your desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port:
Displays the port number.
IPv4
Security Type: Select Security Type for the port.
• Disable: Select this option to disable the IP Sou
rce Guard
feature for the port.
• SIP+MAC:
Only the packets with its source IP address,
source MAC address and port number matched to the
IP-MAC binding rules can be processed.
IPv6
Security Type: Select Security Type for the port.
• Disable: Select this option to disable the IPv6
Source Guard
feature for the port.
• SIPv6+MAC: Only the packets with its source IPv6
address,
source MAC address and port number matched to the
IPv6-MAC binding rules can be processed.
LAG:
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs.
Note:
Before configuring IPv6 Security feature, you should configure the SDM template as
“enterpriseV6” and save your configurations. See SDM Template for more information about SDM
template configuration.
284
14.8 DoS Defend
DoS (Denial of Service) Attack is to occupy the network bandwidth maliciously by the network
attackers or the evil programs sending a lot of service requests to the Host, which incurs an
abnormal service or even breakdown of the network.
With DoS Defend function enabled, the switch can analyze the specific fields of the IP packets and
distinguish the malicious DoS attack packets. Upon detecting the packets, the switch will discard
the illegal packets directly and limit the transmission rate of the legal packets if the over legal
packets may incur a breakdown of the network. The switch can defend several types of DoS attack
listed in the following table.
DoS Attack Type Description
Land Attack The attacker sends a specific fake SYN packet to the destination Host.
Since both the source IP address and the destination IP address of the
SYN packet are set to be the IP address of the Host, the Host will be
trapped in an endless circle for building the initial connection. The
performance of the network will be reduced extremely.
Scan SYNFIN The attacker sends the packet with its SYN field and the FIN field set to
1. The SYN field is used to request initial connection whereas the FIN
field is used to request disconnection. Therefore, the packet of this
type is illegal. The switch can defend this type of illegal packet.
Xmascan
The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index, FIN, URG and
PSH field set to 1.
NULL Scan Attack
The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index and all the
control fiel
ds set to 0. During the TCP connection and data
transmission, the packets with all the control fields set to 0 are
considered as the illegal packets.
SYN packet with its
source port less than
1024
The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP SYN field set to 1
and source port less than 1024.
Blat Attack
The attacker sends the illegal packet with its source port and
destination port on Layer 4 the same and its URG field set to 1. Similar
to the Land Attack, the system performance of the attacked Host is
reduced since the Host circularly attempts to build a connection with
the attacker.
Ping Flooding
The attacker floods the destination system with Ping broadcast storm
packets to forbid the system to respond to the legal communication.
SYN/SYN-ACK
Flooding
The attacker uses a fake IP address to send TCP request packets to
the Server. Upon receiving the request packets, the Server responds
with SYN-
ACK packets. Since the IP address is fake, no response will
be returned. The Server will keep on sending SYN-ACK packets. If the
attacker sends overflowing fake request packets, the network resource
will be occupied maliciously and the requests of the legal clients will be
denied.
Table 14-1 Defendable DoS Attack Types
285
14.8.1 DoS Defend
On this page, you can enable the DoS Defend type appropriate to your need.
Choose the menu Network Security→DoS Defend→DoS Defend to load the following page.
Figure 14-24 DoS Defend
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Defend Config
DoS Defend:
Allows you to Enable/Disable DoS Defend function.
Defend Table
Select:
Select the entry to enable the corresponding Defend Type.
Defend Type:
Displays the Defend Type name.
14.9 802.1X
The 802.1X protocol was developed by IEEE802 LAN/WAN committee to deal with the security
issues of wireless LANs. It was then used in Ethernet as a common access control mechanism for
LAN ports to solve mainly authentication and security problems.
802.1X is a port-based network access control protocol. It authenticates and controls devices
requesting for access in terms of the ports of LAN access control devices. With the 802.1X
protocol enabled, a supplicant can access the LAN only when it passes the authentication,
whereas those failing to pass the authentication are denied when accessing the LAN.
Architecture of 802.1X Authentication
802.1X adopts a client/server architecture with three entities: a supplicant system, an
authenticator system, and an authentication server system, as shown in the following figure.
286
Figure 14-25 Architecture of 802.1X authentication
1. Supplicant System: The supplicant system is an entity in LAN and is authenticated by the
authenticator system. The supplicant system is usually a common user terminal computer.
An 802.1X authentication is initiated when a user launches client program on the
supplicant system. Note that the client program must support the 802.1X authentication
protocol.
2. Authenticator System: The authenticator system is usually an 802.1X-supported network
device, such as this TP-LINK switch. It provides the physical or logical port for the
supplicant system to access the LAN and authenticates the supplicant system.
3. Authentication Server System: The authentication server system is an entity that
provides authentication service to the authenticator system. Normally in the form of a
RADIUS server. Authentication Server can store user information and serve to perform
authentication and authorization. To ensure a stable authentication system, an alternate
authentication server can be specified. If the main authentication server is in trouble, the
alternate authentication server can substitute it to provide normal authentication service.
The Mechanism of an 802.1X Authentication System
IEEE 802.1X authentication system uses EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) to exchange
information between the supplicant system and the authentication server.
1. EAP protocol packets transmitted between the supplicant system and the authenticator
system are encapsulated as EAPOL packets.
2. EAP protocol packets transmitted between the authenticator system and the RADIUS
server can either be encapsulated as EAPOR (EAP over RADIUS) packets or be
terminated at authenticator system and the authenticator system then communicate with
RADIUS servers through PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) or CHAP (Challenge
Handshake Authentication Protocol) protocol packets.
3. When a supplicant system passes the authentication, the authentication server passes the
information about the supplicant system to the authenticator system. The authenticator
system in turn determines the state (authorized or unauthorized) of the controlled port
according to the instructions (accept or reject) received from the RADIUS server.
802.1X Authentication Procedure
An 802.1X authentication can be initiated by supplicant system or authenticator system. When the
authenticator system detects an unauthenticated supplicant in LAN, it will initiate the 802.1X
authentication by sending EAP-Request/Identity packets to the supplicant. The supplicant system
can also launch an 802.1X client program to initiate an 802.1X authentication through the sending
of an EAPOL-Start packet to the switch,
This TP-LINK switch can authenticate supplicant systems in EAP relay mode or EAP terminating
mode. The following illustration of these two modes will take the 802.1X authentication procedure
initiated by the supplicant system for example.
287
1. EAP Relay Mode
This mode is defined in 802.1X. In this mode, EAP-packets are encapsulated in higher level
protocol (such as EAPOR) packets to allow them successfully reach the authentication server.
This mode normally requires the RADIUS server to support the two fields of EAP: the
EAP-message field and the Message-authenticator field. This switch supports EAP-MD5,
EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and EAP-PEAP authentication way for the EAP relay mode. The following
figure describes the basic EAP-MD5 authentication procedure.
Figure 14-26 EAP-MD5 Authentication Procedure
(1) A supplicant system launches an 802.1X client program via its registered user name and
password to initiate an access request through the sending of an EAPOL-Start packet to the
switch. The 802.1X client program then forwards the packet to the switch to start the
authentication process.
(2) Upon receiving the authentication request packet, the switch sends an EAP-Request/Identity
packet to ask the 802.1X client program for the user name.
(3) The 802.1X client program responds by sending an EAP-Response/Identity packet to the
switch with the user name included. The switch then encapsulates the packet in a RADIUS
Access-Request packet and forwards it to the RADIUS server.
(4) Upon receiving the user name from the switch, the RADIUS server retrieves the user name,
finds the corresponding password by matching the user name in its database, encrypts the
password using a randomly-generated key, and sends the key to the switch through an
RADIUS Access-Challenge packet. The switch then sends the key to the 802.1X client
program.
(5) Upon receiving the key (encapsulated in an EAP-Request/MD5 Challenge packet) from the
switch, the client program encrypts the password of the supplicant system with the key and
sends the encrypted password (contained in an EAP-Response/MD5 Challenge packet) to
the RADIUS server through the switch. (The encryption is irreversible.)
(6) The RADIUS server compares the received encrypted password (contained in a RADIUS
Access-Request packet) with the locally-encrypted password. If the two match, it will then
send feedbacks (through a RADIUS Access-Accept packet and an EAP-Success packet) to
the switch to indicate that the supplicant system is authorized.
288
(7) The switch changes the state of the corresponding port to accepted state to allow the
supplicant system access the network. And then the switch will monitor the status of
supplicant by sending hand-shake packets periodically. By default, the switch will force the
supplicant to log off if it cannot get the response from the supplicant for two times.
(8) The supplicant system can also terminate the authenticated state by sending EAPOL-Logoff
packets to the switch. The switch then changes the port state from accepted to rejected.
2. EAP Terminating Mode
In this mode, packet transmission is terminated at authenticator systems and the EAP packets are
mapped into RADIUS packets. Authentication and accounting are accomplished through RADIUS
protocol.
In this mode, PAP or CHAP is employed between the switch and the RADIUS server. This switch
supports the PAP terminating mode. The authentication procedure of PAP is illustrated in the
following figure.
Figure 14-27 PAP Authentication Procedure
In PAP mode, the switch encrypts the password and sends the user name, the
randomly-generated key, and the supplicant system-encrypted password to the RADIUS server for
further authentication. Whereas the randomly-generated key in EAP-MD5 relay mode is generated
by the authentication server, and the switch is responsible to encapsulate the authentication
packet and forward it to the RADIUS server.
802.1X Timer
In 802.1 x authentication, the following timers are used to ensure that the supplicant system, the
switch, and the RADIUS server interact in an orderly way:
1. Supplicant system timer (Supplicant Timeout): This timer is triggered by the switch
after the switch sends a request packet to a supplicant system. The switch will resend the
request packet to the supplicant system if the supplicant system fails to respond in the
specified timeout period.
2. RADIUS server timer (Server Timeout): This timer is triggered by the switch after the
switch sends an authentication request packet to RADIUS server. The switch will resend
the authentication request packet if the RADIUS server fails to respond in the specified
timeout period.
289
3. Quiet-period timer (Quiet Period): This timer sets the quiet-period. When a supplicant
system fails to pass the authentication, the switch quiets for the specified period before it
processes another authentication request re-initiated by the supplicant system.
Guest VLAN
Guest VLAN function enables the supplicants that do not pass the authentication to access the
specific network resource.
By default, all the ports connected to the supplicants belong to a VLAN, i.e. Guest VLAN. Users
belonging to the Guest VLAN can access the resources of the Guest VLAN without being
authenticated. But they need to be authenticated before accessing external resources. After
passing the authentication, the ports will be removed from the Guest VLAN and be allowed to
access the other resources.
With the Guest VLAN function enabled, users can access the Guest VLAN to install 802.1X client
program or upgrade their 802.1x clients without being authenticated. If there is no supplicant past
the authentication on the port in a certain time, the switch will add the port to the Guest VLAN.
With 802.1X function enabled and Guest VLAN configured, after the maximum number retries
have been made to send the EAP-Request/Identity packets and there are still ports that have not
sent any response back, the switch will then add these ports into the Guest VLAN according to
their link types. Only when the corresponding user passes the 802.1X authentication, the port will
be removed from the Guest VLAN and added to the specified VLAN. In addition, the port will back
to the Guest VLAN when its connected user logs off.
The 802.1X function is implemented on the Global Config and Port Config pages.
14.9.1 Global Config
On this page, you can enable the 802.1X authentication function globally and control the
authentication process by specifying the Authentication Method, Guest VLAN and various Timers.
Please disable Handshake feature if you are using other client softwares instead of TP-LINK
802.1X Client.
Choose the menu Network Security→802.1X→Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 14-28 Global Config
290
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
802.1X:
Enable/Disable the 802.1X function.
Auth Method:
Select the Authentication Method from the pull-down list.
• EAP: EAP relay mode. IEEE 802.1X authentication
system uses extensible authentication protocol
(EAP) to exchange information between the switch
and the client. The EAP protocol packets with
authenticatio
n data can be encapsulated in the
advanced protocol (such as RADIUS) packets to be
transmitted to the authentication server.
• PAP: EAP termination mode.
IEEE 802.1X
authentication system uses extensible
authentication protocol (EAP) to exchange
information between the switch and the client. The
transmission of EAP packets is terminated at the
switch and the EAP packets are converted to the
other protocol (such as RADIUS) packets for
transmission.
Handshake:
Enable/Disable the Handshake feature. The Handshake
feature is used to detect the connection status between
the TP-LINK 802.1X Client and the switch. Please
disable Handshake feature if you are using other client
softwares instead of TP-LINK 802.1X Client.
Guest VLAN:
Enable/Disable the Guest VLAN feature.
Guest VLAN ID:
Enter your desired VLAN ID to enable the Guest VLAN
feature. The supplicants in the Guest VLAN can access
the specified network source.
Authentication Config
Quiet:
Enable/Disable the Quiet timer.
Quiet Period:
Specify a value for Quiet Period. Once the supplicant
failed to the 802.1X Authentication, then the switch will not
respond to the authentication request from the same
supplicant during the Quiet Period.
Retry Times:
Specify the maximum transfer times of the repeated
authentication request.
Supplicant Timeout:
Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the
response from supplicant before resending a request to
the supplicant.
Server Timeout:
Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the
response from authen
tication server before resending a
request to the authentication server.
14.9.2 Port Config
On this page, you can configure the 802.1X features for the ports basing on the actual network.
291
Choose the menu Network Security→802.1X→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 14-29 Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Config
Select:
Select your desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port:
Displays the port number.
Status:
Select Enable/Disable the 802.1X authentication feature for the
port.
Guest VLAN:
Select Enable/Disable the Guest VLAN feature for the port.
Control Mode:
Specify the Control Mode for the port.
• Auto: In this mode, the port will normally work only after
passing the 802.1X Authentication.
• Force-Authorized: In this mode, the port can work normally
without passing the 802.1X Authentication.
• Force-Unauthorized: In this mode, the port is forbidden
working for its fixed unauthorized status.
Control Type:
Specify the Control Type for the port.
• MAC Based: Any client connected to the port should pass the
802.1X Authentication for access.
• Port Based: All the clients connected to the port can access
the network on the condition that any one of the clients has
passed the 802.1X Authentication.
Authorized:
Displays the authentication status of the port.
LAG:
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to.
292
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1 Install t
he 802.1X client
software.
Required. For the client computers, you are required to
install the TP-LINK 802.1X Client provided on the CD.
Please refer to the software guide in the same directory
with the software for more information.
2 Configure the 802.1X globally.
Required. By default, the global 802.1X function is
disabled. On the Network Security→802.1X→Global
Config page, configure the 802.1X function globally.
3
Configure the 802.1X for the
port.
Required. On the Network Security→802.1X→Port
Config
page, configure the 802.1X feature for the port of
the switch basing on the actual network.
4 C
onnect an authentication
server to the switch and do
some configuration.
Required. Record the information of the client in the LAN
to the authentication server and configure the
corresponding authentication username and password for
the client.
5 Enable the
AAA function
globally.
Required. On the Network Security→AAA→Global
Conifg page, enable the AAA function globally.
6
Configure the parameters of
the authentication server.
Required. On the Network Security→AAA→RADIUS
Server Conifg page
, configure the parameters of the
RADIUS server.
Note:
1. The 802.1X function takes effect only when it is enabled globally on the switch and for the port.
2. The 802.1X function cannot be enabled for LAG member ports. That is, the port with 802.1X
function enabled cannot be added to the LAG.
3. The 802.1X function should not be enabled for the port connected to the authentication server.
14.10 PPPoE
PPPoE ID-Insertion Overview
The PPPoE ID-Insertion feature provides a way to extract a Vendor-specific tag as an
identifier for the authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) access requests on an
Ethernet interface. When enabled, the switch attaches a tag to the PPPoE discovery packets,
which is called the PPPoE Vendor-Specific tag and it contains a unique line identifier. There
are two formats of Vendor-specific tags: Circuit-ID format and Remote-ID format. The BRAS
receives the tagged packet, decodes the tag, and uses the Circuit-ID/Remote-ID field of that
tag as a NAS-Port-ID attribute in the RADIUS server for PPP authentication and AAA
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) access requests. The switch will remove the
Circuit-ID/Remote-ID tag from the received PPPoE Active Discovery Offer and
Session-confirmation packets from the BRAS.
In this Chapter the switch will work as a DSLAM.
293
PPPoE ID-Insertion Operation Process
The PPPoE ID insertion includes Circuit-ID tag and Remote-ID tag. The following process takes
Circuit-ID insertion as an example:
Figure 14-1 PPPoE Discovery Process
The PPPoE discovery process is illustrated below:
1. The client sends PADI (PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation) packets to the switch.
2. The switch intercepts PADI packets and inserts a unique Circuit-ID tag to them.
3. The switch forwards the PADI packets with Circuit-ID tag to the BRAS.
4. The BRAS responses with the PADO (PPPoE Active Discovery Offer) packets after receiving
the PADI packets.
5. Upon receiving the PADO packets with the Circuit-ID tag, the switch will remove the tag and
send the packets to the client. The switch will forward the PADO packets without the Circuit-ID
tag directly.
6. The client sends PADR (PPPoE Active Discovery Request) packets according to the process.
7. The switch intercepts PADR packets and inserts a unique Circuit-ID tag to them.
8. The switch forwards the PADR packets with Circuit-ID tag to the BRAS.
9. The BRAS processes the received Circuit-ID tag in the PADR packets and extracts the
Circuit-ID field to the RADIUS for accounting. And the BRAS allocates a PPP process session
ID for this PPP session.
10. The BRAS responses with the PADS (PPPoE Active Discovery Session-confirmation) packets
after receiving the PADR packets.
11. Upon receiving the PADS packets with the Circuit-ID tag, the switch will remove the tag and
send the packets to the client. The switch will forward the PADS packets without the Circuit-ID
tag directly.
On the PPPoE ID Insertion page, you can enable the PPPoE ID insertion function globally. Each
port’s PPPoE ID Insertion feature and type can be configured separately.
294
Choose the menu Network Security→PPPoE→PPPoE ID Insertion to load the following page.
Figure 14-30 PPPoE Circuit-ID Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
PPPoE ID Insertion: Enable/Disable the PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function globally.
Port Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number.
Circuit-ID: Enable/Disable the PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion feature for the
port.
Circuit-ID Type: Specify the Circuit-ID type for the port:
• IP: The IP address of the switch will be used to encode the
Circuit-ID option. This is the default value.
• MAC: The MAC address of the switch will be used to encode
the Circuit-ID option.
• UDF: The user specified string with the maximum length of 40
characters will be used to encode the Circuit-ID option.
• UDF ONLY: Only the user specified string with the maximum
length of 40 will be used to encode the Circuit-ID option.
UDF Value: If the UDF is selected, specify a string with the maximum length
of 40 characters to encode the Circuit-id option.
295
Remote-ID: Enable or Disable the PPPoE Remote-ID Insertion feature for the
port.
Remote-ID Value: A user specified string with the maximum length of 40 characters
to encode the Remote-id option
14.11 AAA
Overview
AAA stands for authentication, authorization and accounting. This feature is used to authenticate
users trying to log in to the switch or trying to access the administrative level privilege.
Username and password pairs are used for login and privilege authentication. The authentication
can be processed locally in the switch or centrally in the RADIUS/TACACS+ server(s). The local
authentication username and password pairs can be configured in 4.2 User Management.
Applicable Access Application
The authentication can be applied on the following access applications: Console, Telnet, SSH and
HTTP.
Authentication Method List
A method list describes the authentication methods and their sequence to authenticate a user. The
switch supports Login List for users to gain access to the switch, and Enable List for normal users
to gain administrative privileges.
The administrator can set the authentication methods in a preferable order in the list. The switch
uses the first listed method to authenticate users, if that method fails to respond, the switch selects
the next authentication method in the method list. This process continues until there is a
successful communication with a listed authentication method or until all defined methods are
exhausted. If authentication fails at any point in this circle, which means the secure server or the
local switch denies the user’s access, the authentication process stops and no other
authentication methods are attempted.
802.1X Authentication
802.1X protocol uses the RADIUS to provide detailed accounting information and flexible
administrative control over authentication process. The Dot1x List feature defines the RADIUS
server groups in the 802.1X authentication.
RADIUS/TACACS+ Server
Users can configure the RADIUS/TACACS+ servers for the connection between the switch and
the server.
Server Group
Users can define the authentication server group with up to several servers running the same
secure protocols, either RADIUS or TACACS+. Users can set these servers in a preferable order,
which is called the server group list. When a user tries to access the switch, the switch will ask the
first server in the server group list for authentication. If no response is received, the second server
will be queried, and so on.
The switch has two built-in authentication server group, one for RADIUS and the other for
TACACS+. These two server groups cannot be deleted, and the user-defined RADIUS/TACACS+
server will join these two server groups automatically.
296
14.11.1 Global Config
This page is used to enable/disable the AAA function globally.
Choose the menu Network Security→AAA→Global Conifg to load the following page.
Figure 14-31 AAA Global Config
Configuration Procedure
Click Enable to enable the AAA function globally.
14.11.2 Privilege Elevation
This page is used to elevate the current logged-in user from guest to admin and gain administrator
level privileges. The authentication password is possibly authenticated in RADIUS/TACACS+
servers, user-defined server groups or local on the switch.
Choose the menu Network Security→AAA→Global Conifg to load the following page.
Figure 14-32 Privilege Elevate
Configuration Procedure
Enter the Enable Password and click Enable button to elevate the current logged-in user from
guest to admin. Only admin users can configure the following AAA settings.
Tips:
If the Enable password is verified locally, the Enable password should be previously set by the
admin users using the command lines. For more details please refer to the command enable
password in the Command Line Interface Guide on the resource CD.
14.11.3 RADIUS Server Config
This page is used to configure the authentication servers running the RADIUS security protocols.
297
Choose the menu Network Security→AAA→RADIUS Conifg to load the following page.
Figure 14-33 RADIUS Server Config
Configuration Procedure
Configure the RADIUS server’s IP and other relevant parameters under the Server Config.
View, edit and delete the configured RADIUS servers in the Server list.
Entry Description
Server IP
: Enter the IP of the server running the RADIUS secure protocol.
Shared Key
: Enter the shared key between the RADIUS server and the switch.
The RADIUS server and the switch use the key string to encrypt
passwords and exchange responses.
Auth Port
:
Specify the UDP destination port on the RADIUS server for
authentication requests.
Acct Port
:
Specify the UDP destination port on the RADIUS server for
accounting requests.
R
etransmit: Specify the number of times a request is resent to a server if the
server does not respond.
Timeout
: Specify the time interval that the switch waits for the server to reply
before resending.
14.11.4 TACACS+ Server Config
This page is used to configure the authentication servers running the TACACS+ security protocols.
298
Choose the menu Network Security→AAA→TACACS+ Conifg to load the following page.
Figure 14-34 TACACS+ Server Config
Configuration Procedure
Configure the TACACS+ server’s IP and other relevant parameters under the Server Config.
View, edit and delete the configured TACACS+ servers in the Server list.
Entry Description
Server IP
: Enter the IP of the server running the TACACS+ secure protocol.
Shared Key
: Enter the shared key between the TACACS+ server and the switch.
The TACACS+ server and the switch use the key string to encrypt
passwords and exchange responses.
Timeout
: Specify the time interval that the switch waits for the server to reply
before resending.
Port
: Specify the TCP port used on the TACACS+ server for AAA.
14.11.5 Authentication Server Group Config
On this page users can group authentication servers running the same secure protocol for
authentication. The switch has two built-in authentication server group, one for RADIUS and the
other for TACACS+. These two server groups cannot be edited or deleted. The server entries in
one group are tried in the order they are added.
The server entries in one group are tried in the order they are added.
299
Choose the menu Network Security→AAA→Server Group to load the following page.
Figure 14-35 Create New Server Group
Figure 14-36 Add Server to Server Group
Configuration Procedure
1) Configure the Server Group name and Server Type to create a server group.
2) Click edit in the Server Group List to configure the corresponding server group.
3) Select Server IP you have previously created and click add to add the server to the server
group. (Figure 14-36)
View and delete the configured server groups in the Server Group list.
View and delete the configured servers in the server IP list.
Entry Description
Server Group
: Define a server group with a group name.
Server Type:
Specify the server type as RADIUS or TACACS+.
Server IP
Select the IP of the server you have previously configured.
Note:
1. The two built-in server groups radius and tacacs+ cannot be deleted or edited.
2. Up to 16 servers can be added to one server group.
300
14.11.6 Authentication Method List Config
Before you configure AAA authentication on a certain application, you should define an
authentication method list first. An authentication method list describes the sequence and
authentication method to be queried to authenticate a user.
The switch uses the first method listed to authenticate users, if that method fails to respond, the
switch selects the next authentication method in the method list. This process continues until there
is a successful communication with a listed authentication method or until all defined methods are
exhausted. If authentication fails at any point in this circle, which means the secure server or the
local switch denies the user’s access, the authentication process stops and no other
authentication methods are attempted.
For example, if a user defines an authentication login method list as tacacs-radius-local, the switch
will send an authentication request to the fist TACACS+ server in the tacacs server group. If there
is no response, the switch will send an authentication request to the second TACACS+ server in
the tacacs server group and so on, until the tacacs server group list is exhausted. Then the
RADIUS server group will be queried. If no authentication is accomplished in the RADIUS server
list, the switch will authenticate the user locally. This forms a backup system for authentication.
Choose the menu Network Security→AAA→Authentication List to load the following page.
Figure 14-37 Authentication Method List Config
Configuration Procedure
1) Enter the method list name.
2) Specify the authentication type as Login or Enable.
3) Configure the authencation method with priorities. The options are radius, tacacs, local or
user-defined server groups.
View and delete the configured method priority list in the Authentication Login Method List and
Authentication Enable Method List. .
301
Entry Description
Method List
Name
:
Define a method list name.
List Type:
Specify the authentication type as Login or Enable. Login stands
for the Authentication Login Method List, and Enable stands for the
Authentication Enable Method list.
Pri1
, Pri2, Pri3,
Pri4
:
Specify the authentication methods in order.
The next
authentication method is tried only if the previous method does not
respond, not if it fails.
local: Use the local database in the switch for authentication.
none: No authentication is used.
radius
: Use the remote RADIUS server/server groups for
authentication.
tacacs
: Use the remote TACACS+ server/server groups for
authentication.
user-defined server group: Use the user-defined server groups for
authentication.
Tips:
If the Enable password is verified on the remote RADIUS server, the switch will send the Enable
authentication with the default username as $enable$.
14.11.7 Application Authentication List Config
Users can configure authentication method lists on the following access applications: console,
telnet, ssh and http.
Choose the menu Network Security→AAA→Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 14-38 Application Authentication Settings
Configuration Procedure
1) Select the application module.
2) Configure the authentication method list from the Login List drop-down menu. This option
defines the authentication method for users accessing the switch.
3) Configure the authentication method list from the Enable List drop-down menu. Thisoption
defines the authentication method for users requiring the administrator privilege.
302
Entry Description:
Module
: Lists of the configurable applications on the switch.
Login List:
Configure an application for the login utilizing a previously
configured method list.
Enable List:
Configure an application to promote the user level to admin-level
users utilizing a previously configured method list.
14.11.8 802.1X Authentication Server Config
This page is used to configure the RADIUS server group used in 802.1X Authentication,
Accounting and IGMP Authentication.
Choose the menu Network Security→AAA→Dot1x List to load the following page.
Figure 14-39 802.1X Config
Configuration Procedure
1) Configure the 802.1X function globally and on the supplicant-connected port. Please refer to
802.1X for more details.
2) Configure the 802.1X Aunthentication RADIUS server group in the Authentication Dot1x
Method List Table.
3) Configure the 802.1X Accounting RADIUS server group in the Authentication Dot1x Method
List Table.
14.11.9 Default Settings
The AAA function is disabled by default.
No enable password is configure by default.
The RADIUS server’s Auth Port is 1812, Acct Port is 1813, Retransmit is 2 times and Timeout is 5
seconds.
The TACACS+ server’s communication Port is 49 and Timeout is 5 seconds.
All RADIUS servers are added in the server group radius.
All TACACS+ servers are added in the Server group tacacs.
The Authentication Login Method List contains local by default, and the default login username
and passwords are both admin.
The Authentication Enable Method List is empty by default, which means users can prompt to
administrator privilege without password.
303
Chapter 15 SNMP
SNMP Overview
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) has gained the most extensive application on the
UDP/IP networks. SNMP provides a management frame to monitor and maintain the network
devices. It is used for automatically managing the various network devices no matter the physical
differences of the devices. Currently, the most network management systems are based on SNMP.
SNMP is simply designed and convenient for use with no need of complex fulfillment procedures
and too much network resources. With SNMP function enabled, network administrators can easily
monitor the network performance, detect the malfunctions and configure the network devices. In
the meantime, they can locate faults promptly and implement the fault diagnosis, capacity planning
and report generating.
SNMP Management Frame
SNMP management frame includes three network elements: SNMP Management Station, SNMP
Agent and MIB (Management Information Base).
SNMP Management Station: SNMP Management Station is the workstation for running the
SNMP client program, providing a friendly management interface for the administrator to manage
the most network devices conveniently.
SNMP Agent: Agent is the server software operated on network devices with the responsibility of
receiving and processing the request packets from SNMP Management Station. In the meanwhile,
Agent will inform the SNMP Management Station of the events whenever the device status
changes or the device encounters any abnormalities such as device reboot.
MIB: MIB is the set of the managed objects. MIB defines a few attributes of the managed objects,
including the names, the access rights, and the data types. Every SNMP Agent has its own MIB.
The SNMP Management station can read/write the MIB objects based on its management right.
SNMP Management Station is the manager of SNMP network while SNMP Agent is the managed
object. The information between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent are exchanged
through SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). The relationship among SNMP
Management Station, SNMP Agent and MIB is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 15-1 Relationship among SNMP Network Elements
SNMP Versions
This switch supports SNMP v3, and is compatible with SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c. The SNMP
versions adopted by SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent should be the same.
Otherwise, SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent cannot communicate with each other
normally. You can select the management mode with proper security level according to your actual
application requirement.
305
SNMP v1: SNMP v1 adopts Community Name authentication. The community name is used to
define the relation between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent. The SNMP packets
failing to pass community name authentication are discarded. The community name can limit
access to SNMP Agent from SNMP NMS, functioning as a password.
SNMP v2c: SNMP v2c also adopts community name authentication. It is compatible with SNMP
v1 while enlarges the function of SNMP v1.
SNMP v3: Based on SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c, SNMP v3 extremely enhances the security and
manageability. It adopts VACM (View-based Access Control Model) and USM (User-Based
Security Model) authentication. The user can configure the authentication and the encryption
functions. The authentication function is to limit the access of the illegal user by authenticating the
senders of packets. Meanwhile, the encryption function is used to encrypt the packets transmitted
between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent so as to prevent any information being
stolen. The multiple combinations of authentication function and encryption function can
guarantee a more reliable communication between SNMP Management station and SNMP Agent.
MIB Introduction
To uniquely identify the management objects of the device in SNMP messages, SNMP adopts the
hierarchical architecture to identify the managed objects. It is like a tree, and each tree node
represents a managed object, as shown in the following figure. Thus the object can be identified
with the unique path starting from the root and indicated by a string of numbers. The number string
is the Object Identifier of the managed object. In the following figure, the OID of the managed
object B is {1.2.1.1}. While the OID of the managed object A is {1.2.1.1.5}.
Figure 15-2 Architecture of the MIB tree
SNMP Configuration Outline
1. Create View
The SNMP View is created for the SNMP Management Station to manage MIB objects. The
managed object, uniquely identified by OID, can be set to under or out of the management of
SNMP Management Station by configuring its view type (included/excluded). The OID of managed
object can be found on the SNMP client program running on the SNMP Management Station.
2. Create SNMP Group
After creating the SNMP View, it’s required to create a SNMP Group. The Group Name, Security
Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the SNMP Group. The Groups with these three
items the same are considered to be the same. You can configure SNMP Group to control the
network access by providing the users in various groups with different management rights via the
Read View, Write View and Notify View.
306
3. Create SNMP User
The User configured in a SNMP Group can manage the switch via the client program on
management station. The specified User Name and the Auth/Privacy Password are used for
SNMP Management Station to access the SNMP Agent, functioning as the password.
SNMP module is used to configure the SNMP function of the switch, including three submenus:
SNMP Config, Notification and RMON.
15.1 SNMP Config
The SNMP Config can be implemented on the Global Config, SNMP View, SNMP Group,
SNMP User and SNMP Community pages.
15.1.1 Global Config
To enable SNMP function, please configure the SNMP function globally on this page.
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 15-3 Global Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
SNMP:
Enable/Disable the SNMP function.
Local Engine
Local Eng
ine ID:
Specify the switch’s Engine ID for the remote clients. The
Engine ID is a unique alphanumeric string used to identify the
SNMP engine on the switch.
Remote Engine
Remote Engine ID:
Specify the Remote Engine ID for switch. The Engine ID is a
unique
alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine
on the remote device which receives traps and informs from
switch.
307
Note:
The amount of Engine ID characters must be even.
15.1.2 SNMP View
The OID (Object Identifier) of the SNMP packets is used to describe the managed objects of the
switch, and the MIB (Management Information Base) is the set of the OIDs. The SNMP View is
created for the SNMP management station to manage MIB objects.
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP View to load the following page.
Figure 15-4 SNMP View
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
View Config
View Name:
Give a name to the View for identification. Each View can
include several entries with the same name.
MIB Object ID:
Enter the Object Identifier (OID) for the entry of View.
View Type:
Select the type for the view entry.
Include
: The view entry can be managed by the SNMP
management station.
Exclude: The view entry cannot
be managed by the
SNMP management station.
View Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding view. All
the entries of a View will be deleted together.
View Name:
Displays the name of the View entry.
View Type:
Displays the type of the View entry.
MIB Object ID:
Displays the OID of the View entry.
308
15.1.3 SNMP Group
On this page, you can configure SNMP Group to control the network access by providing the users
in various groups with different management rights via the Read View, Write View and Notify View.
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP Group to load the following page.
Figure 15-5 SNMP Group
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Group Config
Group Name:
Enter the SNMP Group name. The Group Name, Security Model
and Securit
y Level compose the identifier of the SNMP Group. The
Groups with these three items the same are considered to be the
same.
Security Model:
Select the Security Model for the SNMP Group.
v1:
SNMPv1 is defined for the group. In this model, the
Community Na
me is used for authentication. SNMP v1 can be
configured on the SNMP Community page directly.
v2c:
SNMPv2c is defined for the group. In this model, the
Community Name is used for authentication. SNMP v2c can be
configured on the SNMP Community page directly.
v3:
SNMPv3 is defined for the group. In this model, the USM
mechanism is used for authentication. If SNMPv3 is enabled,
the Security Level field is enabled for configuration.
Security Level:
Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 Group.
noAuthNoPriv
: No authentication and no privacy security level
is used.
authNoPriv: Only the authentication security level is used.
authPriv
: Both the authentication and the privacy security levels
are used.
309
Read View:
Select the View to be the Read View. The managem
ent access is
restricted to read-
only, and changes cannot be made to the
assigned SNMP View.
Write View:
Select the View to be the Write View. The management access is
writing only and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP View.
The View defined both a
s the Read View and the Write View can be
read and modified.
Notify View:
Select the View to be the Notify View. The management station can
receive trap messages of the assigned SNMP view generated by
the switch's SNMP agent.
Group Table
Select:
Select t
he desired entry to delete the corresponding group. It is
multi-optional.
Group Name:
Displays the Group Name here.
Security Model:
Displays the Security Model of the group.
Security Level:
Displays the Security Level of the group.
Read View:
Displays the Read View name in the entry.
Write View:
Displays the Write View name in the entry.
Notify View:
Displays the Notify View name in the entry.
Operation:
Click the Edit
button to modify the Views in the entry and click the
Modify button to apply.
Note:
Every Group should contain a Read View. The default Read View is viewDefault.
15.1.4 SNMP User
The User in a SNMP Group can manage the switch via the management station software. The
User and its Group have the same security level and access right. You can configure the SNMP
User on this page.
310
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP User to load the following page.
Figure 15-6 SNMP User
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
User Config
User Name:
Enter the User Name here.
User Type:
Select the type for the User.
• Local User
: Indicates that the user is connected to a
local SNMP engine.
• Remote User
: Indicates that the user is connected to a
remote SNMP engine.
Group Name:
Select the Group Name of the User. The User is classified to
the corresponding Group accor
ding to its Group Name,
Security Model and Security Level.
Security Model:
Select the Security Model for the User.
Security Level:
Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User.
Auth Mode:
Select the Authentication Mode for the SNMP v3 User.
• None: No authentication method is used.
• MD5:
The port authentication is performed via
HMAC-MD5 algorithm.
• SHA: The port authentication is performed via
SHA
(Secure Hash Algorithm)
. This authentication mode has
a higher security than MD5 mode.
Auth Password:
Enter the password for authentication.
Privacy Mode:
Select the Privacy Mode for the SNMP v3 User.
• None: No privacy method is used.
• DES: DES encryption method is used.
Privacy Password:
Enter the Privacy Password.
311
User Table
Select:
Select the desired entry
to delete the corresponding User. It is
multi-optional.
User Name:
Displays the name of the User.
User Type:
Displays the User Type.
Group Name:
Displays the Group Name of the User.
Security Model:
Displays the Security Model of the User.
Security Le
vel: Displays the Security Level of the User.
Auth Mode:
Displays the Authentication Mode of the User.
Privacy Mode:
Displays the Privacy Mode of the User.
Operation:
Click the Edit
button to modify the Group of the User and click
the Modify button to apply.
Note:
The SNMP User and its Group should have the same Security Model and Security Level.
15.1.5 SNMP Community
SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c adopt community name authentication. The community name can limit
access to the SNMP agent from SNMP network management station, functioning as a password. If
SNMP v1 or SNMP v2c is employed, you can directly configure the SNMP Community on this
page without configuring SNMP Group and User.
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP Community to load the following page.
Figure 15-7 SNMP Community
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Community Config
Community Name:
Enter the Community Name here.
312
Access:
Defines the access rights of the community.
• read-only:
Management right of the Community is
restricted to read-only, and changes cannot be made to
the corresponding View.
• read-write:
Management right of the Community is
read-write and changes can be made to the corresponding
View.
MIB View:
Select the MIB View for the community to access.
Community Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding Community. It
is multi-optional.
Community Name:
Displays the Community Name here.
Access:
Displays the right of the Community to access the View.
MIB View:
Displays the Views which the Community can access.
Operation:
Click the Edit
button to modify the MIB View and the Access right
of the Community, and then click the Modify button to apply.
Note:
The default MIB View of SNMP Community is viewDefault.
Configuration Procedure:
If SNMPv3 is employed, please take the following steps:
Step Operation Description
1 Enable SNMP function globally. Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→Global
Config page, enable SNMP function globally.
2 Create SNMP View. Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP
View
page, create SNMP View of the management
agent. The default View Name is viewDefault and
the default OID is 1.
3 Create SNMP Group. Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP
Group
page, create SNMP Group for SNMPv3 and
specify SNMP Views with various access levels for
SNMP Group.
4 Create SNMP User. Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP
User page, create SNMP User in the Group and
configure the auth/privacy mode and auth/privacy
password for the User.
313
If SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c is employed, please take the following steps:
Step Operation Description
1 Enable SNMP function globally. Required. On the SNMP→SNMP
Config→Global Config page, enable SNMP
function globally.
2 Create SNMP View. Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP
View
page, create SNMP View of the
management agent. The default View Name is
viewDefault and the default OID is 1.
3
Configure
access level
for the User.
Create SNMP
Community
directly.
Required alternatively.
Create SNMP Community directly.
On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP
Community page, create SNMP Community
based on SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c.
Create SNMP Group and SNMP User.
Similar to the configuration way based on
S
NMPv3, you can create SNMP Group and
SNMP User of SNMP v1/v2c. The User
name can limit access to the SNMP agent
from SNMP network management station,
functioning as a community name. The
users can manage the device via the Read
View, Write View and Notify View defined in
the SNMP Group.
Create SNMP
Group and SNMP
User.
15.2 Notification
With the Notification function enabled, the switch can initiatively report to the management station
about the important events that occur on the Views (e.g., the managed device is rebooted), which
allows the management station to monitor and process the events in time.
The notification information includes the following two types:
Trap ：Trap is the information that the managed device initiatively sends to the Network
management station without request.
Inform：Inform packet is sent to inform the management station and ask for the reply. The switch
will resend the inform request if it doesn’t get the response from the management station during
the Timeout interval, and it will terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach
the specified Retry times. The Inform type, employed on SNMPv2c and SNMPv3, has a higher
security than the Trap type.
314
On this page, you can configure the notification function of SNMP.
Choose the menu SNMP→Notification→Notification Config to load the following page.
Figure 15-8 Notification Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Host Config
IP Address:
Enter the IP Address of the management Host.
User:
Enter the User name of the management station.
Security Model:
Select the Security Model of the management station.
Type:
Select the type for the notifications.
• Trap: Indicates traps are sent.
• Inform: Indicates informs are sent. The Inform typ
e has a
higher security than the Trap type.
Retry:
Specify the amount of times the switch resends an inform
request. The switch will resend the inform request if it doesn’t
get the response from the management station during the
Timeout interval, and it
will terminate resending the inform
request if the resending times reach the specified Retry times.
Timeout:
Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the
response from the management station before resending a
request.
UDP Port:
Enter the numb
er of the UDP port used to send notifications.
The UDP port functions with the IP address for the notification
sending. The default is 162.
IP Mode:
Select the IP mode of the IP address.
Security Level:
Select the Security Model of the management station.
Notification Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding
management station.
IP Address:
Displays the IP Address of the management host.
IP Mode:
Displays the IP mode of the IP address.
UDP Port:
Displays the UDP port used to send notifications.
315
User:
Displays the User name of the management station.
Security Model:
Displays the Security Model of the management station.
Security Level:
Displays the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User.
Type:
Displays the type of the notifications.
Retry:
Displays the amount of times the switch resends an inform
request.
Timeout:
Displays the maximum time for the switch to wait for the
response from the management station before resending a
request.
Operation:
Click the Edit button to modif
y the corresponding entry and
click the Modify button to apply.
15.3 RMON
RMON (Remote Monitoring) based on SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
architecture, functions to monitor the network. RMON is currently a commonly used network
management standard defined by Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF), which is mainly used to
monitor the data traffic across a network segment or even the entire network so as to enable the
network administrator to take the protection measures in time to avoid any network malfunction. In
addition, RMON MIB records network statistics information of network performance and
malfunction periodically, based on which the management station can monitor network at any time
effectively. RMON is helpful for network administrator to manage the large-scale network since it
reduces the communication traffic between management station and managed agent.
RMON Group
This switch supports the following four RMON Groups defined on the RMON standard (RFC1757):
History Group, Event Group, Statistic Group and Alarm Group.
RMON Group Function
History Group
After a history group is configured, the switch collects and records network
statistics information periodically, based on which the management station
can monitor network effectively.
Event Group Event Group is used to define RMON events. Alarms occur when an event is
detected.
Statistic Group Statistic Group is set to monitor the statistic of alarm variables on the specific
ports.
Alarm Group Alarm Group is configured to monitor the specific alarm variables. When the
value of a monitored variable exceeds the threshold, an alarm event is
generated, which triggers the switch to act in the set way.
316
The RMON Groups can be configured on the Statistics, History, Event and Alarm pages.
15.3.1 Statistics
On this page you can configure and view the statistics entry.
Choose the menu SNMP→RMON→Statistics to load the following page.
Figure 15-9 Statistics
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Statistics Config
ID:
Enter the ID number of statistics entry, ranging from 1 to 65535.
Port:
Enter or choose the Ethernet interface from which to collect the
statistics.
Owner:
Enter the owner name.
Status:
Choose the status of statistics entry.
• valid: The entry exists and is valid.
• underCreation: The entry exists, but is not valid.
Statistics Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding statistics
entry. It's multi-optional.
ID:
Displays the ID number of the statistics entry.
Port:
Di
splays the Ethernet interface from which to collect the
statistics.
Owner:
Displays the owner name.
Status:
Displays the status of the statistics entry.
317
15.3.2 History
On this page, you can configure the History Group for RMON.
Choose the menu SNMP→RMON→History to load the following page.
Figure 15-10 History Control
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
History Control Table
Select:
Select the desired entry for configuration.
Index:
Displays the index number of the entry.
Port:
Specify the port from which the history samples were taken.
Interval:
Specify the interval to take samplings from the port.
Max Buckets:
Displays the maximum number of buckets desired for the RMON
history group of statistics, ranging from 1 to 130
. The default is 50
buckets. 130 buckets supported at most so far.
Owner:
Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry.
Status:
Select Enable/Disable the corresponding sampling entry.
318
15.3.3 Event
On this page, you can configure the RMON events.
Choose the menu SNMP→RMON→Event to load the following page.
Figure 15-11 Event Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Event Table
Select:
Select the desired entry for configuration.
Index:
Displays the index number of the entry.
User:
Enter the name of the User or the community to which the
event belongs.
Description:
Give a description to the event for identification.
Type:
Select the event type, which determines the act way of the
network device in response to an event.
• None: No processing.
• Log: Logging the event.
• Notify: Sending trap messages to the management
station.
• Log&Notify: Logging the event and sending trap
messages to the management station.
Owner:
Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry.
Status:
Select Enable/Disable the corresponding event entry.
319
15.3.4 Alarm Config
On this page, you can configure Statistic Group and Alarm Group for RMON.
Choose the menu SNMP→RMON→Alarm to load the following page.
Figure 15-12 Alarm Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Alarm Config
Select:
Select the desired entry for configuration.
Index:
Displays the index number of the entry.
Variable
: Select the alarm variables from the pull-down list.
Statistics
:
Select the RMON statistics entry from which we get the value of
the selected alarm variable.
Sample Type:
Specify the sampling method for the selected variable and
comparing the value against the thresholds.
• Absolute:
Compares the values directly with the thresholds
at the end of the sampling interval.
• Delta:
Subtracts the last sampled value from the current
value. The difference in the values is compared to the
threshold.
Rising Threshol
d:
Enter the rising counter value that triggers the Rising Threshold
alarm.
Rising Event:
Select the index of the corresponding event which will be
triggered if the sampled value is larger than the Rising
Threshold.
Falling Threshold:
Enter the falling
counter value that triggers the Falling Threshold
alarm.
Falling Event:
Select the index of the corresponding event which will be
triggered if the sampled value is lower than the Falling
Threshold.
320
Alarm Type:
Specify the type of the alarm.
• All: The al
arm event will be triggered either the sampled
value exceeds the Rising Threshold or is under the Falling
Threshold.
• Rising:
When the sampled value exceeds the Rising
Threshold, an alarm event is triggered.
• Falling: When the sampled value is under the Falling
Threshold, an alarm event is triggered.
Interval:
Enter the alarm interval time in seconds.
Owner:
Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry.
Status:
Select Enable/Disable the corresponding alarm entry.
Note:
When alarm variables exceed the Threshold on the same direction continuously for several times,
an alarm event will only be generated on the first time, that is, the Rising Alarm and Falling Alarm
are triggered alternately for that the alarm following to Rising Alarm is certainly a Falling Alarm and
vice versa.
Return to CONTENTS
321
Chapter 16 LLDP
LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is a Layer 2 protocol that is used for network devices to
advertise their own device information periodically to neighbors on the same IEEE 802 local area
network. The advertised information, including details such as device identification, capabilities
and configuration settings, is represented in TLV (Type/Length/Value) format according to the
IEEE 802.1ab standard, and these TLVs are encapsulated in LLDPDU (Link Layer Discovery
Protocol Data Unit). The LLDPDU distributed via LLDP is stored by its recipients in a standard MIB
(Management Information Base), making it possible for the information to be accessed by a
Network Management System (NMS) using a management protocol such as the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
An IETF Standard MIB, as well as a number of vendor specific MIBs, have been created to
describe a network's physical topology and associated systems within that topology. However,
there is no standard protocol for populating these MIBs or communicating this information among
stations on the IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP protocol specifies a set. The device running LLDP can
automatically discover and learn about the neighbors, allowing for interoperability between the
network devices of different vendors. This protocol allows two systems running different network
layer protocols to learn about each other.
LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices) is an extension of LLDP
intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches. The
LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy, power via MDI, inventory
management, and device location details.
The LLDP and LLDP-MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify
troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network topology.
LLDPDU Format
Each LLDPDU includes an ordered sequence of three mandatory TLVs followed by one or more
optional TLVs plus an End of LLDPDU TLV, as shown in the figure below. Chassis ID TLV, Port ID
TLV, TTL TLV and End TLV are the four mandatory TLVs for a LLDPDU. Optional TLVs provide
various details about the LLDP agent advertising them and they are selected by network
management.
The maximum length of the LLDPDU shall be the maximum information field length allowed by the
particular transmission rate and protocol. In IEEE 802.3 MACs, for example, the maximum
LLDPDU length is the maximum data field length for the basic, untagged MAC frame (1500
octets).
LLDP Working Mechanism
1) LLDP Admin Status
The transmission and the reception of LLDPDUs can be separately enabled for every port, making
it possible to configure an implementation to restrict the port either to transmit only or receive only,
or to allow the port to both transmit and receive LLDPDUs. Four LLDP admin statuses are
supported by each port.
322
Tx&Rx: the port can both transmit and receive LLDPDUs.
Rx_Only: the port can receive LLDPDUs only.
Tx_Only: the port can transmit LLDPDUs only.
Disable: the port cannot transmit or receive LLDPDUs.
2) LLDPDU transmission mechanism
If the ports are working in TxRx or Tx mode, they will advertise local information by
sending LLDPDUs periodically.
If there is a change in the local device, the change notification will be advertised. To
prevent a series of successive LLDPDUs transmissions during a short period due to
frequent changes in local device, a transmission delay timer is set by network
management to ensure that there is a defined minimum time between successive LLDP
frame transmissions.
If the LLDP admin status of the port is changed from Disable/Rx to TxRx/Tx, the Fast
Start Mechanism will be active, the transmit interval turns to be 1 second, several
LLDPDUs will be sent out, and then the transmit interval comes back to the regular
interval.
3) LLDPDU receipt mechanism
When a port is working in TxRx or Rx mode, the device will check the validity of the received
LLDPDUs and the attached TLVs, save this neighbor information to the local device and then set
the aging time of this information according to the TTL value of TTL (Time To Live) TLV. Once the
TTL is 0, this neighbor information will be aged out immediately.
The aging time of the local information in the neighbor device is determined by TTL. Hold
Multiplier is a multiplier on the Transmit Interval that determines the actual TTL value used in an
LLDPDU. TTL = Hold Multiplier * Transmit Interval.
TLV
TLV refers to Type/Length/Value and is contained in a LLDPDU. Type identifies what kind of
information is being sent, Length indicates the length of information string in octets and Value is
the actual information to be sent. The basic TLV Format is shown as follows:
Each TLV is identified by a unique TLV type value that indicates the particular kind of information
contained in the TLV.
323
The following table shows the details about the currently defined TLVs.
TLV type TLV Name Description Usage in
LLDPDU
0 End of LLDPDU Mark the end of the TLV sequence in LLDPDUs.
Any information following an End Of LLDPDU
TLV shall be ignored.
Mandatory
1 Chassis ID Identifies the Chassis
address of the connected
device.
Mandatory
2 Port ID
Identifies the specific port that transmitted the
LLDP frame. When the device does not advertise
MED TLV, this field displays the port name of the
port; when the device advertises MED TLV, this
field displays the MAC address of the port.
Mandatory
3 Time To Live
Indicates the number of seconds that the
neighbor device is to regard the local information
to be valid.
Mandatory
4 Port Description Identifies the description string of the port. Optional
5 System Name Identifies the system name. Optional
6 System
Description
Identifies the system description. Optional
7 System
Capabilities
Identifies the main functions of the system and
the functions enabled.
Optional
8 Management
Address
Identifies the management IP address, the
corresponding interface number and OID (Object
Identifier). The management IP address is
specified by the user.
Optional
127 Organizationally
Specific
Allows different organizations, such as IEEE
802.1, IEEE 802.3, IETF, as well as individual
software and equipment vendors, to define TLVs
that advertise information to remote device.
Optional
Optional TLVs are grouped into two categories including basic management TLV and
Organizationally-specific TLV.
1) Basic Management TLV
A set of TLVs considered to be basic to the management of the network stations are required for
all LLDP implementations.
2) Organizationally Specific TLV
Different organizations have defined various TLVs. For instance, Port VLAN ID TLV, Port and
Protocol VLAN ID TLV, VLAN Name TLV And Protocol Identity TLV are defined by IEEE 802.1,
while MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV, Power Via MDI TLV, Link Aggregation TLV and
Maximum Frame TLV are defined by IEEE 802.3. Some specific TLVs are for LLDP-MED protocol,
such as LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV, Network Policy TLV, Extended Power-via-MDI TLV,
Hardware Revision TLV and so on.
324
Note:
For detailed introduction of TLV, please refer to IEEE 802.1AB standard and ANSI/TIA-1057.
In TP-LINK switch, the following LLDP optional TLVs are supported.
TLV Type Description
Port Description TLV
The Port Description TLV allows network management to
advertise the IEEE 802 LAN station's port description.
System Capabilities TLV
The System Capabilities TLV identifies the primary functions of
the system and whether or not these primary functions are
enabled.
System Description TLV The System Description TLV allows network management to
advertise the system's description, which should include the full
name and version identification of the system's hardware type,
software operating system, and networking software.
System Name TLV The System Name TLV allows network manageme
nt to
advertise the system's assigned name, which should be the
system's fully qualified domain name.
Management Address TLV The Management Address TLV identifies an address associated
with the local LLDP agent that may be used to reach higher
entities to assist discovery by network management.
Port VLAN ID TLV The Port VLAN ID TLV allows a VLAN bridge port to advertise
the port's VLAN identifier (PVID) that will be associated with
untagged or priority tagged frames.
Port And Protocol VLAN ID
TLV
The Por
t And Protocol VLAN ID TLV allows a bridge port to
advertise a port and protocol VLAN ID.
VLAN Name TLV The VLAN Name TLV allows an IEEE 802.1Q-compatible IEEE
802 LAN station to advertise the assigned name of any VLAN
with which it is configured.
Link Aggregation TLV
The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable
of being aggregated, whether the link is currently in an
aggregation, and if in an aggregation, the port identification of
the aggregation.
MAC/PHY
Configuration/Status TLV
The MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV identifies: a)The duplex
and bit-rate capability of the sending IEEE 802.3 LAN node that
is connected to the physical medium; b)The current duplex and
bit-rate settings of the sending IEEE 802.3 LAN node; c)Whether
these settings are the result of auto-
negotiation during link
initiation or of manual set override action.
Max Frame Size TLV The Maximum Frame Size TLV indicates the maximum frame
size capability of the implemented MAC and PHY.
Power Via MDI TLV The Power Via M
DI TLV allows network management to
advertise and discover the MDI power support capabilities of the
sending IEEE 802.3 LAN station.
325
The LLDP module is mainly for LLDP function configuration of the switch, including three
submenus: Basic Config, Device Info, Device Statistics and LLDP-MED.
16.1 Basic Config
LLDP is configured on the Global Config and Port Config pages.
16.1.1 Global Config
On this page you can configure the LLDP parameters of the device globally.
Choose the menu LLDP→Basic Config→Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 16-1 LLDP Global Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
LLDP: Enable/disable LLDP function globally.
Parameters Config
Transmit Interval:
Enter the interval for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its
neighbors. The default value is 30 seconds.
Hold Multiplier:
Enter a multiplier on the Transmit Interval. It determines the actual
TTL (Time To Li
ve) value used in an LLDPDU. TTL = Hold
Multiplier * Transmit Interval. The default value is 4.
Transmit Delay:
Enter a value from 1 to 8192 in seconds to specify the time for the
local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors after changes
occur so as to prevent LLDPDU being sent frequently.
The default
value is 2 seconds.
Reinit Delay: This parameter indicates the amount of delay from when LLDP
status becomes "disable" until re-initialization will be attempted.
The default value is 2 seconds.
Notification Interval:
Specify the interval of Trap message which will be sent from local
device to network management system. The default value is 5
seconds.
326
Fast Start Times:
When the port's LLDP state transforms from Disable (or Rx_Only)
to Tx&Rx (or Tx_Only)
, the fast start mechanism will be enabled,
that is, the transmit interval will be shorten to a second, and
several LLDPDUs will be sent out (the number of LLDPDUs
equals this parameter). The default value is 3.
16.1.2 Port Config
On this page you can configure all ports' LLDP parameters.
Choose the menu LLDP→Basic Config→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 16-2 LLDP Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
LLDP Port Config
Port Select: Select the desired port to configure.
Admin Status: Select the port’s LLDP operating mode:
Tx&Rx: send and receive LLDP frames.
Rx_Only: Only receive LLDP frames.
Tx_Only: Only send LLDP frames.
Disable: neither send nor receive LLDP frames.
327
Notification Mode: Allows you to enable or disable
the ports' SNMP notification. If
enabled, the local device will notify the trap event to SNMP server.
Included TLVs: Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU.
16.2 Device Info
You can view the LLDP information of the local device and its neighbors on the Local Info and
Neighbor Info pages respectively.
16.2.1 Local Info
On this page you can see all ports' configuration and system information.
Choose the menu LLDP→Device Info→Local Info to load the following page.
Figure 16-3 LLDP Local Information
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh: Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.
Refresh Rate: Specify the auto refresh rate.
Local Info
Select the desired port number to display the information of the corresponding port.
Local Interface: Display local port number.
328
Chassis ID Subtype:
Indicate the basis for the chassis ID, and the default subtype is
MAC address.
Chassis ID: Indicate the specific identifier for the particu
lar chassis in local
device.
Port ID Subtype:
Indicate the basis for the port ID, and the default subtype is
interface name.
Port ID: Indicate the specific identifier for the port in local device.
TTL: Indicate the number of seconds that the recipient L
LDP agent is to
regard the information associated with this chassis ID and port ID
identifier to be valid.
Port Description: Display local port's description.
System Name: Indicate local device's administratively assigned name.
System
Description:
Display local device's system description.
System Capabilities
Supported:
Display the supported function of the local device.
System Capabilities
Enabled:
Display the primary function of the local device.
Management
Address:
Display the supported function of the local device.
16.2.2 Neighbor Info
On this page you can get the information of the neighbors.
Choose the menu LLDP→Device Info→Neighbor Info to load the following page.
Figure 16-4 LLDP Neighbor Information
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh: Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.
329
Refresh Rate: Specify the auto refresh rate.
Neighbor Info
System Name: Displays the system name of the neighbor device.
Chassis ID: Displays the Chassis ID of the neighbor device.
System Description:
Displays the system description of the neighbor device.
Neighbor Port: Displays the port number of the neighbor linking to local port.
Information:
Click Information to display the detailed information of the
neighbor device.
16.3 Device Statistics
You can view the LLDP statistics of the local device through this feature.
Choose the menu LLDP→Device Statistics→Statistic Info to load the following page.
Figure 16-5 LLDP Statistic Information
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh: Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.
Refresh Rate: Specify the auto refresh rate.
330
Global Statistics
Last Update: Displays latest update time of the statistics.
Total Inserts: Displays the number of neighbors inserted till last update time.
Total Deletes: Displays the number of neighbors deleted by local device.
Total Drops: Displays the number of neighbors dropped by local device.
Total Ageouts: Displays the number of overtime neighbors in local device.
Neighbor Statistics
Port: Displays local device's port number.
Transmit Total: Displays the number of LLDPDUs sent by this port.
Receive Total: Displays the number of LLDPDUs received by this port.
Discards: Displays the number of LLDPDUs discarded by this port.
Errors: Displays the number of error LLDPDUs received by this port.
Ageouts: Displays the number of overtime neighbors linking to this port.
TLV Discards: Displays the number of TLVs dropped by this port.
TLV Unknowns: Displays the number of unknown TLVs received by this port.
16.4 LLDP-MED
LLDP-MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over
IP phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as network
policy, power via MDI, inventory management, and device location details.
Elements
LLDP-MED Device: Refers to any device which implements this Standard.
LLDP-MED Device Type: LLDP-MED devices are comprised of two primary device types:
Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices.
Network Connectivity Device: Refers to an LLDP-MED Device that provides access to the IEEE
802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices. Bridge is a Network Connectivity
Device.
Endpoint Device: Refers to an LLDP-MED Device at the network edge, providing some aspects
of IP communications service, based on IEEE 802 LAN technology. Endpoint Devices may be a
member of any of the Endpoint Device Classes. Endpoint Devices are composed of three defined
Classes: Class I, Class II and Class III.
Generic Endpoint Device (Class I): The most basic class of Endpoint Device.
Media Endpoint Device (Class II): The class of Endpoint Device that supports media stream
capabilities.
Communication Device Endpoint (Class III): The class of Endpoint Device that directly supports
end users of the IP communication system.
TLV Description
Network Policy TLV
The Network Policy TLV allows both Network Connectivity
Devices and Endpoints to advertise VLAN configuration and
associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes that apply for a set
of specific applications on that port.
331
Location Identification TLV
The Location Identification TLV provides for advertisement of
location identifier information to Communication Endpoint
Devices, based on configuration of the Network Connectivity
Device
it's connected to. You can set the Location
Identification content in Location Identification Parameters. If
Location Identification TLV is included and Location
Identification Parameters isn't set, a default value is used in
Location Identification TLV.
Extended Power-Via-MDI TLV The Extended Power-Via-
MDI TLV is intended to enable
advanced power management between LLDP-MED Endpoint
and Network Connectivity Devices, and it allows
advertisement of fine grained power requirement details,
Endpoint power priority, as well as both Endpoint and Network
Connectivity Device power status.
Inventory TLV
The Inventory TLV set contains seven basic Inventory
management TLVs, that is, Hardware Revision TLV, Firmware
Revision TLV, Software Revision TLV, Serial Number TLV,
Manufacturer Name TLV, Model Name TLV and Asset ID
TLV. If support for any of the TLVs in the Inventory
Management set is implemented, then support for all
Inventory Management TLVs shall be implemented.
LLDP-MED is configured on the Global Config, Port Config, Local Info and Neighbor Info
pages.
16.4.1 Global Config
On this page you can configure the LLDP-MED parameters of the device globally.
Choose the menu LLDP→LLDP-MED→Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 16-6 LLDP-MED Global Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
LLDP-MED Parameters Config
Fast Start Count: When LLDP-
MED fast start mechanism is activated, multiple
LLDP-MED frames will be transmitted based on this parameter.
Device Class: LLDP-
MED devices are comprised of two primary device types:
Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices. In turn,
Endpoint Dev
ices are composed of three defined Classes: Class I,
Class II and Class III. Bridge is a Network Connectivity Device.
16.4.2 Port Config
On this page you can configure all ports' LLDP-MED parameters.
332
Choose the menu LLDP→LLDP-MED→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 16-7 LLDP-MED Port Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
LLDP-MED Port Config
Port: Displays local device's port number.
LLDP-MED Status: Configure the port's LLDP-MED status:
Enable: Enable the port's LLDP-
MED status, and the port's Admin
Status will be changed to Tx&Rx.
Disable: Disable the port's LLDP-MED status.
Included TLVs: Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU.
Detail: Click the Detail button
to display the included TLVs and select the
desired TLVs.
333
Included TLVs
Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU.
Location Identification Parameters
Configure the Location Identification TLV's content in outgoing LLDPDU of the port.
Emergency
Number:
Emergency number is Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier,
which is used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA
or ISDN trunk-based PSAP.
Civic Address: The Civic address is defined to reuse the relevant sub-fields of the
DHCP option for Civic Address based Location Configuration
Information as specified by IETF.
334
16.4.3 Local Info
On this page you can see all ports' LLDP-MED configuration.
Choose the menu LLDP→LLDP-MED→Local Info to load the following page.
Figure 16-8 LLDP-MED Local Information
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh: Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.
Refresh Rate: Specify the auto refresh rate.
LLDP-MED Local Info
Select the local port number to display its LLDP information.
Note:
For the switches with PoE function, the local information displayed on the page also include Power
Type, Power Source, Power Priority and Available Power Value.
335
16.4.4 Neighbor Info
On this page you can get the LLDP-MED information of the neighbors.
Choose the menu LLDP→LLDP-MED→Neighbor Info to load the following page.
Figure 16-9 LLDP-MED Neighbor Information
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh: Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.
Refresh Rate: Specify the auto refresh rate.
Neighbor Info
Device Type: Displays the device type of the neighbor.
Application Type: Displays the application type of the neighbor.
Application Type
indicates the primary function of the appl
ications defined for the
network policy.
Local Data Format: Displays the location identification of the neighbor.
Power Type:
Displays the power type of the neighbor device, Power Sourcing
Entity (PSE) or Powered Device (PD).
Information: Click the Information
button to display the detailed information of
the corresponding neighbor.
Return to CONTENTS
336
Chapter 17 Maintenance
Maintenance module, assembling the commonly used system tools to manage the switch,
provides the convenient method to locate and solve the network problem.
（1） System Monitor: Monitor the utilization status of the memory and the CPU of switch.
（2） sFlow: A technology for accurately monitoring network traffic at high speeds.
（3） Log: View the configuration parameters of the switch and find out the errors via the Logs.
（4） Device Diagnostics: Cable Test tests the connection status of the cable to locate and
diagnoses the trouble spot of the network.
（5） Network Diagnostics: Test whether the destination device is reachable and detect the
route hops from the switch to the destination device.
17.1 System Monitor
System Monitor functions to display the utilization status of the memory and the CPU of switch via
the data graph. The CPU utilization rate and the memory utilization rate should fluctuate stably
around a specific value. If the CPU utilization rate or the memory utilization rate increases
markedly, please detect whether the network is being attacked.
The System Monitor function is implemented on the CPU Monitor and Memory Monitor pages.
17.1.1 CPU Monitor
Choose the menu Maintenance→System Monitor→CPU Monitor to load the following page.
337
Figure 17-1 CPU Monitor
Click the Monitor button to enable the switch to monitor and display its CPU utilization rate every
four seconds.
17.1.2 Memory Monitor
Choose the menu Maintenance→System Monitor→Memory Monitor to load the following page.
338
Figure 17-2 Memory Monitor
Click the Monitor button to enable the switch to monitor and display its Memory utilization rate
every four seconds.
17.2 sFlow
sFlow (Sampled Flow) is a technology for accurately monitoring network traffic at high speeds.
The sFlow monitoring system consists of an sFlow agent (embedded in a switch or router or in a
standalone probe) and a central sFlow collector. The sFlow agent is a virtual entity using sampling
technology to capture traffic statistics from the device it is monitoring. The sFlow collector can be a
host receiving sFlow datagrams from the sFlow agent.
The sFlow function is implemented as follows: the sFlow sampler takes samples of traffic statistics
and sends sFlow datagrams to the sFlow agent for processing. The sFlow agent will forward
sFlow datagrams to the sFlow collector for analysis. The analytic results can be displayed on the
sFlow collector.
The sFlow function is implemented on the sFlow Collector and sFlow Sampler pages.
339
17.2.1 sFlow Collector
Figure 17-3 sFlow Collector
Configuration Procedure:
1) Click Enable to enable the sFlow function globally and configure the sFlow agent’s IP under the
Global Config. For example, you can set the switch’s management IP as the sFlow agent’s IP.
2) Select your desired collector and configure relevant parameters under the Collector Config.
Entry Description:
Global Config
sFlow Status: Choose to enable or disable
the sFlow function globally on the
switch.
Agent Address: The IPv4 address of the sFlow agent.
sFlow Version: Displays the sFlow version here.
Collector Config
Select: Select the desired collector. It is multi-optional.
Collector ID:
Displays the Collector ID here. The number of collectors you can
configure is 4 at most.
Description: Give a description to the collector for identification.
Collector IP: Assign an IP address to the sFlow coll
ector. The sFlow collector
can be a host.
Collector Port: Specify the udp port number for the sFlow collector.
Timeout (s)
：
Specify the aging time of the sFlow collector.
The collector will
become invalid after this time.
When the timeout is set to 0, it
means the life cycle of the collector is infinite.
Lifetime (s)
：
Specify the remaining time of the collector. Lifetime wil
l count
down from Timeout.
340
17.2.2 sFlow Sampler
Figure 17-4 sFlow Sampler
Configuration Procedure:
Configure one or more ports to be a sampler and configure relevant parameters under the
Sampler Config. One port can only be bound to one collector.
Entry Description:
Select Configure the desired port to be the sFlow sampler.
Port: Displays the port of the switch here.
Collector ID:
Select the sFlow collector for the sFlow sampler. The sampler will
send sFlow data
grams to corresponding collector via the sFlow
agent. When the C
ollector ID is 0, it means no collector is
selected.
Ingress Rate:
Specify the ingress sampling frequency of the sFlow sampler.
When a sample is taken, the value indicates how many packets to
skip before the next sample is taken.
Egress Rate:
Specify the egress sampling frequency of the sFlow sampler.
When a sample is taken, the value indicates how many packets to
skip before the next sample is taken.
Max Header: Specify the maximum number o
f bytes that should be copied from
a sampled packet.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
341
17.2.3 Default Settings
Feature Default Settings
Global sFlow function Disabled.
sFlow Agent The Agent Address is not defined.
sFlow Collector Collector Port is 6343.
Max Datagram is 300 bytes.
The other parameters are not defined.
sFlow Sampler
Collector ID is 0.It means no collector is
selected.
Ingress Rate is 0. I
t means no packets will be
sampled.
Egress Rate is 0. I
t means no packets will be
sampled.
Max Header is 128 bytes.
17.3 Log
The Log system of switch can record, classify and manage the system information effectively,
providing powerful support for network administrator to monitor network operation and diagnose
malfunction.
The Logs of switch are classified into the following eight levels.
Severity Level Description
emergencies 0 The system is unusable.
alerts 1 Action must be taken immediately.
critical 2 Critical conditions
errors 3 Error conditions
warnings 4 Warnings conditions
notifications 5 Normal but significant conditions
informational 6 Informational messages
debugging 7 Debug-level messages
Table 17-1 Log Level
The Log function is implemented on the Log Table, Local Log, Remote Log and Backup Log
pages.
17.3.1 Log Table
The switch supports logs output to two directions, namely, log buffer and log file. The information
in log buffer will be lost after the switch is rebooted or powered off whereas the information in log
file will be kept effective even the switch is rebooted or powered off. Log Table displays the system
log information in log buffer.
Choose the menu Maintenance→Log→Log Table to load the following page.
342
Figure 17-1 Log Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Log Info
Index
: Displays the index of the log information.
Time
: Displays the time when the l
og event occurs. The log can get the
correct time after you configure on the System ->System
Info->System Time Web management page.
Severity
:
Displays the severity level of the log information. You can select a
severity level to display the log information whose severity level value
is the same or smaller.
Content
: Displays the content of the log information.
Note:
1. The logs are classified into eight levels based on severity. The higher the information severity
is, the lower the corresponding level is.
2. This page displays logs in the log buffer, and at most 512 logs are displayed.
17.3.2 Local Log
Local Log is the log information saved in switch. By default, the logs with severities from level_0 to
level_6 are saved in log buffer and the logs with severities from level_0 to level_3 are saved in log
file meanwhile. On this page, you can set the output channel for logs.
Choose the menu Maintenance→Log→Local Log to load the following page.
343
Figure 17-2 Local Log
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Local Log Config
Select
: Select the desired entry to configure the corresponding local log.
Channel
: • Log buffer:
Indicates the RAM for saving system log. The
inforamtion in the log buffer is displayed on the Log
Table
page. It will be lost when the switch is restarted.
• Log File: Indicates the flash sector f
or saving system log.
The informa
tion in the log file will not be lost after the switch
is restarted and can be exported on the Backup Log page.
Severity
: Spe
cify the severity level of the log information output to each
channel. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level
value will be output.
Status
: Enable/Disable the channel.
Sync
-Periodic: Specify how frequent the log information would be synchro
nized
to the log file.
17.3.3 Remote Log
Remote log feature enables the switch to send system logs to the Log Server. Log Server is to
centralize the system logs from various devices for the administrator to monitor and manage the
whole network.
344
Choose the menu Maintenance→Log→Remote Log to load the following page.
Figure 17-3 Log Host
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Log Host
Index
:
Displays the index of the log host. The switch supports 4 log
hosts.
Host IP
: Configure the IP for the log host.
UDP Port
:
Displays the UDP port used for receiving/sending log
information. Here we use the standard port 514.
Severity
:
Specify the severity level of the log information sent to each log
host. Only the lo
g with the same or smaller severity level value
will be sent to the corresponding log host.
Status
: Enable/Disable the log host.
Note:
The Log Server software is not provided. If necessary, please download it on the Internet.
17.3.4 Backup Log
Backup Log feature enables the system logs saved in the switch to be output as a file for device
diagnosis and statistics analysis. When a critical error results in the breakdown of the system, you
can export the logs to get some related important information about the error for device diagnosis
after the switch is restarted.
Choose the menu Maintenance→Log→Backup Log to load the following page.
345
Figure 17-4 Backup Log
The following entry is displayed on this screen:
Backup Log
Backup Log
: Click the Backup Log button to save the log as a file to your computer.
Note:
1. When a critical error results in the breakdown of the system, you can export the log file to get
some related important information about the error for device diagnosis after the switch is
restarted.
2. It will take a few minutes to backup the log file. Please wait without any operation.
17.4 Device Diagnostics
This switch provides Cable Test for device diagnose.
17.4.1 Cable Test
Cable Test functions to test the connection status of the cable connected to the switch, which
facilitates you to locate and diagnose the trouble spot of the network.
Choose the menu Maintenance→Device Diagnostics→Cable Test to load the following page.
Figure 17-5 Cable Test
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Cable Test
Port
: Select the port for cable testing.
346
Pair
: Displays the Pair number.
Status
:
Displays the connection status of the cable connected to the port. The
test results of the cable include normal, close, open or impedance.
Length
:
If the connection status is normal, here displays the length range of
the cable.
Error
:
If the connection status is close, open or impedance, here displays the
error length of the cable.
Note:
1. The interval between two cable tests for one port must be more than 3 seconds.
2. The result is more reasonable when the cable pair is in the open status.
3. The result is just for your information.
17.5 Network Diagnostics
This switch provides Ping test and Tracert test functions for network Diagnostics.
17.5.1 Ping
Ping test function, testing the connectivity between the switch and one node of the network,
facilitates you to test the network connectivity and reachability of the host so as to locate the
network malfunctions.
Choose the menu Maintenance→Network Diagnostics→Ping to load the following page.
Figure 17-6 Ping
347
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Ping Config
Destination IP
: Enter the IP address of the destination node for Ping test.
Both IPv4
and IPv6 are supported.
Ping Times
:
Enter the amount of times to send test data during Ping testing. The
default value is recommended.
Data Size
:
Enter the size of the sending data during Ping testing. The default
value is recommended.
Interval
:
Specify the interval to send ICMP request packets. The default value
is recommended.
17.5.2 Tracert
Tracert test function is used to test the connectivity of the gateways during its journey from the
source to destination of the test data. When malfunctions occur to the network, you can locate
trouble spot of the network with this tracert test.
Choose the menu Maintenance→Network Diagnostics→Tracert to load the following page.
Figure 17-7 Tracert
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Tracert Config
Destination IP
: Enter the IP address of the destination device.
Both IPv4 and IPv6 are
supported.
Max Hop
:
Specify the maximum number of the route hops the test data can pass
through.
Return to CONTENTS
348
Appendix A. Password Recovery
This chapter introduces the procedure to reset passwords on TP-LINK switches.
Steps to reset the password:
1. For Security reasons, the Password Recovery feature requires the user to physically access
the switch. Please attach a terminal or PC with terminal emulation program to the
RJ-45/Micro-USB console port of the switch.
2. Configure the terminal or the terminal emulation program to use the following settings:
• Baud rate: 38400 bps
• Data bits: 8
• Parity: none
• Stop bits: 1
• Flow control: none
3. Power on the switch. After the message ‘Hit any key to stop autoboot’ is shown on the interface
of the terminal emulation program, the switch will allows 3 seconds for the user to press any
key to enter the BOOTUTIL Interface.
4. Enter 6 to select the ‘Password recovery’ option and enter Y to delete all the users and
passwords. The default login username and password are both admin. The other
configurations in the switch will not be changed.
349
Appendix B. Specifications
Standards
IEEE802.3i 10Base-T Ethernet
IEEE802.3u 100Base-TX/100Base-FX Fast Ethernet
IEEE802.3ab 1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE802.3z 1000Base-X Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE802.3x Flow Control
IEEE802.1p QoS
IEEE802.1q VLAN
Transmission Rate
Ethernet: 10Mbps HD，20Mbps FD
Fast Ethernet: 100Mbps HD，200Mbps FD
Gigabit Ethernet: 2000Mbps FD
Transmission Medium
10Base-T: UTP/STP of Cat. 3 or above
100Base-TX: UTP/STP of Cat. 5 or above
1000Base-T: 4-pair UTP (≤100m) of Cat. 5e, Cat.6 or
above
1000Base-X: MMF or SMF SFP Module (Optional)
LED
T2600G-28TS: PWR, SYS, 1000Mbps, Link/Act
T2600G-52TS: PWR,SYS, 10/100/1000Mbps (port 1-48)
,
Link/Act (port 49-52)
T2600G-28MPS: PWR,SYS, 10/100/1000Mbps (port 1-24)
,
Link/Act (port 25-28)
Transmission Method Store and Forward
Packets Forwarding Rate
10BASE-T：14881pps/port
100BASE-TX：148810pps/port
1000Base-T：1488095pps/port
1000Base-X：1488095pps/port
Operating
Environment
Operating Temperature: 0
℃
~ 40
℃
Storage Temperature: -40℃~ 70℃
Operating Humidity: 10% ~ 90% RH Non-condensing
Storage Humidity: 5% ~ 90% RH Non-condensing
Return to CONTENTS
350
Appendix C. Glossary
Boot Protocol (BOOTP)
BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices, including IP address
information, the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files, and the name
of the boot file.
Class of Service (CoS)
CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service, and then placing
them in the appropriate output queue. Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted
round-robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower-level queues. Priority
may be set according to the port default, the packet’s priority bit (in the VLAN tag), TCP/UDP port
number, or DSCP priority bit.
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
DSCP uses a six-bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors. Based on network
policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP bits
are mapped to the Class of Service categories, and then into the output queues.
Domain Name Service (DNS)
A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses.
Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP)
Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP/IP network. DHCP
is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of
reusable network addresses and additional configuration options..
IEEE 802.1D
Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges, including the Spanning Tree
Protocol.
IEEE 802.1Q
VLAN Tagging—Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information. It allows switches to
assign endstations to different virtual LANs, and defines a standard way for VLANs to
communicate across switched networks.
IEEE 802.1p
An IEEE standard for providing quality of service (QoS) in Ethernet networks. The standard uses
packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on
the tagged priority value.
IEEE 802.3ac
Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging.
IEEE 802.3x
Defines Ethernet frame start/stop requests and timers used for flow control on full-duplex links.
(Now incorporated in IEEE 802.3-2002)
351
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services. If there is
more than one multicast switch/router on a given subnetwork, one of the devices is made the
“querier” and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership.
IGMP Snooping
Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast routers and
IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members.
IGMP Query
On each subnetwork, one IGMP-capable device will act as the querier — that is, the device that
asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong.
The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork.
IP Multicast Filtering
It is a feature to allow or deny the Client to add the specified multicast group.
Multicast Switching
A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services forwhich no attached
host has registered, or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast group.
Layer 2
Data Link layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This is related directly to the
hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses.
Link Aggregation
See Port Trunk.
Management Information Base (MIB)
An acronym for Management Information Base. It is a set of database objects that contains
information about a specific device.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm
An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures. It is intended for use with 32 bit machines
and is safer than the MD4 algorithm, which has been broken. MD5 is a one-way hash function,
meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits, also called a message
digest.
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network. The time servers operate
in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet
and to national time standards via wire or radio.
Port Mirroring
A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a
logic analyzer or RMON probe. This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively.
Port Trunk
Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single
high-speed logical link that combines several lower-speed physical links.
352
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)
RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to
control access to RADIUS-compliant devices on the network.
Remote Monitoring (RMON)
RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities. It eliminates the polling required
in standard SNMP, and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions, including specific error
types.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10% of that required
by the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management
services.
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server, or can be received
via broadcasts sent by NTP servers.
Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)
A technology that checks your network for any loops. A loop can often occur in complicated or
backup linked network systems. Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest
available path, maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network.
Telnet
Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP/IP.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol, and IP as the network layer
protocol.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
UDP provides a datagram mode for packet-switched communications. It uses IP as the underlying
transport mechanism to provide access to IP-like services. UDP packets are delivered just like IP
packets – connection-less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets. UDP is
useful when TCP would be too complex, too slow, or just unnecessary.
Virtual LAN (VLAN)
A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of
their physical location or connection point in the network. A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup
with no physical barriers, and allows users to share information and resources as though located
on the same LAN.
Return to CONTENTS
353